Skip to main content

Full text of "Lake Forest High School - The First Thirty Years"

See other formats


LAKE 

FOREST 
HIGH 

SCHOOL 

THE   FIRST 
^aTHIRT^yEARS 


Dedication 


To  the  ideals  of  progressive  education, 

and  to  the  Service  League  and  General  Spooner,  without  whose  aid  this 

book  would  not  have  been  published. 


Editor:  John  Gwynn 

Assistant  Editor:  Michael  Mareneck 

Special  Assistants  to  the  Editor:  Mindy  Balma,  Mindy  Beck,  Jean  Price 

Advisor:  Mr.  Donald  Spooner 


Written  by: 

Debbie  Anaclerio 
Mindy  Balma 
Mindy  Beck 
Brad  Brinegar 
Peggy  Brown 
Robin  Casselberry 
Brad  Daniels 
Sharon  De  Long 
Pam  Dorge 
Kathy  DuVall 
John  Evers 
Patty  Grotts 
John  Gwynn 
Tom  Havey 
Janis  Jordan 
Carl  Kitzerow 


Valerie  Manenti 
Michael  Mareneck 

David  Mattoon 
Kim  Neill 
Paul  Nielsen 
Ann  O'Connor 
Megan  Overby 
Phil  Peterson 
Jean  Price 
Amy  Schuetz 
Marianne  Seiler 
Nancy  Silliman 
Robin  Simmen 
Steve  Stevens 
Sharon  Wagner 


Table  of  Contents 


A  Fireside  Chat  with  the  Editors 1 

Part  1:  The  First  Years  (1935-1941) .  .  3 

Keeping  Lake  Forest  Beautiful  (Community) 3 

The  Plant  is  Seeded  (Plant)   4 

Chuckers  of  Well-Aimed  Erasers  (Faculty) 11 

The  Chuckees  (Students)    15 

Lots  of  Latin  and  a  Little  Dancin'  (Curriculum  and  Co-Curricular 

Activities)    20 

Part  2:  The  War  Years  (1941-1948)   23 

The  Home  Front  (Community)   23 

Building  Strong  Bodies  Twelve  Ways  (Faculty) 26 

Kilroy  Was  Here  (Students)   29 

Snake  Dance  Through  the  War  (Curriculum  and  Co-Curricular 

Activities) 32 

The  Ultra-Violet  Light  Debacle    38 

The  Great  Divorce  (The  Township  Split)   40 

Part  3:  The  Fun  Years  (1948-1958)   45 

The  Chaperones  (Faculty)    45 

Inside  Joe  Student  and  His  White  Sweatsocks  (Students) 46 

Bus  tin'  Bob  and  His  Cowboys  (Curriculum  and  Co-Curricular 

Activities)    51 

Something  To  Be  Proud  of  (Community) 58 

Part  4:  The  Awakening  Years  (1958-1965) 63 

The  Economics  of  Education  (Community) 63 

Campus  Changes  (Plant)    68 

The  Regis  Toomey  Fan  Club  (Faculty) 71 

Have  Pass,  Can  Travel  (Students)   74 

Readin',  'Ruin',  'n'  'Rithmitic  (Curriculum  and  Co-Curricular 

Activities) 78 

Part  5:  Monographs 85 

The  Third  Floor 85 

Cellar    88 

The  Student  Council 90 

Dr.  Raymond  Moore    93 

Epilogue    99 

Part  6:  Appendix 103 

Athletic  Scores,   1935-1965 103 

Graph  of  Student  Population,  1935-1965   . 104 

Evolution  of  Curriculum,  1935-1965 105 

List  of  Teachers  and  When  They  Taught 108 

Faculty  Salaries,  1935-6  and  1964-5  113 

Graph  of  Approximate  Average  Faculty  Salaries,  1935-1965 115 

Original  Floor  Plans 116 

Part  7:  List  of  Sources  Consulted 119 

v 


A  Fireside  Chat  With  the  Editors 

When  I  first  got  the  great  bundle  of  manuscripts  that  went  into  this  book  from 
our  editor,  John,  last  summer,  I  was  hit  with  a  certain  surge  of  pride.  Finally,  for 
the  first  time  since  we  had  begun  this  project,  it  was  all  there,  all  together,  all  typed; 
I  felt  newly  encouraged,  like  I  and  the  other  authors  had  felt  that  first  day  when  we 
had  just  voted  to  go  ahead  and  research  and  write  the  history  of  30  years  of  Lake 
Forest  High  School.  The  vote  had  been  nearly  unanimous,  with  only  two  people  not 
going  along  with  the  idea,  and  one  because  he  never  went  along  with  anything.  The 
other  person  who  voted  against  it,  a  girl,  passionately  implored  the  rest  of  us  to 
realize  the  only  realistic  outcome  of  the  project:  not  a  successful  history,  but  an 
incomplete  mess  of  boring  research  papers.  She  refused  to  believe  that  the  30  of  us 
could  break  tradition  and  effectively  work  together,  either  in  or  out  of  committees, 
and  come  up  with  something  good  and  into  which  we  all  had  put  equal  effort.  She 
doubted  that  any  of  us  in  there  had  the  enthusiasm  and  the  endurance  to  do  the 
deep  digging  and  endless  questioning  we  had  to  do  in  gathering  all  the  research. 
And  I  think  she  was  skeptical  whether  even  one  of  our  30  beanbrains  had  the 
capacity  to  sift  out  all  the  misinformation  in  that  research  and  collate  what  we  did 
want,  and  then  put  it  together.  But,  she  was  voted  down,  the  project  was  on,  and  I 
must  say  thereafter  she  worked  just  as  hard  as  anybody  else. 

Eight  months  later,  here  it  was  nearly  completed  in  front  of  me.  As  I  read  it 
through,  my  stirred-up  pride  slowly  dissolved.  My  encouragement  had  faded  to  dis- 
couragement as  I  reached  the  middle  sections  and  by  the  eid,  I  was  disheartened. 
The  whole  packet  was  far  from  where  I  had  thought  it  would  be.  It  lacked  continu- 
ity. Only  a  complete  rewrite  could  fix  it  up  I  felt,  and  sru  ved  it  awav  into  a  drawer. 
Then,  all  those  things  that  one  dissenting  girl  had  said  flooded  back  to  me,  and  I 
could  only  wonder  if  she  hadn't  been  right. 

Ten  days  later  I  pulled  it  out  and,  resolved  *o  the  fact  that  a  rewrite  was  im- 
possible, I  looked  at  it  as  it  was  to  be:  a  collection  of  articles,  some  more  detailed 
than  others,  some  beautifully  written  and  some  barely  readable,  some  long,  some 
short,  some  boring,  some  quite  good.  T  accepted  it — it  was  our  project — and  went 
to  work,  and  now,  after  patching  up  by  still  others  after  me,  it  is  finished  and  ready 
to  go  to  press. 

I  feel  much  differently  after  working  on  it  through  the  summer  and  watching  it 
up  to  this  final  stage  than  I  felt  after  that  great  initial  letdown.  It  was  just  a  matter 
of  reaching  that  hard  realization  there  of  what  this  book  is  and  isn't.  It's  not  a 
masterpiece  of  historical  writing  by  any  means;  it  bogs  down  with  facts  in  places 
and  gets  thin  in  others;  it's  not  all  neatly  tied  together  with  profound  conclusions  nor 
edited  so  finely  as  to  delete  all  repetition  and  redundance.  And  it  won't  hold  your 
interest  through  its  entire  length — I  won't  deny  it,  I've  gotten  drowsy  several  times 
going  over  certain  sections. 

But  what  this  book  is  is  the  product  of  some  very  hard-working  students  and 
one  helpful  teacher.  Certainly  there  were  some  who  did  end  up  doing  more  than 
others — but  nobody  backed  out  when  they  were  called  on.  The  research  that  went 
into  these  100  and  some  pages  still  amazes  me.  We  have  massive  files  stuffed  with 
facts  and  interpretation  we  didn't  print,  as  well  as  a  sizable  section  of  things  we 
couldn't  print  for  various  reasons.  (Just  ask  one  of  the  authors  to  tell  you  a  few  good 
stories  or  pass  on  a  strange  rumor  about  some  of  the  characters  that  have  been  a 
part  of  this  school,  whether  as  teachers,  students,  or  administrators.)  All  the  re- 
search was  collected  by  the  authors,  in  dozens  of  personal  interviews  with  former 


school  personnel  and  pupils,  from  countless  old  newspapers,  journals,  and  year- 
books, and  from  volumes  of  crusty  files  and  records.  It  has  never  all  been  assembled 
into  one  printed  source  before. 

This  book  has  been  a  group  effort.  It  is  a  collection  of  articles  concerned  with 
all  aspects  of  Lake  Forest  High  School  and  the  life  within  it  during  the  30  years 
from  its  opening  in  1935  until  the  initial  plan — laying  for  a  second  campus,  in  1965. 
It  includes  the  details  of  the  plant  (the  physical  building),  its  construction  and  an- 
nexations, the  changes  in  the  nature  of  the  community  surrounding  the  school  and 
its  relationship  with  the  school,  and  descriptions  of  the  faculty,  students,  and  cur- 
ricular  and  co-curricular  programs  offered  and  the  changes  in  each  of  these  in  those 
30  years. 

The  book  is  organized  into  parts,  the  dividing  lines  being  significant  dates  in 
the  school's  history:  1935,  construction  of  the  school;  1941,  the  beginning  of  the 
second  World  War;  1948,  the  break  with  the  Highland  Park  High  School  district 
and  the  formation  of  a  new  district;  1958,  the  construction  of  the  large  annex  and 
auditorium;  and  1965,  the  year  that  saw  the  first  stages  of  planning  another  campus. 

Hopefully,  in  time,  someone  will  update  this  history  and  take  it  past  1965 
through  to  the  present;  but  for  now  it  stands.  It  is  the  first  comprehenhive  history  of 
Lake  Forest  High  School,  the  first  book  published  by  a  class  at  the  High  School, 
and  the  first  time  I've  written  a  preface. 

M,  Mareneck 
December,  1972 


P.S.  B.S.  From  the  Editor 

There  is  little  that  I  can  add  to  what  Mike  has  said,  my  sentiments  have  pretty 
much  paralleled  his.  I  am  not  asking  for  a  parental  pat  on  the  back,  nor  am  I  apolo- 
gizing for  the  book's  apparent  shortcomings,  but  I  am  requesting  that  the  reader 
judge  this  book  in  its  proper  perspective.  Our  goal  was  to  write  an  informative, 
accurate  and  meaningful  account  of  something  which  intimately  touched  us  all,  our 
school.  Whether  we  succeeded  in  this  or  not  is  really  secondary  in  importance.  We 
are  neophyte  historians,  but  full  time  students;  the  essence  of  the  project  was  as  an 
educational  experience.  And  as  such  it  might  be  the  harbinger  of  a  new  type  of 
learning.  For  me,  this  book  resurrects  and  redefines  the  ubiquitous  and  overworked 
term,  "relevancy."  We  looked  into  our  own  historical  backyard,  retraced  the  vicis- 
situdes of  those  not  too  different  from  ourselves,  and  emerged  with  armfuls  of 
memories  and  a  little  clearer  idea  of  where  we  have  been  and  how  we  got  where  we 
are  now.  Perhaps  the  most  significant  aspect  of  this  project  is  that  it  was  conceived 
in  a  highly  competitive  educational  atmosphere,  a  class  of  individuals  who  molded 
together  into  a  competent  and  cooperative  research  team.  The  enthusiasm,  the 
interest,  the  response  in  terms  of  labor,  was  incredible.  It  was  the  shared  sympathies 
of  a  group  united  in  a  common  cause,  reminiscent  of  the  school  spirit  at  the  "Snake 
Dances"  of  Homecomings  almost  forgotten,  and  the  sentiments  of  the  school  and 
the  whole  country  during  the  war.  Perhaps  it  is  by  the  perception  of  these  analogies 
and  the  participation  in  this  out  of  style  feeling  of  shared  purpose,  that  this  book 
has  enriched  us  and  proved  itself  eminently  worthwhile. 

John  Gwynn,  Editor 
December,  1972 


Parti 

Keeping  Lake  Forest  Beautiful 

(Community) 

As  Lake  Forest  approached  the  building  of  its  own  high  school,  it  began  to 
consider  the  new  issues  connected  with  it.  An  increase  in  the  community's  popula- 
tion was  expected.  One  suggestion  for  providing  new  land  for  homes  was  the  an- 
nexation of  Lake  Bluff.  New  homeowners  might  then  more  readily  join  the  com- 
munity, providing  a  good  market  for  those  who  wanted  to  sell.  Property  values 
would  be  supported  in  the  event  of  a  slump  during  the  Depression.  It  would  not 
have  been  a  very  large  annexation,  about  1000  acres,  and  it  might  have  served  to 
protect  Lake  Forest  from  encroachment  by  northern  industrial  centers.  Other  ad- 
vantages included  an  additional  mile  and  a  half  of  lake  frontage,  a  more  efficient 
handling  of  expenditures  by  Lake  Forest's  compartively  modem  equipment  and 
procedures,  and,  for  the  new  high  school  and  other  public  schools,  a  lower  cost  per 
student.  However,  when  the  issue  was  presented  as  a  referendum  in  May,  1930,  it 
was  defeated  in  Lake  Forest,  1,130  to  648.  Lake  Bluff,  wishing  to  remain  autono- 
mous, voted  it  down  as  well. 

In  1934,  Lake  Bluff  turned  to  the  question  of  whether  or  not  it  should  become 
part  of  the  Deerfield-Shields  High  School  District.  There  were  several  reasons  for 
considering  this  union.  The  Deerfield-Shields  District  had  the  lowest  tax  rate  of  the 
large  Lake  County  high  schools;  Lake  Bluff  students  would  be  assured  admission 
to  the  new  Lake  Forest  High  School;  and  it  would  improve  the  saleability  of  Lake 
Bluff  property.  Many  opposed  the  proposed  annexation.  Should  Lake  Forest  decide 
to  withdraw  from  the  district  because  of  rising  costs  and  unfair  tax  distribution, 
Lake  Bluff  would  have  to  continue  paying  its  share  of  the  bonded  indebtedness, 
which  they  would  be  obligated  to  assume  upon  joining.  However,  plans  for  the  new 
Lake  Forest  High  School  were  being  worked  out  at  this  time  and  it  would  be  very 
convenient  for  all  of  the  Lake  Bluff  students  to  attend  school  there.  The  issue  was 
put  to  a  referendum  in  1934,  and  the  citizens  of  Lake  Bluff  voted  to  ally  themselves 
with  the  Deerfield-Shields  High  School  District. 

Eventually,  plans  for  the  new  Lake  Forest  High  School  were  finalized  and  it 
was  built  just  south  of  the  Lake  Bluff  city  limits.  It  was  constructed  as  a  project  of 
the  W.P.A.  (Works  Progress  Administration),  against  the  better  judgement  of  the 
somewhat  indignant  residents  of  Lake  Forest. 

The  community  was,  for  the  most  part,  extremely  wealthy.  Many  of  its  chil- 
dren went  away  to  school.  The  new  high  school  was  intended  more  for  the  children 
of  the  domestics  and  the  local  middle  class.  It  purposely  took  the  appearance  of 
another  estate,  so  as  not  to  disturb  its  surroundings.  Despite  the  initial  doubts 
though,  when  the  school  was  completed  and  put  into  operation,  the  community  was 
rather  proud  of  it. 

Community  interest  and  participation  in  the  activities  of  the  high  school  were 
always  high.  The  parents  were  drawn  into  immediate  involvement  in  their  children's 
education  with  the  opening  of  a  new  school. 

From  the  beginning,  there  was  an  adult  education  program,  sponsored  by  the 
Community  Center.  It  consisted  of  10  week  terms  and  received  $1,000  from  the 


Board  of  Education  and  $1.00  per  student  for  pecuniary  support.  An  annual  Par- 
ents' Visiting  Night  was  initiated,  with  exhibits  and  demonstrations.  The  parents 
could  generally  be  counted  on  to  help  out  in  any  way  they  could. 

The  Lake  Forest  community  was  very  interested  in  the  activities  of  the  stu- 
dents many  of  which  were  related  in  the  local  newspaper,  the  Lake  Forester.  Each 
year  an  entire  issue  was  turned  over  to  the  journalism  class  which,  under  the  direc- 
tion of  Mr.  Theodore  Gavins,  edited  the  paper,  choosing  its  own  managing  editor 
and  various  department  heads. 

Another  similar  annual  event  was  Student  City  Government  Day.  All  the 
major  city  posts  such  as  mayor,  fire  and  police  chief  were  assumed  by  students.  An- 
other community  organization  which  relied  on  the  high  school  and  students  was 
"Keep  Lake  Forest  Beautiful."  The  students  were  grouped  by  wards  and  were  as- 
signed to  keep  their  areas  clean.  Occasionally,  organizations  and  businesses  in  the 
community  sponsored  essay  contests  and  citizenship  awards.  They  provided  speak- 
ers and  other  help  at  events  such  as  the  annual  Father-Son  and  Mother-Daughter 
Banquets.  For  the  most  part,  community  participation  and  interest  were  high, 
fostered  by  the  novelty  of  the  opening  of  a  new  school. 


The  Plant  is  Seeded 
(Plant) 

In  1934,  the  atmosphere  in  America  was  chronic  discouragement.  Millions 
were  jobless,  penniless  and  hopeless.  National  morale  was  at  a  perilous  depth  and 
no  one  knew  how  much  longer  the  situation  would  continue. 

The  Depression  hit  Lake  Forest  relatively  lightly.  Economically,  most  resi- 
dents were  above  the  crisis  level — although  no  family  or  business  in  the  1930's  was 
really  secure.  Lake  Foresters  were,  on  the  whole,  in  better  shape  than  most.  The 
First  National  Bank  of  Lake  Forest  was  one  of  the  few  banks  on  the  North  Shore 
to  remain  open  throughout  the  Depression. 

However,  it  wasn't  until  President  Roosevelt  brought  jobless  Americans  and 
government  money  together  in  the  W.P.A.  that  Lake  Forest  had  a  public  high 
school.  The  Depression  left  this  one  positive  mark  on  the  community. 

Many  Lake  Forest  residents  sent  their  children  to  Eastern  prep  schools,  but  the 
children  of  many  attended  Deerfield-Shields  Township  High  School  in  Highland 
Park.  As  Lake  Forest  grew,  this  became  increasingly  inconvenient,  and  many 
thought  that  a  community  of  several  thousand  should  have  a  high  school  of  its  own. 
Although  it  is  widely  believed  that  the  school  was  intended  to  provide  an  education 
for  the  children  of  the  maids  and  gardeners  who  worked  on  estates  in  Lake  Forest, 
the  new  high  school  was  aimed  at  families  in  between  the  two  extremes. 

According  to  the  wishes  of  the  community,  local  architects  Ticknor  and  An- 
derson designed  the  building  to  look  as  much  like  a  mansion  as  possible,  perhaps 
to  disguise  the  fact  that  it  was  a  school.  The  three-story  white  stone  building,  set 
back  from  McKinley  Rd.  by  an  expanse  of  lawn,  did  look  very  much  like  a  large 
home.  The  high  school  was  one  of  best  examples  of  Georgian  architecture  at  the 

4 


time,  and  according  to  The  Shoreline  newspaper,  was  "one  of  the  finest  schools  in 
the  country — beautiful  in  architecture  and  complete  in  all  the  requisites  of  the 
modem  school."  "Lake  Forest  High  School,"  the  paper  continued  "represents  a 
step  forward  in  the  community." 

All  materials  and  labor  used  in  construction  were  paid  for  by  federal  funds. 
This  may  have  been  considered  a  blow  to  Lake  Forest  pride,  implying  that  the  city 
could  not  afford  to  build  its  own  school. 

The  site  for  the  building,  over  20  acres  on  McKinley  Rd.,  north  of  Noble  Ave., 
was  owned  by  the  city  and  previously  known  as  North  Park.  Before  1934,  it  was 
little  more  than  an  open  field  where  cricket  games  were  played.  The  ground  sloped 
to  a  tree-lined  creek  which  ran  across  the  north-western  portion  of  the  park. 

Originally,  the  school  driveway  entered  from  McKinley  Rd.  and  went  past  the 
north  end  of  the  building,  exiting  on  Spruce  Ave.  Years  later,  it  was  extended  to 
circle  the  front  lawn  and  exit  again  on  McKinley.  To  complete  the  driveway  exten- 
sion, the  sloping  ground  was  leveled  and  the  creek  was  re-routed  underground. 

-■  ■ -■■^^^^^^m  Entering  the  school 

^  JL1«---«JIl:  ■  from  the  front  entrance  was 

jgflN  technically  permissible  only 

for  teachers  and  administra- 
tors. Students  could  come 
through  the  south  end  door, 
the  doors  at  the  gym  foyer 
or  the  doors  off  the  stair- 
cases from  the  back  of  the 
school. 

Directly  through  the 
front  entrance  was  the 
school  rotunda — nearly  the 
center  of  the  school  when  it 
was  constructed.  A  wall  and 
display  case  blocked  the 
iHt        ^k  i  corridor  that  now  leads  to 

the  library  and  the  annex. 

Two  monitors  sat  there  to 

greet  visitors  and  check  hall 

idSbm  passes  every  period  of  the 

day.  Light  was  provided  by 
a  four-foot  octagonal  fixture 
overhead.  On  the  floor  was 
the  Senior  Star,  once  the 
scourge  of  all  freshmen;  tra- 
dition had  it  that  if  any  one 
was  caught  stepping  on  it, 
WKBK^m^^^^^^^B^SKU^mSBKf^Kl^^mm     he  was  forced  to  scrub  it 

The  original  Senior  Star,  monitor  desk  Wlth  *  toothbrush. 

and  overhead  light  BOxmd  the  school  was 

a  small  parking  lot  (about 
one-fourth  the  size  of  the  present  parking  area),  separated  by  a  row  of  bushes  from 
the  gardens  of  houses  on  Edgewood  Rd.  The  block  across  Spruce  St.  from  the 
present  tennis  courts  was  also  school  property  at  one  time.  This  lot  was  allowed  to 
grow  wild  and  used  by  biology  classes  to  study  nature.  Occasionally,  near-by  resi- 
dents complained  that  the  ragweed  aggravated  their  hayfever,  and  the  custodians 
would  cut  it  down. 


Down  the  hall  to  the  south,  the  first  classroom  on  the  right  was  the  civics  room 
(today  103-105).  Because  it  was  larger  than  most  and  had  a  small  stage,  this  room 
was  used  for  Student  Council  meetings,  small  drama  productions  and  chorus.  A 
side  door  to  the  left  led  to  a  small  kitchen,  used  to  prepare  food  for  teachers' 
meetings  when  they  were  held  in  that  room.  Like  all  other  classrooms,  the  civics 
room  had  an  oak  floor  and  fine  woodwork  around  the  floor-boards  and  ceiling. 
"This  is  undoubtedly  the  work  of  a  master  carpenter,"  commented  Mr.  Donald 
Spooner. 

Next  to  the  civics  room,  on  the  right  side  of  the  hall  was  a  faculty  women's 
lounge:  a  washroom  and  a  small  sitting  room,  which  have  not  been  changed  greatly 
through  the  years. 

The  room  beyond  this  lounge,  the  last  classroom  in  the  hall,  was  used  for 
language  instruction.  A  special  feature  of  Lake  Forest  High  School  architecture, 
classroom  alcoves,  is  demonstrated  in  this  room.  Like  the  women's  lounge,  the 
room  has  been  left  almost  as  it  was  in  1935.  The  door  from  the  corridor  opens  into 
a  smaller  entrance  room.  A  bookshelf  and  drawers  are  built  into  the  east  wall. 
Double  glass  and  wooden  doors  separated  this  alcove  from  the  actual  classroom. 

A  double  door  at  the  end  of  the  hall  led  outside  to  the  grass  and  the  driveway 
near  the  Noble  Ave.  exit.  After  1935,  a  student  mural  covered  the  width  of  the 
hall  over  the  door.  (Later  this  mural  and  this  entire  wall  were  changed  to  add 
another  corridor  of  classrooms  and  the  Raymond  Moore  Auditorium.)  Early  stu- 
dents at  LFHS  thought  that  the  gray  walls  needed  brightening,  so  they  painted 
dozens  of  murals  that  remained  in  the  school  for  years. 

The  southern-most  room  on  the  other  side  of  the  hall  was  also  used  for  lan- 
guage classes.  Just  north  of  that,  stairs  lead  to  the  second  and  third  floors  and  down 
a  few  steps  to  the  outside.  Originally,  these  stairs  did  not  go  to  the  basement,  and 
there  were  no  glass  fire-doors  separating  the  stairs  and  the  hall.  A  gift  from  the 
students  of  1941,  murals  were  placed  over  the  entrances  to  the  halls.  They  were 
visible  from  the  first  and  second  floor  landings  on  the  stairs.  The  life  of  Abraham 
Lincoln  was  depicted  on  the  first  floor  entrance  on  the  south  stairs,  and  "They  That 


Lake  Forest  High  School  was  constructed  to   look  as  much  like  a 
Georgian  mansion  as  possible. 


Go  Down  to  the  Sea  in  Ships"  on  the  second  floor  entrance.  These  murals  still 
decorate  the  staircases  today. 

The  north  end  of  this  hall  led  into  the  gym  foyer,  as  it  does  today.  Then,  too,  a 
display  case  and  telephone  booth  were  built  into  the  wall  at  the  left.  At  the  far  end 
of  the  foyer  was  another  display  case,  surrounded  by  plaster  and  woodwork.  Out  the 
three  double  doors  to  the  left  was  a  porch  and  steps,  which  originally  led  only  to  a 
sidewalk  before  the  driveway  was  continued.  Three  matching  double  doors  lead  into 
the  gym  from  the  foyer.  These,  too,  were  overlooked  by  student-painted  murals, 
later  taken  down  in  the  1940's. 


1956  Southern  Main  Hall:  Murals  originally  hung  over  side  doors. 

The  area  north  of  the  stairs  on  the  first  floor  was  occupied  by  the  bookkeeping 
room.  Across  the  rotunda  from  this  was  the  typing  room — the  only  room  in  the 
school  with  acoustical  plaster.  "The  acoustics  in  the  other  rooms  were  awful,"  said 
English  teacher  Dr.  Frank  Townsend. 

Next  to  this  was  a  student  bookstore,  with  a  window  opening  out  into  the 
corridor.  Both  were  removed  in  later  years  and  replaced  by  additional  office  space. 

Adjacent  to  the  bookstore  was  the  north  staircase,  identical  to  the  one  on  the 
south  side  of  the  building.  Here  too  were  murals,  one  depicting  the  history  of  reli- 
gion, and  a  collage  of  fictional  characters  on  the  second.  North  of  the  stairs  was 
the  nurse's  office,  which  featured  a  whirlpool  bath  for  treating  injuries. 

Across  the  hall  was  a  large,  open  art  room.  Today,  this  space  has  been  divided 
into  separate  guidance  offices,  though  originally  it  was  one  extensive  unit.  A  con- 
ference room  separated  the  art  room  from  the  principal's  office  and  the  main  office 


to  the  south  on  this  hall.  The  main  office  and  student  bulletin  board  still  occupy 
the  space  they  did  when  the  school  was  first  constructed. 

From  the  beginning,  Lake  Forest  High  School  had  a  two-way  public  address 
system  controlled  from  the  main  office.  The  high  school  was  one  of  the  first  in  the 
country  to  have  this  facility,  which  allowed  communication  between  classrooms  and 
the  office,  and  made  it  possible  for  administrators  to  listen  in  on  classes  without  the 
knowledge  of  the  teacher  or  the  students. 

In  1935,  the  gym  (now  used  only  for  some  girls'  P.E.  classes)  was  considered 
modern  and  well-equipped.  The  stage  at  the  east  end  made  it  possible  to  use  the 
gym  for  all  games,  concerts,  shows,  programs,  and  gym  activities  (Lake  Forest 
College  also  used  the  gym  for  their  basketball  games  for  several  years).  A  balcony 
accessible  from  the  second  floor  supplied  seating,  and  additional  bleachers  could  be 
folded  down  from  the  wall.  Folding  chairs  were  also  used  when  programs  were 
given  in  the  gym-auditorium.  The  stage  was  complete  with  overhead  lights,  a  back- 
stage switchboard,  curtains,  side  entrances,  and  spotlights  operated  from  a  booth  at 
the  other  end  of  the  gym.  The  lighting  facilities  were  considered  excellent  for  a 
school  the  size  of  LFHS. 

When  the  gym  was  used  for  gym  classes,  a  wooden  curtain  could  be  lowered 
from  the  ceiling  to  separate  the  space  into  two  areas.  The  curtain  rode  up  and  down 
on  four  removable  wooden  pillars,  attached  to  the  floor  and  ceiling  by  pulleys. 

Bordering  the  gym  on  the  south  was  another  hallway,  the  boys'  washroom,  and 
the  swimming  pool  (which  is  the  same  as  it  was  in  1935).  In  the  early  1940's,  this 
was  one  of  the  best  high  school  pools  in  the  state.  Even  then,  it  had  an  advanced 
filtering  system  which  was  used  extensively.  There  was  great  concern  for  the  pool's 
sanitation,  and  the  water  was  tested  daily  for  chlorine  and  bromine  levels.  Dr. 
Moore  tested  it  personally  every  Monday  to  make  sure  that  it  stayed  within  the 
standards  set  by  the  state  of  Illinois.  The  water  and  the  pool  were  given  an  "A" 
rating  by  the  Illinois  Board  of  Health.  Doors  at  either  side  of  the  pool  still  lead  to 
the  boys'  and  girls'  locker  rooms  and  showers.  A  balcony  provides  seating  for 
water  shows  and  swim  meets. 

East  of  the  pool  were  the  mechanical  drawing  room,  the  industrial  art  room, 
textile  shop  and  print  shop.  One  of  the  original  murals,  of  students  working  togeth- 
er, still  stands  in  the  mechanical  drawing  room. 

Between  the  pool  and  these  work  rooms  was  another  staircase,  also  accessible 
from  the  side  door  of  the  stage.  During  plays  and  other  performances,  students 
would  run  up  the  stairs  to  the  second  floor,  change  clothes,  and  hurry  back  down 
to  the  stage  again. 

The  space  down  these  stairs  and  underneath  the  stage  was  originally  intended 
to  be  a  rehearsal  room,  but  in  1935  it  was  given  to  the  Girls'  Club  as  a  meeting 
room.  This  small  room  had  a  two-level  floor  which  sometimes  served  as  a  stage. 
It  was  cramped  and  stuffy,  with  only  three  windows  for  ventilation.  Because  it  was 
just,  above  the  furnace,  it  was  usually  extremely  hot.  In  1958,  an  additional  hall 
leading  to  the  new  gym  was  built  adjacent  to  the  Girls'  Clubroom,  blocking  the 
windows  and  ventilation.  From  then  on,  this  area  was  used  only  for  storage. 

Further  down  the  stairs  was  an  entrance  to  the  girls'  locker  room,  which  was 
once  used  as  the  main  entrance.  Now  this  door  is  locked  and  never  used.  Originally, 
the  girls'  locker  room  had  both  individual  dressing  rooms  and  shower  booths.  Per- 
haps girls  were  more  modest  then. 

Adjacent  to  the  girls'  locker  room  was  a  small  gym,  used  by  the  corrective  gym 
classes  (special  classes  set  up  for  students  with  physical  coordination  difficulties  and 


other  problems).  Since  the  1950's,  it  has  been  used  only  for  sorting  towels.  Nearby 
was  the  janitor's  lunchroom  and  lounge,  now  used  to  store  Civil  Defense  supplies 
and  old  furniture. 

A  few  steps  down  from  the  girls'  locker  room  was  the  filter  and  fan  room, 
where  the  pool  water  was  circulated  and  filtered  once  a  week.  Down  a  long  flight 
of  stairs  was  the  boiler  room.  The  school  was  heated  by  coal  burners.  Part  of  the 
ceiling  and  wall  in  the  boiler  room  opened  to  the  outside,  thus  enabling  the  coal  to 
be  taken  from  the  coal  trucks  and  loaded  directly  into  the  furnace.  Now,  though  the 
school  is  heated  by  oil,  the  same  boiler  room  is  still  used. 

For  a  few  years  after  the  high  school  was  built,  there  was  no  weathers  tripping 
on  the  windows.  This  meant  that  school  could  not  be  held  when  the  weather  got 
very  cold.  Yet  even  then,  when  a  day  of  school  was  missed,  an  extra  one  was  added 
on  at  the  end  of  the  year. 

On  the  second  floor,  above  the  locker  room  and  the  stage,  was  the  Home 
Economics  department,  where  students  ate  lunch  during  the  first  few  years  for 
want  of  a  cafeteria.  In  the  years  since,  the  facilities  have  been  greatly  updated.  A 
hand-crafted  wooden  closet  was  built  into  the  wall  next  to  the  Home  Ec.  room,  and 
still  remains  today.  It  was  here  that  costumes  were  stored  for  plays  and  quick 
between-scene  changes  were  made. 

Across  the  hall  from  the  Home  Ec.  room  was  a  large  Biology  and  General 
Science  room.  A  door  to  the  south  side  of  this  room  opened  onto  a  conservatory 
balcony  for  plant  study.  Now  the  door  and  the  balcony  remain,  but  they  are  never 
used.  In  1958,  a  wall  divider  was  erected,  and  this  large  room  was  divided  into  two 
separate  classrooms,  as  it  stands  today. 

West  of  this  area  was  another  large  room  used  for  chemistry  and  physics. 
This  area  too  was  later  divided  into  two  rooms,  and  the  lab  and  faucet  facilities 
taken  out  when  history  replaced  science  in  this  corridor. 

The  room  next  to  the  chemistry  and  physics  area,  (now  room  224),  was  used 
for  math  classes.  This  was  another  room  with  an  alcove/workroom  to  one  side, 
which  was  left  intact  as  the  building  additions  and  changes  were  made.  Across  the 
hall  from  all  these  classrooms  were  lockers  and  the  doors  leading  to  the  balcony 
and  gym  seating  area.  A  sinde  flight  of  stairs  led  down  to  the  gym  foyer  from  the 
second  floor  hall,  just  west  of  the  balcony. 

West  of  these  stairs  was  another  faculty  women's  lounge  and  the  Student  Ac- 
tivity room,  given  to  the  Boys'  Club  for  a  meeting  place.  In  1936,  the  Club  raised 
money  and  bought  furniture  for  the  room.  This  large,  airy,  and  well-furnished  space 
sharply  contrasted  the  little  hovel  in  which  the  Girls'  Club  met.  The  operators'  booth 
was  located  in  a  small  room  to  the  east  of  the  Boys'  Club  room,  over  the  flight  of 
stairs.  From  here  the  spotlights  were  worked  for  stage  productions  in  the  gym. 

At  the  intersection  of  the  north  hall  and  the  main  hall  on  the  second  floor  in 
the  early  years  of  the  school,  was  a  telephone  booth,  set  into  the  wall  with 
woodworking  now  used  only  as  a  janitor's  closet.  Today,  as  it  orginally  did,  this 
cabinet  houses  a  folding  gate  which  is  rolled  out  across  the  corridor  on  weekends  to 
help  guard  the  school. 

The  main  second  floor  corridor  was  also  lined  with  lockers  and  classrooms. 
The  room  at  the  north-west  end  of  the  hall  was  originally  another  math  classroom. 
It  was  large  and  had  a  skylight  in  the  ceiling.  The  carpentry  and  woodwork  still 


remain  in  this  room,  which  is  now  used  for  business  education.  An  office  and  a 
conference  room  separated  this  from  another  math  room  to  the  south. 

Adjacent  to  these  math  rooms  was  the  school  library,  which  is  now  the 
faculty  study.  Left  nearly  as  it  was  in  the  1930's,  this  room  still  contains  the  school's 
most  exquisite  cabinet  work,  with  built-in  book  shelves  and  small  cubbyholes  for 
statues  and  paintings.  At  the  time  the  school  was  built,  this  was  one  of  the  few 
libraries  which  stored  all  of  its  books  along  the  walls.  Windows  on  the  west  side  of 
the  library  overlooked  the  front  entrance,  the  front  lawn  and  McKinley  Rd.  A  fire- 
place, which  was  frequently  used,  occupied  the  south  end  of  the  room,  and  a  crystal 
chandelier  hung  from  the  ceiling  in  the  center.  The  library's  tables  and  chairs  were 
made  from  white  oak,  an  extremely  heavy  blonde  wood. 


The  students  were  proud  of  their  unique  and  beautiful  second-floor 
library. 

Books  were  checked  out  of  the  library  at  a  white  oak  counter  on  the  west 
side,  across  from  the  double  doors  that  opened  into  the  room  from  the  main  corri- 
dor. Another  set  of  double  doors  connected  the  library  with  the  math  classroom 
to  the  north,  but  this  entrance  was  never  used. 

The  students  were  very  proud  of  their  unique  library.  They  took  extra  care 
not  to  throw  papers  or  mark  on  the  beautiful  wood.  Its  condition  today  remains  as 
a  testimony  to  the  care  with  which  the  library  was  treated. 

The  room  south  of  the  library  was  a  study  hall  in  the  early  years,  placed  con- 
veniently close  to  the  library.  All  students  spent  their  study  halls  in  these  two 
rooms,  and  could  not  leave  without  permission  and  a  good  reason. 

Adjacent  to  the  study  was  a  faculty  men's  lounge  and  washroom.  South  of  this 
were  two  social  studies  rooms  that  fit  together  vertically,  rather  than  horizontally. 
The  doors  of  these  rooms  entered  from  the  main  corridor,  but  another  corridor 
extended  from  the  northern  most  door,  and  the  classroom  fit  in  behind  the  second 
one.  Both  of  these,  like  the  math  room  at  the  opposite  end  of  the  hall,  had  skylight 
ceilings,  and  window  seats  that  fit  under  the  small  windows  on  the  south  side. 

The  room  across  the  hall  was  also  used  for  social  studies  classes  when  the 
school  was  first  built.  Immediately  north  of  this  was  the  south  staircase,  leading  up 
to  the  third  floor.  In  1935,  this  entire  floor  was  unfinished  brick  and  dripping 
mortar.  (See  Monograph) 

10 


English  classes  occupied  the  two  rooms  north  of  the  stairs  on  the  second  floor, 
as  they  do  today.  Originally,  another  room  stood  where  the  corridor  now  leads  into 
the  second  floor  annex.  This  was  used  as  the  Forest  Scout  office  in  the  early  years. 
Down  the  hall  were  two  more  English  classrooms. 

The  north  staircase  provided  the  only  access  to  the  basement  when  the  school 
was  first  built.  The  area  south  of  the  stairs  in  the  basement  was  unfinished  during 
the  first  few  years.  The  dirt  floor  served  as  the  indoor  track.  A  rifle  range  was  set 
up,  and  even  shot-putting  was  practiced  in  the  basement  until  someone  hit  and  broke 
a  water  pipe  with  the  shot.  The  outdoor  track,  installed  around  the  football  field,  was 
completed  in  the  fall  of  1941, 

The  inscription  over  the  front  entrance  reads: 

"This  building  is  Erected  and  Dedicated  by  the  Deerfields-Shields  Township 
High  School  District  to  the  Advancement  of  Knowledge  and  Good  Citizenship. 
AD  1935."  Over  this  stands  the  school  symbol  and  motto,  "Abeunt  Studia  in 
Mores"  (Learning  becomes  a  way  of  life.) 


Chuckers  of  Well- Aimed  Erasers 

(Faculty) 

The  members  of  the  faculty  of  Lake  Forest  High  School  from  1935-1941  were 
interesting  in  many  aspects.  They  were  very  diversified,  many  being  employed  from 
Deerfield-Shields  Township  High  School  in  Highland  Park.  This  created  some  dis- 
sidence  between  the  Lake  Forest  administration  and  the  faculty  because  some  of 
the  teachers  simply  did  not  want  to  come  to  Lake  Forest.  Many  had  taught  at  Deer- 
field- Shields  for  a  great  length  of  time  and  were  reluctant  to  move  to  a  new  situation 
and  administration.  Another  contentious  point  was  the  fact  that  although  Mr. 
Moore,  the  principal,  had  not  hired  them,  he  was  still  their  administrator.  Needless 
to  say,  faculty  relationships  in  these  beginning  years  did  not  go  too  smoothly. 

Despite  this  friction  between  the  administration  and  faculty  members,  the 
teachers'  attitude  toward  education  was  a  very  commendable  one.  As  professionals, 
they  felt  a  responsibility  to  devote  themselves  to  the  students.  This  attitude  is  dem- 
onstrated by  the  fact  that  all  teachers  came  a  half  hour  early  and  left  a  half  hour 
after  school,  devoting  this  time  to  helping  students  with  problems.  The  rigidity  of 
this  schedule  characterized  all  faculty  responsibilities.  One  such  responsibility  was  a 
plan  sheet  required  every  Friday  afternoon.  The  teachers  followed  the  plan  schedule 
faithfully.  Perhaps  this  contributed  to  the  text-book  philosophy  of  education  preva- 
lent in  1935-1941.  Much  of  the  education  consisted  of  memorization,  research,  and 
numerous  lectures.  The  type  of  homework  required  of  these  students  was  quite  dif- 
ferent than  that  of  today.  According  to  Mary  Jane  Myers,  an  early  student  of  LFHS, 
there  was  much  more  research  needed  to  get  an  A  or  B  than  is  needed  today.  Extra 
credit  was  more  prevalent  than  in  recent  years,  but  final  exams  were  optional  for 
students  with  a  B  grade  or  better.  Essays  were  routine,  as  was  just  plain  "busy 

11 


work."  But,  despite  these  philosophies  of  education  that  may  seem  detrimental  or 
pointless  in  today's  educational  system,  the  teachers  cared  a  great  deal  for  their 
students'  education.  As  a  demonstration  of  this  concern,  progress  reports,  then 
known  as  "Blue  Cards,"  were  sent  out  every  Monday. 

Further  faculty  interest  in  the  students'  education  was  portrayed  in  the  home- 
rooms (or  sessions,  as  they  were  called).  Close  relationships  with  the  pupils  devel- 
oped in  these  sessions  as  the  groups  discussed  not  only  everyday  problems,  but  per- 
sonal ones  as  well.  For  example,  when  Mr.  Swan  married,  his  session  presented  him 
with  an  award  to  show  their  appreciation  for  his  guidance.  Essentially,  these 
teachers  acted  as  counselors,  for  no  guidance  department  existed. 

The  promotion  of  education  was  very  important  to  the  Lake  Forest  faculty,  so 
in  1935,  the  school  rented  "talkies  and  talking  machines."  These  are  recognized 
today  as  movies  and  projectors.  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  these  movies  were 
originally  presented  to  improve  education  in  the  science  areas;  today,  they  are  an 
integral  portion  of  nearly  every  subject. 

The  philosophy  of  education  included  not  only  interest  for  the  students,  but 
for  the  parents  as  well.  According  to  Mrs.  Myers,  teachers  then  understood  both  the 
parents  and  the  students  much  more  than  now.  Though  they  taught  with  an  iron 
hand,  it  was  tempered  with  understanding  and  personal  involvement. 

One  of  the  most  interesting  characters  in  the  school  at  that  time  was  Dr. 
Raymond  Moore.  As  principal,  he  was  in  charge  of  the  20  teachers  that  had  trans- 
ferred from  the  Highland  Park  High  School.  Because  they  were  young  and  spirited, 
Dr.  Moore  ran  the  school  very  strictly. 

The  faculty  members  were  required  to  be  well  qualified.  Theodore  Cavins  was 
the  head  of  the  English  department.  Mr.  Cavins,  who  came  to  Lake  Forest  High 
School  in  1939,  was  the  founder  of  the  Forest  Scout,  the  student  newspaper.  He 
felt  that  during  this  time  period  there  was  much  unity  among  the  faculty  and  a  con- 
siderable amount  of  friendship  between  the  students  and  the  teachers. 

Kevin  M.  Keenan  taught  math  and  assisted  with  football  coaching.  He  had 
previously  taught  math  and  coached  at  Mabel,  Minn.,  before  coming  to  Lake  Forest 
High  School.  Mr.  Keenan  was  an  outstanding  person  and  math  teacher,  who  was 
tragically  killed  in  the  sixties.  A  scholarship  is  given  in  his  honor  by  his  numerous 
friends.  Stanley  F.  Nelson  also  taught  math.  Mr.  Nelson  was  well-liked  by  the 
majority  of  his  students.  He  was  a  peppy  and  energetic  teacher,  as  illustrated  by  his 
method  of  keeping  students  in  order  with  well-aimed  erasers.  In  the  late  sixties,  this 
spirited  classroom  atmosphere  was  revived  by  the  peripatetic  Joseph  Occhipinti. 

Thomas  R.  Short  taught  biology  and  was  also  a  basketball  coach.  He  came  to 
the  high  school  in  January  of  1936  and  retired  in  1972.  He  coached  winning  teams 
in  many  years,  though  he  believes  none  was  better  than  his  first  team,  the  all-confer- 
ence and  all-district  "light-weights"  of  1937.  But  he  had  many  conference  and  dis- 
trict champions  after  that. 

In  1941,  Mr.  Short  left  for  a  five  year  stint  as  ground  officer  in  the  Navy  during 
the  war.  His  first  year  teaching  after  his  service  was  very  academic:  he  taught  sci- 
ence (in  which  he  has  a  Master's  Degree)  and  math.  But  following  that  year,  he  was 
back  to  his  old  activities — teaching  the  boys  to  be  as  good  an  athlete  as  he  had  been 
in  college. 

In  1952  he  was  promoted  to  the  post  of  Athletic  Director,  and  so  became  an 
administrator  instead  of  a  teacher.  He  was  very  happy  with  his  job,  and  with  his 
memories.  Among  other  things,  he  expanded  the  inter-scholastic  program  from  three 
to  eleven  sports. 

12 


In  1962,  Mr.  Short  was  given  charge  of  "Extended  Services"  which  meant  the 
direction  and  operation  of  the  adult  evening  school  in  addition  to  the  athletic  de- 
partment. He  held  that  post  until  his  retirement. 

Clare  Shaver  taught  French  and  was  responsible  for  putting  on  the  "Matinee 
Francaise"  with  her  French  students,  for  the  enjoyment  of  their  parents  and  the 
grammar  schools.  Also,  three  plays  were  given  in  French  for  Highland  Park  High 
School  French  classes, 

Mr.  Charles  D.  Fiester  was  the  bashful  teacher,  (as  the  Forest  Scout  notes),  of 
industrial  arts.  He  served  the  school  for  thirty-plus  years. 

Curtis  Eiker  taught  European  history,  U.  S.  history,  and  English  history.  Mr. 
Eiker  was  head  of  the  History  department  and  advisor  to  the  History  Club.  His 
classes  had  a  "friendly  atmosphere,"  and  he  was  easy  to  talk  to.  His  courses  were 
mainly  lecture  courses,  built  on  a  textbook  and  workbook.  In  later  years,  a  heart 
attack  and  other  complications  unfortunately  forced  his  retirement. 

Conrad  Swan,  "the  tested  veteran"  who  has  tamed  over  35  years  of  mischievous 
LFHS  students,  taught  commerce  and  typewriting.  In  addition,  he  introduced  Span- 
ish into  the  curriculum  in  1940-41,  and  he  taught  the  course  for  one  year. 

John  C.  Maloney,  who  is  also  still  in  the  service  of  the  high  school,  taught 
band,  chorus  and  orchestra.  He  organized  the  first  marching  band  for  football 
games,  and  the  original  chorus  and  orchestra,  which  attracted  one  fourth  of  the  stu- 
dent body.  He  had  many  contests  with  Mr.  Edgar  Lindenmeyer,  the  football  coach, 
over  the  multi- talented  students  who  could  serve  their  school  on  football  days  in 
either  the  capacity  of  musician  or  athlete  but  not  both  simultaneously.  Due  to  the 
limited  supply  of  manpower  in  the  school,  they  soon  learned  to  share.  He  also  direct- 
ed the  early  school  musicals. 

In  the  middle  of  the  1946-47  school  year,  Mr.  Maloney  became  the  first  guid- 
ance counselor,  appointed  to  the  post  to  solve  the  many  problems  of  the  students. 
He  learned  this  field  in  additional  college  courses. 

He  earned  the  nickname,  "J.  C.  Pussyfoots,"  in  his  later  years  at  the  high 
school,  for  his  notorious  ability  to  suddenly  appear  when  students  were  in  the  act 
of  committing  some  infraction  of  the  rules.  He  wore  crepe-soled  shoes  and  proved 
an  excellent  vigilante. 

Mr.  Maloney  later  started  the  Student  Personnel  Center  and  coached  a  team 
for  "It's  Academic."  In  the  sixties  he  took  the  post  of  Assistant  to  the  Superin- 
tendent, and  continues  to  hold  that  post.  He  has  been  a  member  of  the  Lake  Forest 
High  School  staff  longer  than  anyone  else. 

Edgar  Lindenmeyer,  or  "Lindy"  as  he  was  called  by  his  friends,  was  the  Direc- 
tor of  Athletics,  head  of  the  Boys  P.E.  department,  and  a  P.E.  teacher  as  well  as  a 
football  and  basketball  coach.  Lindy' s  football  team  was  the  undefeated,  all-con- 
ference team  of  the  high  school,  a  record  which  bred  the  interest  of  the  more  than 
60  students  who  went  out  for  the  varsity  team  when  there  were  only  400  students  in 
the  school.  He  went  on  to  coach  the  all-conference  and  district  championship  teams 
of  1942,  1944,  1946,  1947,  and  1951.  But  in  the  fall  of  1951,  he  became  sick,  and 
was  never  well  enough  to  coach  again.  "They  never  quite  knew  what  was  wrong  with 
him,"  remembers  Mr.  Thomas  Short.  He  finished  the  year  as  a  study  hall  teacher, 
and  then  was  gone  an  entire  school  year  for  operations.  The  next  year,  he  returned 
as  a  study  hall  teacher  and  at  the  end  of  the  year,  retired.  Mr.  Lindenmeyer  was 
such  a  popular  man  and  so  very  successful  in  athletics  that  the  school  football  field 
was  later  named  after  him.  He  instilled  a  great  amount  of  pride  and  dedication  to 
their  sport  and  coach  in  his  players. 

13 


The  teachers  had  other  responsibilities  besides  classroom  education.  Nearly  all 
the  faculty  had  some  type  of  involvement  in  Student  Council.  For  example,  the 
Council  celebrated  its  first  meeting  in  1935  with  a  buffet  supper  at  Mr.  Nelson's 
house  on  October  24.  The  teachers'  sessions  were  represented  at  the  council. 
Other  responsibilities  were  the  teachers'  meetings  which  were  held  at  night.  A 
teacher  was  always  present  in  the  locker  room  to  supervise  and  hand  out  towels  and 
suits.  If  a  teacher  wanted  to  start  a  creative  writing  class,  this  was  done  in  the  hours 
after  school  and  there  was  never  a  thought  of  requesting  additional  pay. 

The  faculty  seemed  to  spur  competition  in  the  school  because  they  organized 
ticket  selling  races  and  other  contests  among  the  sessions.  They  also  enjoyed  playing 
against  the  students  in  sports  such  as  basketball  and  baseball.  In  1972,  we  still  have 
this  type  of  activity — the  student-faculty  athletic  contests  which  engender  a  friendly 
rivalry.  Mrs.  La  Verne  Cooke  was  in  charge  of  the  two  dramatic  presentations  dur- 
ing this  early  period.  Mrs.  Clara  Shaver's  session  presented  style  shows  in  which 
popular  contemporary  fashions  were  exhibited  for  the  entertainment  of  their  fellow 
students.  It  is  evident  that  the  faculty  was  very  involved  with  the  students,  devoting 
much  of  their  own  time  to  extra-curricular  activities.  There  were  also  work  make- 
up days  that  each  teacher  had  to  maintain.  On  Monday,  English  was  to  be  made  up; 
Tuesday,  languages;  Wednesday,  math  and  commerce;  Thursday,  social  sciences. 
Because  the  students  were  often  given  adequate  study  time  in  class,  these  make-up 
hours  were  rarely  needed. 

Each  year,  there  was  a  faculty  reception  held  by  the  Board  of  Education.  Ac- 
cording to  Mr.  Swan,  this  was  an  extremely  formal  affair,  with  black  ties  and  evening 
dresses.  Perhaps  a  string  trio  would  be  playing  softly  in  the  background  as  the  facul- 
ty socialized.  But  the  teachers  regarded  this  affair  as  an  unpleasant  aspect  of  teach- 
ing at  Lake  Forest  High  School.  The  faculty  dinners  given  by  the  Student  Council, 
however,  were  considerably  more  enjoyable. 

There  is  an  interesting  story  concerning  one  of  the  teachers  in  this  period. 
Ray  Phippes  of  the  industrial  arts  department  was  replaced  in  1936  by  Al  Field. 
Apparently,  Mr.  Field  profited  from  his  innate  perspicacity.  He  bought  all  of  the 
property  now  standing  behind  the  football  field  for  the  sum  of  $1,600.  Everyone 
doubted  the  prudence  of  the  purchase  of  such  seemingly  worthless  land.  However, 
Mr.  Field  was  no  fool;  he  later  sold  that  land  for  an  enormous  profit. 

There  were  some  interesting  administrative  offices  in  the  years  1935-40.  In 
1973,  there  was  a  Director  of  Research.  This  director  was  Dr.  Richardson,  whose 
duties  were  to  figure  out  the  best  learning  program  for  each  student.  He  also  ad- 
ministered the  aptitude  tests.  For  uncertain  reasons,  probably  economic  in  nature, 
this  particular  office  existed  for  only  one  year.  Also  in  1937,  a  physician  and  dentist, 
as  well  as  a  nurse,  were  on  the  staff.  After  a  year,  the  dentist  and  physician  were 
dismissed. 

Some  teachers  left  the  high  school  to  go  on  to  other  jobs.  For  example,  Mrs. 
Harriet  West  quit  the  teaching  profession  to  work  for  the  Oklahoma  Power  and 
Light  Company.  Miss  Violet  Jones,  a  secretary  from  1938-41,  left  her  job  to  take  a 
new  post  in  Chicago.  Mr.  Tinkham  resigned  in  1939  to  become  the  Superintendent 
of  Schools  in  Malta,  111. 

In  those  beginning  years,  there  was  a  visiting  teacher,  who  served  as  an 
important  link  between  home  and  school.  She  visited  the  homes  of  students  in 
cases  of  prolonged  absence  or  in  the  case  of  special  request.  She  also  acted  as  an 
intermediary  between  the  teacher  and  parent.  This  was  especially  useful  in  situations 
where  the  parent  or  mother  was  unable  to  leave  home. 

14 


The  Board  of  Education  remained  generally  unchanged  in  those  years.  Such 
positions  were  usually  held  for  a  great  length  of  time  or  for  life.  It  consisted  of  ^.we 
members — George  Rogers,  Frank  W.  Read,  Edward  R.  Seese,  Laura  Smith  and 
E.  J.  Fucik;  Mr.  Sanwick  was  the  Educational  Advisor  to  the  Board  and  Superin- 
tendent of  Deerfield-Shields  Township  High  School.  The  board  determined  the 
policy  of  the  school  and  considered  questions  pertaining  to  its  welfare.  The  mem- 
bers received  no  compensation  for  their  work. 

The  salaries  of  the  faculty  were  not  set  according  to  any  precise  pay  scale; 
raises  were  based  on  merit.  When  it  came  time  to  consider  pay  increases,  the 
teacher's  total  performance  was  evaluated.  The  teachers  volunteered  for  many  activi- 
ties which  they  had  no  obligation  to  undertake.  Undoubtedly,  many  of  their  efforts 
went  unnoticed  by  the  administrators;  monetary  remuneration  was  always  uncertain. 
It  is  obvious  that  the  teachers  were  not  strictly  mercenary.  But  whatever  their  indi- 
vidual motives,  their  infusion  of  interest  greatly  benefitted  the  students. 


The  Chuckees 
(Students) 


In  the  first  years  of  Lake  Forest  High  School,  the  student  body  was  an  inter- 
esting one.  The  city  of  Lake  Forest  was  composed  of  primarily  two  sociological 
groups:  the  upper  class  and  the  domestic  servants  of  the  upper  class.  Basically, 
children  of  the  wealthier  residents  were  sent  to  private  eastern  schools,  while  the 
children  of  the  domestics  attended  Lake  Forest  High  School.  There  were  also  Army 
and  Navy  children  sent  from  Fort  Sheridan  and  Great  Lakes  Naval  Base,  but  these 
were  the  children  of  officers  only.  Few  minority  groups  were  represented  in  the 
student  body,  and  thus  there  was  little  occasion  for  discrimination. 

The  majority  of  students  the  first  year  were  underclassmen.  Originally,  most 
Lake  Forest  students  had  attended  Deerfield-Shields  Township  High  School,  now 
known  as  Highland  Park  High.  There  were  approximately  1,500  students  from 
Highland  Park,  Deerfield,  Northbrook,  Glen  view,  Lake  Forest,  and  the  northern 
New  Trier  area.  Students  in  Lake  Forest  had  the  option  of  attending  Deerfield- 
Shields,  Libertyville,  or  Waukegan  schools.  Most  opted  for  Deerfield-Shields,  and 
so  from  World  War  I  to  1935,  much  of  the  educational  activity  was  centered  in 
Highland  Park. 

To  get  there,  it  was  necessary  for  Lake  Forest  students  to  ride  the  train,  the 
now  defunct  North  Shore  Line.  There  were  four  and  sometimes  six  cars  specially 
reserved  for  high  schoolers,  who  were  given  a  special  rate. 

According  to  Peter  Toomey,  a  former  student,  the  new  school  was  clean  and 
bright  compared  to  the  school  in  Highland  Park.  The  first  students  enjoyed  laying 
the  groundwork  for  all  routines  and  traditions  in  those  first  years.  Mary  Jane 
Meyers,  also  a  former  student,  felt  that  the  new  school  (still  officially  called  Deer- 
field-Shields Township  High  School,  Lake  Forest  branch)  gave  students  a  new  and 
refreshing  outlook  on  education. 

Because  classes  were  smaller,  teachers  became  much  more  intimate  with  their 
students  than  they  had  been  at  Deerfield-Shields.  The  attitude  of  early  students  in- 

15 


dicates  that  there  was  a  great  difference  in  the  atmospheres  of  the  two  schools.  It 
was  often  stated  that  students  at  LFHS  had  fun. 

Mrs.  Meyers  recalled  that  dirty  saddle  shoes  and  baggy  corduroy  pants  were 
popular  during  that  first  year.  Girls  wore  midi-length  dresses  and  short,  wavy  hair. 
They  wore  the  same  baggy,  blue  gym  suits  that  were  required  for  girls  in  1972  and 
hated  them  just  as  much.  Dress  was  important  to  students  then  and  most  boys  wore 
vests  and  jackets  for  pictures.  Often,  girls  called  their  friends  up  at  night  to  see  what 
they  were  planning  to  wear  the  next  day  so  that  they  could  dress  alike.  Because  this 
era  in  the  school's  history  immediately  followed  the  Depression,  expensive  clothes 
were  more  the  exception  than  the  rule. 

Entertainment  and  recreation  in  1935  were  generally  created  by  the  students 
themselves.  For  example,  the  front  area  of  the  school  was  a  good  playground,  so 
boys  played  bicycle  polo  there.  Boys'  and  Girls'  Clubs  chose  people  to  speak  at 
meetings  once  a  month  and  bridge  groups  met  in  the  clubrooms  after  school.  Hearts 
and  Blackjack  were  popular,  but  never  played  for  money,  as  in  1972.  With  a  dozen 
ping-pong  tables  on  the  school's  third  floor,  ping-pong  was  popular  and  tournaments 
were  held  often. 

In  1935,  the  school  board  had  a  policy  against  school  annuals.  This  was  pri- 
marily a  safeguard  for  local  merchants  rather  than  a  restriction  on  students.  Since 
the  merchants  already  supported  print-ups  of  school  activities,  this  policy  was  estab- 
lished to  protect  them  from  over-solicitation.  The  school  paper  was  only  a  mimeo- 
graphed single  page,  but  there  were  write-ups  about  the  school  in  the  Lake  Forester 
every  week. 

Dances  were  very  popular  in  the  1930's.  LFGA,  Lettermen's  Club,  Student 
Council  and  other  groups  sponsored  dances  throughout  the  year.  Students  were 
urged  to  try  out  for  the  floor  shows  held  during  the  dances  while  the  big  bands 
rested.  Stunts  varied  from  football  players  playing  ballerina  to  singing  or  dancing. 

Informal  dances  were  held  after  most  sports  events,  particularly  basketball 
games  and  even  away  games.  Afterwards,  students  would  gather  at  a  cafe  or  tavern 
nearby.  Although  students  under  twenty-one  were  not  served  drinks,  all  were  ad- 
mitted regardless  of  age.  There  was  no  city-wide  curfew  imposed;  most  thought  this 
was  the  responsibility  of  individual  parents. 

For  important  dances,  couples  often  doubled  or  tripled  for  lack  of  automobiles, 
or  lack  of  permission  to  use  them.  Students  were  not  expected  to  stay  with  one  boy 
or  girl  throughout  the  evening.  Girls  were  given  small  cards  with  spaces  to  reserve 
dances  with  particular  boys.  Etiquette  dictated,  however,  that  the  girls  dance  the 
first,  middle,  and  last  dances  with  their  dates. 

Outside  of  school,  recreation  was  limited.  There  was  a  bowling  alley  in  Lake 
Forest,  but  it  was  not  used  much  on  Saturday  nights.  Beer  parties  at  the  beach  were 
more  popular.  No  girls  were  allowed  at  these,  and  boys  did  not  try  to  drive  home. 
If  they  did  not  drive,  the  police  left  the  boys  alone;  it  was  a  mutual  agreement. 

In  the  1930's,  movie  theaters  tried  very  hard  to  attract  students.  Decor  inside 
the  theaters  was  lush,  and  complete  with  doormen,  ushers  and  ticket  takers.  A  sec- 
ond movie  theater  stood  where  O'Neil's  hardward  store  now  stands,  and  the  Deer- 
path  theater  often  showed  as  many  as  three  different  movies  a  week. 

Dating  was  limited  to  Friday  and  Saturday  nights  mostly,  though  "going 
steady"  was  very  popular  among  students  in  the  1930's.  This  could  last  any  period 
of  time,  from  one  week  to  four  years. 

Jobs  for  students  were  scarce  and  demanding.  Mr.  Toomey  recalled  earn- 
ing 350  an  hour  for  cutting  grass  and  pulling  weeds.  Caddying  18  holes  of  golf 

16 


brought  only  one  dollar.  But  as  spending  money,  this  was  sufficient.  Hamburgers, 
hot  dogs,  root  beer  and  other  teenage  staples  cost  only  a  nickle  then. 

LFHS's  Student  Council  was  powerful  and  prestigious  at  this  time.  Elections 
were  preceded  by  at  least  a  week  of  campaigning  and  voter  turnout  was  always 
large.  Council  met  once  every  two  weeks  before  school  started  in  the  morning,  so 
that  members  could  attend  all  their  assigned  classes.  One  project  of  the  1936-1937 
Student  Council  was  the  production  of  the  Student  Handbook,  which,  after  annual 
revisions,  is  still  in  use. 

Council  members  were  in  charge  of  keeping  order  in  the  halls,  especially  dur- 
ing fire  drills  and  assemblies.  The  1935-1936  Council  established  a  student  court  to 
deal  with  minor  offenses  such  as  cutting  class  or  being  tardy  repeatedly.  According 
to  John  Maloney,  then  a  teacher  and  later  Assistant  to  the  Superintendent,  the  court 
usually  passed  harsh  sentences  and  did  not  stand  the  test  of  time. 

Lake  Forest  High  School  offered  a  broader  education  than  Deerfield-Shields  in 
Highland  Park.  Between  50%  and  75%  of  its  graduating  class  went  on  to  college, 
despite  the  lack  of  funds  in  many  families. 

The  High  School  teams  did  very  well  in  these  early  years.  Many  boys  hoped 
to  go  into  professional  sports,  and  two  actually  left  before  graduation  to  play  pro- 
fessional football. 

Athletics  was  a  powerful  force  in  igniting  school  spirit.  Homeroom  sessions 
wrote  school  songs  and  cheers,  and  students  could  buy  season  football  or  basketball 
tickets  for  only  750.  The  games  were  played  on  Lake  Forest  College  facilities,  or 
at  West  Park.  Practicing  was  done  at  the  now-abandoned  Thorp  Academy,  east  of 
Sheridan  Road. 

Originally,  LFHS  teams  were  called  the  "Goldcoasters."  This  was  generally 
despised,  and,  in  1938,  a  contest  was  held  for  a  new  name  in  which  "Forest  Scouts" 
won.  Essentially,  the  name  was  derived  from  the  Senior  Star  on  the  floor  of  the 
main  hall:  the  star  is  a  compass  which  points  the  way  out  of  the  forest  (Lake  Forest) 
for  all  the  "scouts"  who  enter  the  school.  It  was  during  this  year,  1938,  that  the 
tradition  of  the  star  was  established.  "Every  school  needs  a  few  traditions,"  said  Mr. 
Maloney.  "We  were  a  new  school — we  didn't  have  any,  so  we  thought  this  up." 

Lake  Forest  High  School's  second  year  of  existence  was  much  like  the  first, 
though  things  had  begun  to  settle  down.  School  started  every  day  at  8:45  and 
lasted  until  3:45.  There  were  six  periods,  plus  an  advisory  period  and  lunch  break. 
Four  minutes  maximum  were  allowed  between  classes. 

Homeroom  sessions  grew  increasingly  important  in  the  1930's.  These  served 
as  organization  periods  and  allowed  students  close  contact  with  their  teacher- 
advisors.  Sessions  were  segregated  between  boys  and  girls,  generally  with  an  advisor 
of  the  same  sex.  These  periods  were  reserved  for  discussions  on  colleges,  dating,  life 
in  general,  and  homeroom  advisors  served  the  same  functions  as  counselors  did  in 
later  years. 

Every  Monday,  teachers  sent  blue  progress  cards  to  these  homeroom  advisors, 
who  would  then  discuss  them  with  the  students.  This  provided  closer  observation  of 
students'  progress  than  the  system  of  sending  notes  to  parents  once  a  quarter,  as  was 
done  in  1972. 

During  the  1937-1938  school  year,  Lake  Forest  High  School  had  only  389 
students.  The  school  was  still  very  much  the  focal  point  in  the  students'  lives  and 
the  center  of  teenage  social  activity.  The  Girls'  and  Boys'  Clubs  had  large  followings 
and  the  upperclassmen  took  great  joy  in  "breaking  in"  the  freshmen,  to  the  latters' 
dismay.  The  student  hang-out  was  Cohn's,  on  McKinley  Road,  at  the  corner  of 
Woodland.  New  dating  ideas  included  going  roller  skating  at  Great  Lakes  Naval 

17 


Freshmen  scrub  the  Senior  Star. 


18 


Base  and  to  plays  in  Chicago.  Saddle  shoes  and  white  cordoroy  pants  still  prevailed 
as  the  students  danced  to  the  sounds  of  the  big  bands. 

There  was  a  respectable  membership  in  the  National  Honor  Society.  School 
spirit  was  strong  and  further  encouraged  as  the  Student  Council  continued  to  pro- 
mote a  better  role  for  the  students  within  the  school. 

In  the  year  1939,  the  first  class  that  had  completed  all  four  years  in  the 
new  school  graduated.  The  school  was  still  as  small  as  it  had  been  in  1935,  and  the 
relationships  between  students  and  teachers  were  just  as  personal. 

Classroom  behavior  in  1939  was  still  very  formal,  though.  No  student  was 
allowed  to  move  in  the  hall  during  a  period  without  a  pass,  which  was  checked  at 
every  corner  of  the  school  by  hall  monitors.  According  to  Mrs.  Veronica  McCaffrey, 
there  was  no  "bad  crowd"  in  Lake  Forest  High  at  the  time.  There  was  little  "ditch- 
ing," and  if  boys  wanted  to  smoke,  they  went  across  the  railroad  tracks. 

Very  few  students  drove  to  school  during  the  1930's.  Most  walked  or  rode 
bicycles,  which  could  be  stored  in  a  bicycle  room  in  the  basement.  Students  could 
go  home  for  lunch,  or  bring  food  to  school.  In  1939,  they  first  began  to  eat  in  the 
cafeteria  on  the  third  floor,  rather  than  the  Home  Economics  room,  as  in  the  first 
few  years.  For  several  years,  mothers  of  students  came  to  school  and  prepared 
lunches  each  day  at  noon. 

Clothes  styles  had  changed  slightly  by  1939.  The  various  costumes  of  the  stu- 
dents consisted  of  short  sweaters  and  baggy  pants  for  the  boys;  pleated  skirts,  dou- 
ble sweaters  (a  short  sleeved  sweater  topped  by  a  cartigan),  bobby  socks,  "pearls" 
and  saddle  shoes  for  the  girls.  Both  boys  and  girls  wore  their  hair  relatively  short 
and  curls  were  definitely  "copisetic"  for  girls. 

"Copisetic"  and  "smooth"  were  terms  which  were  used  when  a  student  found 
something  to  be  exciting,  interesting  or  just  all  right  with  him.  "Dope"  was  the  slang 
term  for  information,  while  "jeez"  was  generally  used  in  place  of  "really?".  Profanity 
was  limited  and  was  not  a  part  of  the  student's  everyday  language. 

For  fun  on  weekends,  these  kids  would  often  have  house  parties  and  dance  the 
fox  trot  to  the  smooth  music  of  the  radio.  In  1938-1939,  big  bands  were  popular 
and  students  danced  to  recordings  of  Tommy  Dorsey,  Les  Brown,  Glen  Miller, 
Horace  Heidt,  Freddy  Martin  and  Guy  Lombardo. 

Movies  continued  to  be  popular  and  a  movie  survey  printed  in  the  Lake 
Forester  proudly  pointed  out  that  students  preferred  wholesome  pictures  to  the 
more  "adult"  films.  Favorites  at  the  Deerpath  included  "Young  Dr.  Kildare"  and 
"Mr.  Moto  on  Danger  Island."  Movie  magazines  were  also  popular  and  avidly  read. 

In  the  following  year,  1939-1940,  more  assemblies  were  scheduled  than  in  the 
previous  years.  Every  week,  usually  on  Friday,  an  assembly  was  held  in  the  audi- 
torium-gymnasium. Topics  would  vary;  a  speaker  from  a  certain  profession  would 
speak  about  his  trade,  or  a  former  student  would  return  to  speak  about  what  he  had 
done  since  graduation.  If  no  speaker  was  scheduled,  students  took  over  and  provid- 
ed some  form  of  entertainment,  such  as  plays  or  skits. 

News  that  George  Silich,  an  LFHS  graduate  of  1938,  had  received  high  honors 
at  the  Massachusetts  Institute  of  Technology  pleased  the  student  body  in  1939- 
1940.  The  Dean  of  M.I.T.  wrote  Dr.  Moore  that  George  was  one  of  the  five  best 
chemistry  students  in  the  freshmen  class  of  680.  He  presented  the  school  with  the 
Technology  Award,  which  was  quite  an  honor  for  a  school  only  five  years  old. 

Lake  Forest  High  School  became  a  member  of  the  Encyclopedia  Britannica 

Fellowship  in  December  of  1939.  At  the  request  of  the  juniors  and  seniors,  the 
Britannica  Fellowship  sent  material  concerning  world  affairs  and  problems  to  the 
school.  With  the  help  of  this  material,  the  students  were  supposedly  able  to  discuss 

19 


current  affairs  more  intelligently  and  with  less  prejudice.  More  forums  and  discus- 
sion groups  were  organized  as  a  result. 

In  Lake  Forest  High's  sixth  year,  enrollment  leveled  at  about  400  students. 
Eighty-nine  students  graduated  in  1941;  only  about  46  of  these  planned  on  going  to 
college,  and  of  these  at  least  one-third  went  to  Lake  Forest  College.  The  majority  of 
the  college-bound  entered  engineering  or  other  liberal  arts;  few  planned  on  major- 
ing in  business  or  the  arts. 

Awards  received  by  graduating  students  during  the  1930's  included  the  D.A.R. 
award,  American  Legion  Citizenship  awards  and  recognition  for  earning  the  most 
points  in  athletics. 

By  1941,  matinee  dances  had  become  very  popular  and  were  usually  well- 
attended.  These  lasted  from  3:30  to  5:00  on  school  days,  and  were  apparently  for 
the  sole  purpose  of  listening  to  music.  According  to  the  Forest  Scout,  "It  seems 
everybody  who  attends  the  matinee  dances  comes  solely  for  the  purpose  of  listening 
to  records.  Last  time,  the  floor  looked  as  empty  as  a  freshman's  head.  Those  who  did 
venture  out  into  this  no  man's  land  are  in  line  for  the  Carnegie  medal."  Somehow, 
this  description  is  strangely  reminiscent  of  dances  of  1972. 

Jitter-bugging  was  just  becoming  popular  in  1940-1941.  The  boogie-woogie 
records  of  Pete  Johnson,  Albert  Ammons,  Meade  Lux  Lewis  and  Honey  Hill  were 
favorites  during  this  time.  Other  popular  groups  were  those  of  Louis  Armstrong, 
Benny  Goodman,  Jimmy  Dorsey,  Count  Basie  and  Glenn  Miller. 

In  1941,  a  poll  of  the  most  popular  books  among  students  at  LFHS  was  taken. 
Gone  With  The  Wind  and  Rebecca  were  the  favorites  of  every  class,  except  with 
the  freshmen  who  preferred  The  Citadel. 

The  school  spirit  of  LFHS  was  still  going  strong  in  1940-1941.  A  special  com- 
mittee for  school  spirit  promotion  was  formed  by  Student  Council,  and  a  meeting 
was  held  for  seniors  to  encourage  them  to  set  good  examples  for  the  underclassmen 
in  school  spirit.  It  was  also  a  frequent  topic  of  discussion  at  meetings  of  the 
faculty  and  student  clubs. 

Briefly,  it  can  be  surmised  that  there  are  surprisingly  few  differences  between 
the  students  of  this  era  and  those  of  1972.  Given  time,  it  seems  as  though  attitudes 
revolve  in  circles,  or  as  Mr.  Maloney  stated,  "You  kids  haven't  changed' — not  a  bit." 


Lots  of  Latin  and  a  Little  Dancin' 

(Curriculum  and 

Co-Curricular  Activities) 

Co-curricular  activities  in  the  early  years  of  Lake  Forest  High  School  were 
based  around  social  events  such  as  dances,  parties,  and  assemblies.  Sponsoring  such 
events  was  the  main  purpose  of  most  of  the  early  clubs  of  the  high  school,  but  as 
the  years  progressed,  many  special  interest  clubs  were  formed  to  add  to  the  student's 
choice  of  activities. 

In  the  early  years  of  the  high  school,  the  Girls  Club  and  the  Boys  Club  were 

20 


the  two  most  prominent  organizations  in  the  school.  Each  sponsored  many  of  the 
school's  social  events,  and  as  part  of  their  charter,  each  club  had  its  own  clubroom 
already  started  where  the  students  could  congregate  to  relax  and  socialize  during 
their  before  and  after-school  time. 

Beginning  in  1935  the  Boys  Club  held  a  Father-Son  banquet  to  honor  the 
members  of  the  school  basketball  team.  Also  at  this  time  the  Girls  Club  began  the 
tradition  of  a  Mother-Daughter  banquet,  and  a  Big  Sister-Little  Sister  party,  both  of 
which  were  aimed  at  acquainting  new  students  and  parents  with  the  school. 

Another  event  sponsored  by  the  Boys  and  Girls  Clubs  was  the  school's  an- 
nual homecoming.  The  early  homecomings  of  Lake  Forest  High  School  usually 
began  on  Thursday  night,  when  an  informal  pep  rally  was  held  in  Market  Square. 
On  the  following  Friday,  classes  were  shortened  and  another  pep  meeting  was  held. 
At  noon  the  graduates  were  served  a  Homecoming  lunch,  followed  by  a  parade  of 
floats  (made  by  each  of  the  Sessions)  through  the  business  section  of  Lake  Forest  to 
Lake  Forest  College's  Farwell  Field,  where  the  football  team  played  the  homecom- 
ing game.  To  complete  the  festivities  an  informal  dance  was  held  at  about  9:00  in 
the  auditorium. 

Other  social  events  begun  in  the  first  years  of  the  school's  operation  were 
Senior  Hop,  a  semi-formal  dance,  and  the  G.A.A.-Lettermen  Club  dance  (this  was 
the  forerunner  of  Turnabout  Dance  of  today  in  which  the  girls  ask  the  boys  for 
dates).  The  biggest  dance  of  the  year  was  the  Junior  Prom,  for  which  tickets  cost 
about  one  dollar.  Before  any  plans  were  made  regarding  themes  and  decorations, 
the  Junior  class  had  to  acquire  60  dollars. 

A  Student  Council,  organized  in  1935,  was  of  a  very  different  nature  than 
today's.  Some  of  their  duties  were  enumerated  in  the  minutes  as  such:  stopping  all 
the  running  in  the  halls,  checking  all  student  passes,  picking  up  waste  paper  and 
other  trash  throughout  the  school,  sitting  at  designated  "monitor"  posts,  being 
courteous  to  strangers  and  visitors,  keeping  order  in  the  halls,  reporting  any  student 
who  wrote  on  walls  or  otherwise  disobeyed  the  rules,  collecting  absentee  slips  at 
assemblies,  and  turning  of!  lights  in  classrooms  and  other  school  areas  that  were 
not  in  use.  Some  of  the  Council's  more  amusing  duties  were  to  help  eliminate  gum 
chewing  and  to  aid  the  principal  in  breaking  the  "puppy-love"  affairs  that  had 
seized  the  school. 

Much  of  the  time  in  Student  Council  meetings  was  spent  determining  the  de- 
tails of  the  next  Student  Council  party.  They  celebrated  their  first  meeting  with  a 
buffet  supper.  Another  party  was  held  the  first  year  in  honor  of  the  faculty.  And  the 
lasting  tradition  of  council-sponsored  festivities  for  the  whole  school  was  established 
in  these  first  years  with  the  institution  of  the  matinee  dances — dances  that  were  held 
after  school.  These  matinee  dances  gradually  gave  way  to  "sock  hops,"  "fun  fests," 
carnivals,  "gym  jams"  and  activity  days,  but  never  has  a  year  passed  when  Student 
Council  didn't  sponsor  some  of  these  merrier  moments. 

The  Swim  Club,  Latin  Club,  French  Club,  Science  Club,  Math  Club,  and  Auto 
Club  were  all  founded  in  the  early  years  of  Lake  Forest  High  School.  A  Dramatics 
Club  was  also  begun  and  it  put  on  such  productions  as  "Wappin'  Wharf,"  "The 
Enchanted  Isle,"  "Clarence,"  "The  Saturday  Evening  Ghost,"  and  "June  Mad"  in 
the  years  from  1935-1941.  In  addition,  the  "Session  Stunts,"  a  series  of  skits  put  on 
by  the  various  sessions,  was  introduced  in  these  years. 

In  1935,  Mr.  Swan,  who  taught  business,  attempted  to  begin  a  Business  Club 
(as  was  stipulated  in  his  contract);  but  there  was  no  student  interest,  nor  has  there 
been  to  this  day.  Also  at  this  time,  a  debate  club  was  formed;  and  in  1940  a  history 
club  was  established,  the  ancestor  of  today's  Forum. 

21 


In  1938,  Lake  Forest  High  School  formed  its  first  newspaper,  The  Forest  Scout 
Its  staff  consisted  of  about  40  members  who,  in  its  early  years,  put  it  out  on  a 
monthly  basis.  Also  about  this  time  the  school's  literary  magazine,  Young  Idea, 
came  into  being.  This  was  (and  still  is)  a  magazine  where-in  the  students  could  pub- 
lish their  original  literary  compositions. 

In  1936,  the  first  National  Honor  Society  was  initiated  at  Lake  Forest  High 
School.  Every  year  since  that  time,  15  per  cent  of  the  Junior  class  and  10  per  cent 
of  the  Senior  class  have  been  elected  to  the  society. 

In  the  first  few  years,  there  were  only  three  sports  for  the  boys  to  participate 
in — football,  basketball  and  baseball — but  in  1937-38,  a  track  team  was  also  added 
at  the  varsity  level.  Varsity  sports  were  divided  into  lightweight  and  heavyweight 
classifications.  Each  was  determined  by  the  age  and  weight  of  the  individual,  and 
not  by  his  high  school  class. 

In  its  early  existence,  Lake  Forest  High  School  was  a  member  of  the  Northwest 
Athletic  Conference.  In  1939,  however,  the  school  was  placed  in  a  new  Northeast 
Conference  along  with  Arlington  Heights,  Crystal  Lake,  Leyden,  Liberytville,  Niles 
Center,  Warren,  and  Woodstock.  The  reason  for  the  change  was  to  bring  together 
local  schools  of  comparable  enrollment  (400-600)  and  mutual  interests. 

One  popular  side  effect  of  sports  at  the  young  Lake  Forest  High  School  was 
that  they  often  caused  early  Friday  dismissals,  because  the  sports  events  were  held 
right  after  school.  Strangely  enough,  there  was  no  set  time  for  these  early  dismissals; 
they  would  vary  at  the  discretion  of  principal  Raymond  Moore. 

The  basic  curriculum  for  each  of  the  years  from  1935-1941  remained  mucn 
the  same,  except  for  the  addition  of  new  courses  as  the  school  progressed. 

Every  student  in  each  particular  class  of  the  high  school  had  certain  required 
and  selective  courses.  Freshmen  were  required  to  take  English  I,  Math  I,  and  P.E.; 
Sophomores  were  obligated  to  take  English  II,  Math  II,  or  Commercial  Math,  and 
a  P.E.  course.  Requirements  for  Juniors  were  English  III  and  P.E.;  Seniors  had  to 
take  U.S.  History,  Economics,  and  P.E. 

Each  student  needed  sixteen  units  to  graduate,  and  one's  respective  class  was 
determined  by  the  number  of  credits  one  had  acquired.  There  was  no  standard 
method  for  giving  out  credits;  some  courses  gave  no  college  credits,  while  others, 
such  as  certain  Spanish  courses,  were  worth  two  full  credits. 

Gym  and  several  other  classes  were  taken  on  a  part-time  basis.  Freshmen  and 
sophmore  girls'  P.E.  classes  met  three  times  a  week,  and  juniors  and  seniors  met 
twice  weekly.  Freshman,  sophomore,  and  junior  boys  also  met  three  times  and  two 
times  a  week  respectively.  The  senior  boys  were  only  required  to  attend  gym  classes 
once  a  week. 

Each  regular  class  period  was  approximately  56  minutes  in  length;  classes 
varied  in  size  from  3  to  30  students.  When  a  student  was  not  in  a  class,  he  was 
assigned  to  a  study  hall  in  what  is  presently  Room  1 1 7.  In  addition  to  their  academic 
subjects,  students  were  required  to  attend  a  session  (homeroom)  on  Mondays  and 
Wednesdays.  Under  this  system  students  were  divided  into  groups  of  about  thirty- 
five  students  of  the  same  sex  and  class.  The  individual  sessions  could  challenge  each 
other  by  forming  their  own  teams  for  such  sports  as  baseball,  basketball,  and  field 
hockey.  These  sessions  also  displayed  creative  ability  by  making  up  acts  for  the 
early  talent  shows  of  the  high  school,  the  "Session  Stunts." 


22 


Part  II 

The  Home  Front 

(Community) 


"Christmas,  1941  .  .  .  Parents  are  concerned  for  their  sons  .  .  .  Everyone 
knows  the  need  for  many  sacrifices  .  .  .  We  will  probably  know  gasless  days,  butter- 
less  days  and  meatless  days  .  .  .  We  must  be  prepared  to  do  without  many  of  the 
near  luxuries  which  we  deem  necessities  .  .  .  We  will  have  blackouts  .  .  ."  (Lake 
Forester,  1941.) 

The  shadow  of  World  War  II  was  felt  in  every  aspect  of  Lake  Forest  life.  The 
prefix  "Victory"  was  attached  to  gardens,  buildings,  efforts  of  all  kinds.  Physically, 
Lake  Foresters  gave  their  scrap  metal,  waste  paper,  rubber  and  old  clothes:  emo- 
tionally, their  commitment,  loyalty  and  people  they  loved. 

1941-1945  were  years  of  saving,  contributing,  making  do  and  going  without. 
Lake  Forest  joined  the  rest  of  the  country  in  bond  drives,  setting  voluntary  goals 
way  out  of  proportion  to  the  community's  size.  In  the  eighth  and  last  of  its  Victory 
Loan  campaigns,  philanthropic  residents  overshot  the  $2,000,000  goal  by  almost 
$10,000.  Bonds  were  sold  in  the  First  National  Bank,  regular  ads  in  the  Lake  For- 
ester urged  their  sale,  and  a  red  thermometer  in  Market  Square  measured  progress. 

In  many  ways,  World  War  II  divided  Lake  Forest  families  —  1,200  men  and 
women  went  off  to  serve.  Yet  residents  seemed  to  become  closer  during  those  years. 
The  affluent  citizens  and  their  not-so-affluent  servants  and  the  majority  in-between, 
each  learned  to  cope  with  the  same  hardships,  to  live  within  the  same  rationing- 
board  limitations. 

The  Lake  Forester  printed  recipes  using  "low-points"  of  butter,  sugar,  and 
meat,  trying  to  help  consumers  live  comfortably  within  restrictions.  Citizens  were 
urged  to  report  violations  of  ceiling  prices  to  the  local  rationing  board.  "It  is  the 
responsibility  of  you,  the  consumer,  to  see  that  war-time  laws  are  obeyed  by  all  con- 
cerned, bearing  in  mind  that  these  laws  were  put  in  effect  for  your  protection,"  the 
Lake  Forester  stated. 

The  invasion  of  Pearl  Harbor  instilled  the  fear  of  attack  in  many  Americans. 
Lake  Forest,  being  close  to  two  military  bases,  was  perhaps  in  more  danger  than 
the  ordinary  town.  As  in  communities  all  across  the  country,  an  Office  for  Civilian 
Defense  was  formed  in  Lake  Forest,  to  prepare  residents  in  the  proper  defense 
procedures  in  case  of  an  attack.  "Air-raid  signals  are  to  be  given  by  the  air-raid 
siren.  The  red  or  general  alarm  signal  will  be  operated  to  give  a  fluctuating  or 
warbling  signal  of  varying  pitch  —  for  approximately  two  minutes  duration.  Two 
minutes  of  silence  will  follow.  Then  the  red  or  general  alarm  will  be  sounded  again." 

Captains  were  chosen  on  every  block  to  supervise  the  drills  and  insure  that  they 
were  carried  out  properly.  These  drills  often  lasted  several  hours,  causing  problems 
in  neighborhoods  lit  by  gas-lights,  which  took  time  to  light  and  extinguish.  Third 
Ward  Alderman  William  E.  David  served  as  chairman  for  the  Community  Defense 
Plan;  all  city  council  members  became  members  of  the  Lake  Forest  Defense  Coun- 
cil which  helped  organize  the  drills.  The  Council  passed  a  resolution  in  1942  im- 
posing a  fine  and/or  imprisonment  on  citizens  failing  to  comply  with  blackout 
regulations. 

23 


"They  were  like  your  fire-drills,"  remembers  Jerrold  Hansen,  LFHS  '47.  "You 
laugh  and  shoot  the  breeze  with  whoever  is  near  you.  We  didn't  pay  much  attention 
to  them." 

The  office  for  Civilian  Defense,  at  226  E.  Deerpath,  also  handled  ration- 
registering,  canvassed  neighborhoods  for  collected  items,  offered  courses  in  first  aid, 
fire-fighting  and  maintenance  of  public  service  utilities  in  case  of  an  emergency. 
Courses  for  adults  were  offered  at  Ft.  Sheridan  and  Great  Lakes,  and  teachers  in- 
structed children  in  basic  survival  and  calmness  at  school. 

The  O.C.D.  also  started  a  "Weapons  from  Waste"  campaign,  gathering  scrap 
metal,  rubber  and  grease  from  Lake  Foresters.  Two  helmets  could  be  made  from  one 
laundry  iron;  from  one  refrigerator,  three  machine  guns;  from  50'  of  hose,  four  rain- 
coats; from  32  toothpaste  tubes,  tin  for  one  fighter  plane.  From  butter,  fat,  and 
cooking  grease  could  be  extracted  the  glycerine  used  in  making  munitions. 

Lake  Forest  joined  the  national  drive  for  aluminum  scrap  even  before  the  U.S. 
entered  the  war.  From  a  1941  Lake  Forester,  "Now  that  we  have  a  fountain  in 
Market  Square  practically  filled  with  slightly  used  pots,  pans,  eyedroppers,  egg-cups 
and  children's  playthings  .  .  .  residents  are  wondering  just  what  will  happen  next." 

The  emphasis  was  on  save,  use  and  reuse.  Newspaper,  clothing,  furniture  and 
rubber  were  re-cycled  (called  "returning"  then.)  Bins  in  Market  Square  averaged 
two  car-loads  of  newspaper  each  week.  The  Lake  Forest  Furniture  Depot  collected 
old,  broken  furniture,  repaired  it,  and  sent  it  off  where  it  could  be  reused.  (Mrs. 
James  Ward  Thome,  whose  miniature  furniture  collections  are  exhibited  in  the  Art 
Institute,  helped  in  this  endeavor.) 

Automobiles  were  scarce  then  too  —  few  new  ones  were  made,  as  all  available 
material  was  needed  in  the  construction  of  jeeps,  trucks,  and  tanks  for  the  war. 
Gasoline  was  rationed  and  very  precious  in  these  years;  those  who  could  formed  car- 
pools  or  rode  the  electric  North  Shore  line. 

Many  Lake  Forest  women  planted  Victory  gardens,  canned  fruit  and  made 
preserves  to  be  sent  overseas.  (The  1942  "Session  Stunts"  at  Lake  Forest  High 
School  was  titled  "Vegetables  for  Victory.")  Sewing  and  knitting  circles  were  formed 
to  make  clothing  for  military  personnel  and  war  victims  in  Europe.  Women  were 
active  in  the  local  Red  Cross,  learning  nursing  skills  and  having  benefit  programs 
for  the  war. 

Lake  Forest  High  School  felt  the  war's  effects  too.  From  decorated  veteran 
speakers  and  lessons  in  German  war  tactics  to  Pre-Flight  and  home-nursing  courses, 
LFHS  prepared  its  students  to  graduate  into  a  world  at  war.  Seniors  left  the  four 
years  of  relative  peace  to  enter  a  dangerous,  uncertain  future.  They  were  united  in 
their  support  for  the  war  and  in  admiration  for  those  who  fought. 

"It  was  easy  to  have  a  sense  of  direction  then  —  there  was  only  one  direction 
to  go  —  straight  into  the  service,"  said  Brooks  Smith,  LFHS  '45.  "My  class  spent 
four  years  preparing  to  go  into  the  war,  and  then  when  we  graduated,  and  suddenly 
the  war  was  over,  it  was  kind  of  a  shock." 

Academic  life  had  to  go  on  as  normally  as  possible,  despite  all  the  absent  stu- 
dents, or  those  boys  who  came  of  draft  age  before  graduation.  Those  who  stayed 
home  waited  and  worried  and  bought  war  bonds.  Many  students  joined  the  Victory 
Corps,  contributed  to  the  Junior  Red  Cross  and  donated  blood. 

In  1943-44  alone,  students  and  teachers  raised  over  $7,000  for  the  war  effort 
—  donating  a  jeep,  a  "quack"  (an  amphibious  jeep),  a  torpedo  and  a  Piper  Cub 
airplane  to  the  war  effort.  Several  years  in  a  row,  the  traditional  Homecoming  bon- 
fire was  replaced  by  an  all-out  scrap  drive,  and  floats  for  the  Homecoming  parade 
were  ruled  out  as  an  extravagant  waste  of  paper,  wood  and  nails.  Drives  for  cloth- 

24 


ing,  canned  food  and  letters  to  send  overseas  received  much  support  from  the  stu- 
dent body.  Everyone  cared;  everyone  contributed. 

Because  the  war  drained  Lake  Forest  of  many  of  its  working  age  men,  the  job 
market  for  teenagers  was  fairly  good  during  the  years  1941-45.  A  Victory  Place- 
ment Program  was  formed  to  find  students  to  fill  needed  jobs,  such  as  baby-sitting, 
furnace  tending,  and  outdoor  work.  Many  of  the  students  equated  their  jobs  with 
patriotic  duty,  and  the  quality  of  work  was  usually  good. 

Women  also  did  work  that  had  been  previously  done  by  men.  In  Lake  Forest, 
more  wives  and  mothers  worked  in  shops  and  markets  than  ever  before,  as  well  as  in 
a  variety  of  volunteer  jobs. 

Effects  of  World  War  II  were  present  at  Lake  Forest  Academy  also.  It  adopted 
a  War  Program,  stressing  three  points:  (1)  informing  the  boys  of  the  facts,  the  rea- 
sons, and  the  steps  to  be  taken,  (2)  keeping  them  physically  fit,  and  (3)  keeping 
morale  and  hope  high. 

Lake  Forest  College  changed  in  view  of  special  war  needs  also,  accommodat- 
ing 250  men  in  an  officers'  training  program.  "You  have  to  understand  what  the 
presence  of  250  able-bodied  men  preparing  to  go  to  war  overseas  did  to  the  com- 
munity," Mr.  Hansen  commented.  "I  know  some  parents  were  concerned  about 
their  daughters,  if  you  know  what  I  mean.  But  then  these  same  parents  had  sons  in 
training  programs  in  oth^r  places — they  understood.  For  the  most  part,  everything 
was  fine.  We  did  a  lot  for  them,  and  I'm  sure  they  appreciated  it." 

Lake  Forest  women,  members  of  the  Red  Cross  Volunteers,  saw  to  it  that  every 
man  at  Ft.  Sheridan  received  a  Christmas  present,  year  after  year  during  the  war. 
A  local  U.S.O.  was  formed,  and  set  up  a  "Defense  Recreation  Cottage"  at  the  cor- 
ner of  Deerpath  and  McKinley,  across  from  the  public  library.  Here,  sailors  and 
army  personnel  came  for  coffee,  sandwiches,  music  and  conversation,  supplied  by 
members  of  the  community. 

Each  week,  the  Lake  Forester  published  news  of  local  service  men,  reporting 
on  those  who  had  been  in  battle,  those  who  received  medals,  and  all  too  often,  those 
who  had  been  killed. 

Edward  Arpee  in  his  History  and  Reminiscences,  remembers  many  Lake  For- 
esters held  prominate  positions  in  the  U.S.  military  during  the  war.  Frank  Knox, 
publisher  of  the  Chicago  Daily  News,  served  as  Secretary  of  the  Navy  during  those 
years.  Ralph  Bard  of  Lake  Rd.  was  his  Under  Secretary.  Lt.  General  William  H. 
Arnold,  chief  of  staff  of  the  14th  Corps  and  later  Commander  of  the  U.S.  Infantry 
at  Bougainville,  built  his  home  in  the  Walden  area  where  the  Cyrus  McCormick 
home  once  stood.  Perhaps  the  most  noted  of  Lake  Forest's  "heroes"  was  Major 
Richard  Knobloch,  LFHS  '36,  who  received  the  Distinguished  Flying  Cross  for  his 
flight  over  Tokyo  with  Major  General  Doolittle.  He  returned  to  Lake  Forest  High 
School  in  May  of  1 944  to  speak  at  a  Victory  assembly,  telling  of  his  historic  mission 
and  of  the  need  for  support  on  the  home-front. 

Lake  Forest,  in  the  early  1940's  was  still  very  much  a  small,  aristocratic  town, 
filled  with  summer  residences  and  farms.  Then,  as  now,  the  Lake  Forester  published 
personal  property  listings  and  many  names  synonymous  with  wealth  reoccurred. 
Six  Armour  families  were  listed,  twelve  Cudahys  (who  collectively  listed  about 
$52,835,  while  the  average  Lake  Forest  family  reported  about  $175),  four  Donnel- 
leys,  four  Dicks  and  nine  McLaughlins.  Mrs.  Stanley  Keith  of  Lake  Road  had  the 
highest  single  listing  —  $40,695. 

A  "Society  News"  column  in  the  Lake  Forester,  reporting  on  prominent  fami- 
lies in  the  community,  described  opulent  parties  and  imported  gowns.  Debutante 
parties,  posh  affairs  at  Onwentsia  and  elaborate  garden  weddings  continued  despite 
war-time  restrictions. 

25 


But,  contrary  to  the  image  many  outside  of  Lake  Forest  had  of  this  com- 
munity, its  residents  were  not  coldly  affluent  and  indifferent  to  the  problems  beyond 
the  city  limits.  To  the  thousands  of  extra  service  men  at  Great  Lakes  and  Ft.  Sheri- 
dan, Lake  Foresters  opened  their  hands  and  their  homes. 

'This  year  we  will  share  our  cars  when  we  see  bundle-laden  shoppers,  Waves, 
Navy  and  Army  men  walking  home  from  the  station  on  cold  winter  nights.  .  .  . 
We  are  going  to  share  our  Christmas  dinner  with  some  lonesome  man,  woman  or 
family  living  here  because  the  war  has  made  them  Army  or  Navy  personnel.  .  .  ." 
(Lake  Forester,  1943.) 

The  Office  for  Civilian  Defense  operated  as  a  clearing  house,  finding  extra 
quarters  for  men  stationed  at  Ft.  Sheridan,  which  was  not  equipped  to  handle  so 
many  men  at  one  time.  Lake  Forest  had  few  apartments  or  rooming  houses  at  the 
time,  but  zoning  was  forgotten  —  people  gave  up  rooms,  wings  of  their  homes,  con- 
verted servant's  quarters,  gardener's  cottages  and  garage  apartments  into  living  space 
for  service  men. 

Other  large  homes  held  parties  and  weekly  outings  for  sailors  at  Great  Lakes, 
who  came  in  bus  loads  to  enjoy  a  day  exploring  an  estate,  swimming  in  a  luxurious 
pool  and  eating  "home-cooked  meals." 

Lake  Forest  can  never  be  called  typical,  and  yet  during  1941-45  it  typified  the 
feelings  all  across  America  —  a  forgetting  of  differences,  a  pulling  together  for 
something  important,  trying  and  trying  and  winning  in  the  end. 

In  thousands  of  American  towns,  people  bundled  newspaper  and  gave  away 
old  clothes  and  gathered,  as  Lake  Foresters  did  in  Market  Square  many  times  dur- 
ing those  years,  to  sing  "American  Patrol,"  "We  Did  It  Before,"  and  "Remember 
Pearl  Harbor." 


Building  Strong  Bodies 

Twelve  Ways 

(Faculty) 

The  typical  Lake  Forest  teacher  of  the  forties  was  young  and  enthusiastic 
about  the  formative  "Wonder  Bread"  years  of  the  school.  That  generation's  educator 
was  often  accused  of  teaching  and  reciting  facts  rather  than  eliciting  concepts  about 
his  subject.  Perhaps  not  an  ivory-tower  intellectual,  the  teacher  of  the  forties  was 
instead  respected  for  his  school  spirit  and  interest. 

The  Lake  Forest  High  School  teacher  was  forced  to  be  an  independent  worker 
because  discussion  of  school  policy  was  not  permitted  within  the  educational  hier- 
archy. If  the  teacher  had  any  problems,  he  had  to  handle  them  himself,  using  his 
own  resources  and  experiences.  This  was  one  of  the  strict  policies  imposed  by  the 
principal,  Dr.  Raymond  Moore,  which  led  to  the  discontent  of  some  teachers. 

Dr.  Moore  recommended  teachers  to  the  school  board,  which  in  turn  usually 
hired  them.  He  set  the  standards  for  the  teacher  and  his  criteria  for  selecting  them 

26 


included  the  following:  four  years  of  previous  high  school  teaching  experience,  a 
serious  dedication  to  teaching,  and  a  college  degree  with  a  major  in  the  field  they 
intended  to  teach.  In  addition,  many  of  the  older  teachers  had  masters  degrees. 
These  requirements  led  to  the  development  of  an  excellent  staff. 

Dr.  Moore  was  the  task-master.  He  was  always  consulted  in  matters  concerning 
the  school,  and  he  had  the  final  word  regarding  the  appointment  of  class  advisors, 
guidance,  and  any  other  positions  the  school  board  created.  However,  he  respected 
older  staff  members,  considered  their  opinions,  and  many  times  utilized  their  sug- 
gestions. The  school  board  has  since  assumed  a  majority  of  the  responsibilities 
which  the  principal  once  held  and  has  created  policies  which  are  open  to  petition. 

But  Dr.  Moore  also  precipitated  much  discontent  and  resentment.  He  was 
especially  disliked  when  he  reprimanded  both  teachers  and  students  before  assem- 
blies of  the  entire  school  body.  This  caused  embarrassment  and  many  bitter  feelings. 

Salaries  for  the  subsequent  school  year  were  decided  by  Dr.  Moore  during  the 
summer.  The  Board  of  Education  would  set  a  base  salary  according  to  the  school 
budget  and  the  pecuniary  situation  of  the  time.  (This  was  usually  $2,500  and  in- 
cluded such  additions  as  five  percent  for  living  in  the  expensive  township  and  pen- 
sion allotments.)  Dr.  Moore  then  added  amounts  according  to  the  merit  system.  He 
took  into  consideration  the  teacher's  experience,  his  personal  opinion  of  the  teacher, 
others'  opinions  of  the  teacher,  and  his  teaching  and  learning  ability.  In  other  words, 
he  considered  how  much  a  teacher  had  to  give  and  how  well  he  gave  it.  Mr.  Linden- 
meyer,  in  these  respects,  was  considered  the  best  and  was  consequently  paid  one  of 
the  highest  salaries. 

Many  teachers,  of  which  more  than  two-thirds  were  women,  left  the  school 
during  the  forties.  Of  the  women  who  left,  some  married  and  others  accompanied 
their  husbands  when  they  were  relocated  by  their  businesses.  But  there  were  teach- 
ers, like  Theodore  Cavins,  who  left  the  school  for  different  reasons.  Mr.  Gavins 
left  the  teaching  profession  in  1 945  to  run  a  summer  camp  —  Camp  Mishawauka. 
Few  men  left  the  school  though.  This  could  be  attributed  to  Dr.  Moore's  rumored 
favoring  of  the  male  members  of  the  faculty. 

Dr.  Moore  did  not  allow  new  teachers  to  have  any  assistance  and  held  to  this 
policy  right  through  into  the  sixties.  Many  teachers  found  it  difficult  to  maintain 
their  classes,  work  in  the  framework  of  Dr.  Moore's  policies,  and  handle  disciplinary 
problems  simultaneously. 

The  high  school  in  the  forties  still  retained  the  intimacy  of  a  family,  tied  closely 
by  the  troubles  of  the  war.  There  were  nineteen  teachers  in  1942  and  twenty-five  in 
1947,  as  well  as  a  librarian,  a  secretary,  and  a  nurse.  The  overall  teacher-student 
ratio  was  one  to  seventeen,  since  there  were  about  four  hundred  students.  This  situa- 
tion made  it  possible  for  the  teachers  to  know  all  of  the  students  and  in  many  cases, 
their  families,  too. 

The  teachers  respected  and  trusted  the  students.  They  put  emphasis  on  the 
individual.  An  example  of  this  was  the  report  card  system.  At  the  end  of  grading 
periods  it  was  the  student's  responsibility  to  collect  his  own  grades.  In  this  way,  each 
student  faced  the  teacher  and  the  evaluation  of  his  work. 

The  teachers  also  had  good  rapport  among  themselves,  even  when  school  was 
not  in  session.  Most  of  them  lived  close  to  the  school  until  later  years  when  the  cost 
of  living  in  the  community  rose.  Since  the  area  was  very  small,  they  had  teachers 
from  the  other  schools  in  town,  such  as  Halsey,  Gorton,  and  St.  Mary's,  as  neigh- 
bors. And  a  substantial  number  of  wives  of  younger  teachers  taught  in  primary 
schools  to  supplement  the  meager  war-year  salaries.  The  faculty  of  all  the  schools 
in  town  met  annually  to  discuss  their  schools,  classes,  and  teaching  methods. 

27 


Until  1948,  the  working  year  for  the  teacher  began  on  the  same  day  as  the 
students'  school  year.  Early  in  1947,  the  Board  of  Education  decided  that  teachers 
should  report  to  school  one  week  earlier  in  September,  for  a  full  week  of  discussions 
and  presentations  of  the  various  subjects  taught  and  the  methods  used.  The  first  of 
these  workshops  was  in  the  following  year  and  began  with  a  declaration  of  aims 
and  objectives. 

On  a  normal  school  day,  teachers  arrived  at  eight  o'clock  a.m.  and  were  not 
permitted  to  leave  until  four  o'clock.  Most  taught  six  classes  a  day,  which  included 
a  session.  When  a  teacher  was  absent,  his  colleagues  had  to  substitute  in  his  classes 
during  their  free  time.  This  plan  helped  the  school  budget,  but  was  not  workable 
when  more  than  a  few  teachers  were  absent  at  once. 

The  teachers  also  assumed  the  responsibility  of  disciplining  the  students  both 
before  and  after  the  school  day.  One  teacher  would  be  "in  charge"  for  a  block  of 
weeks  and  would  stay  at  school  each  day  until  five  o'clock. 

After  the  regular  academic  school  day,  most  teachers  sponsored  clubs  and 
other  curricular  activities.  A  faculty  advisor  was  necessary  for  each  school  organ- 
ization. Some  teachers  helped  with  more  than  one.  These  activities  brought  the 
teachers  still  closer  to  the  students. 

Some  teachers  taught  night  school.  On  Friday  afternoons  and  various  week 
nights  they  served  as  chaperones  for  dances.  They  also  attended  the  annual  meeting 
for  the  faculty  and  administrators  of  the  Highland  Park  and  Lake  Forest  High 
Schools.  These  meetings  continued  to  be  formal  and  unproductive  affairs. 

At  the  close  of  the  academic  year,  summer  saw  a  lot  of  tired  but  happy  and 
proud  teachers.  Some  of  them  stayed  at  the  school  to  do  odd  up-keep  jobs  —  such 
as  hedge  trimming  and  painting  —  in  cooperation  with  the  custodians.  But  every 
third  summer  of  a  teacher's  tenure  brought  the  requirement  of  at  least  six  weeks  of 
summer  school  in  something  of  value.  This  was  often  satisfied  by  studying  for  a 
university  credit,  or  even  travelling  (with  a  hundred  dollars  from  the  school  to  help 
cover  costs)  to  Canada,  Europe,  Mexico,  South  America  or  some  place  in  the  U.S. 
Subsequently,  the  majority  of  the  faculty  traveled  every  summer.  Others,  like 
Bernice  Palmquist,  spent  their  free  time  pursuing  a  hobby,  such  as  politics.  And 
then  there  was  the  group  of  teachers  that  ventured  West  one  year  to  "manhandle" 
the  Colorado  River  by  raft. 

The  forties  also  witnessed  the  High  School's  acquisition  of  the  world's  youngest 
teacher,  for  as  Mr.  Lester  St.  John  himself  says,  "Working  with  kids  keeps  you 
young,  and  I  have  the  best  kids  any  place  in  the  world."  Mr.  St.  John  never  became 
that  "cantakerous  old  grandfather"  he  claims  to  be,  because  he  did  teach  and  loved 
it.  He  came  to  LFHS  in  1 942  to  teach  physics  and  chemistry  and  a  pre-flight  aero- 
nautics course  for  students  who  planned  to  fly  planes  in  World  War  II.  But  even 
then  he  was  bald  and  appeared  frequently  in  the  Forest  Scout  gossip  columns  as 
"LST."  In  1960  he  was  named  chairman  of  the  science  department  and  was  no 
longer  involved  in  sports  or  clubs.  He  spent  his  time  at  LFHS  being  interested  in 
and  amazed  at  the  good  he  recognized  in  the  people  around  him.  He  remembers  all 
his  fellow  workers  as  "outstanding"  people.  He  recalls  his  former  students,  his 
"noodles,"  with  deep  affection  and  pride,  especially  the  "madame  secretaries"  of  his 
later  years.  But  Mr.  St.  John  has  failed  to  see  the  ultimate  accumulation  of  good — 
the  good  in  himself.  He  and  his  Hercules  bike,  his  pride,  his  honesty  and  integrity 
will  long  be  remembered  as  he  leaves  the  school  in  1972  —  a  school  he  has  greatly 
improved  through  his  efforts. 

28 


Kilroy  Was  Here 
(Students) 

World  War  IFs  effect  on  Lake  Forest  High  School  can  be  viewed  with  critical 
retrospection  or  nostalgic  sentimentality.  From  a  "treacherous  historical  perspec- 
tive" of  30  years,  judgement  can  be  passed  on  the  dedication  and  involvement  of 
LFHS  students  as  reflex  action,  following  the  national  trend,  or  as  true  young 
patriotism.  Students  of  1972  can  rationalize  the  fierce  commitment  that  was  dis- 
played as  complacency  to  the  establishment,  or  mirroring  of  parents'  philosophies, 
but  perhaps  not  justly.  High  school  students  during  that  time  felt  the  threat,  and 
come  December,  1941,  the  reality  of  war  such  as  this  generation  will  probably  never 
know.  For  the  students  of  the  1940's,  the  war  provided  editorial  material  for  the 
Forest  Scout,  themes  for  Session  Stunts  and  a  focus  for  all  causes.  It  limited  civilian 
life-styles  and  took  away  uncles,  brothers  and  friends,  sometimes  forever. 

The  1940's  was  a  special  and  sentimental  time  in  LFHS  history.  It  was  the 
epoch  of  bobby  socks,  zoot  suits  and  military  crew  cuts;  it  was  the  era  of  "Stormy 
Weather,"  "Pistol  Packin'  Mama"  and  "American  Patrol";  it  was  the  autumn  of 
scrap  drives,  the  winter  of  stamp  collecting  and  the  spring  of  saying  goodbyes. 

Then,  Lake  Forest  High  School  served  the  middle-class  of  the  well-to-do  sub- 
urbian  community.  The  economic  character  of  the  families  involved  with  the  school 
had  changed  from  servant  occupations  to  private  businesses.  The  parents  of  students 
were  primarily  local  merchants  or  workers  in  Chicago. 

After  the  four  years  of  relative  peace  at  LFHS,  orders  and  officers  and  direc- 
tion overseas  awaited  most  boys.  For  all  but  a  few,  plans  for  college  and  a  career 
would  have  to  wait  until  the  war  had  been  won.  As  graduate  Brooks  Smith,  LFHS 
'45  remembered,  "Attitudes  were  completely  different  —  nobody  cared  very  much 
about  their  grades  or  their  social  lives.  It  didn't  matter.  All  the  guys  knew  they  were 
going  into  the  service." 

"I  remember  the  main  thing  our  senior  year  was  to  decide  which  branch  of  the 
service  you  were  going  into,"  said  Gordon  Lackie,  LFHS  '44,  who  decided  on  the 
Navy  V-12.  "It  was  a  necessary  war  —  nobody  thought  of  getting  out  of  it.  We 
weren't  thinking  immediately  of  college.  The  draft  age  was  eighteen,  and  some  of 
the  guys  who  were  older  left  school  .  .  .  ." 

Even  Principal  Raymond  Moore  was  called  to  war,  and  spent  the  1943-1944 
school  year  as  a  lieutenant  at  Columbia  University.  Math  teacher  Stanley  Nelson 
served  as  principal  in  the  interim. 

In  1943,  LFHS  had  a  service  flag  with  three  gold  stars,  honoring  the  three 
alumni  killed  to  date  in  World  War  II.  In  the  remaining  two  years  of  the  war,  this 
number  increased. 

World  War  II  brought  with  it  a  culture  all  its  own.  Crew  cut  hair  (a  la  boot 
camp)  became  fashionable,  as  did  military-cut  jackets  and  coats.  Nothing  did  more 
for  a  girl's  social  status  than  to  be  seen  with  a  military  man  looking  "smooth  in  his 
dress  blues." 

Because  of  gas  rationing  and  the  shortage  of  automobiles,  any  student  with  a 
car  was  almost  assured  of  popularity.  "S"  cards,  given  to  students  who  could  prove 
they  needed  gasoline  to  get  to  and  from  school,  were  also  a  great  social  asset.  "To 
have  one  of  these  was  really  something,"  mused  Mr.  Smith. 

29 


"We  formed  car  pools  a  lot  then,  too.  I  remember  squeezing  twelve  kids  into 
a  car  sometimes.  And  the  big  teen  crime  wave  was  to  steal  a  gallon  of  gas  from  a 
parked  car  and  ride  around  for  awhile/'  remembers  Mr.  Smith. 

The  shortage  of  gas  limited  everyone's  travel.  Students'  opinions  of  this  incon- 
venience, polled  in  the  Forest  Scout,  ranged  from  "I  do  miss  having  the  boys  pick 
me  up/'  to  "I  no  longer  have  the  excuse  that  the  car  froze  up  on  me  when  I'm  late 
for  school." 

Lake  Forest  High  students  donated  metal,  rubber,  clothing,  energy,  time  and 
blood  to  the  war  effort.  In  1943-1944,  homerooms  competed  with  each  other  for 
the  honor  of  buying  the  most  war  bonds. 

Other  national  service  organizations  such  as  the  Junior  Red  Cross  were  started 
at  the  high  school.  Students  collected  books  to  be  sent  overseas  and  sold  Christmas 
cards  to  make  money.  Several  girls  toured  with  the  North  Shore  U.S.O.  group  and 
danced  for  wounded  sailors  at  Great  Lakes  Naval  Base. 

The  school's  social  system  seems  to  have  been  quite  structured  in  1942-1943. 
Cliques  and  clans  always  present  in  a  school  atmosphere  were  given  names  then. 
"The  Joads"  and  the  "Pink  Rabbits"  were  the  most  influential  during  this  time. 
The  loads,  a  boys  clique,  was  recognized  by  its  use  of  military  terminology,  bull 
sessions  and  unique  sweatshirts.  The  Pink  Rabbits  were  girls  who  planned  social 
activities,  sleigh  rides,  barn  dances  and  "ho-ho  hops"  during  the  Christmas  season. 
Other  groups,  the  "Weegies"  and  "Mrrrr  .  .  ."  lacked  the  secrecy  and  high  amount 
of  comradeship  which  the  Joads  and  the  Pink  Ribbits  possessed. 

Lake  Forest  High  School  was  the  center  of  its  student's  lives  in  the  1940's. 

With  the  inavailability  of 
transportation  and  the  sac- 
rifices brought  on  by  the 
war,  students  depended  on 
the  school  for  entertain- 
ment, amusement  and  social 
life  as  well  as  an  education. 
"There  was  a  lot  of 
school  spirit  then,"  remem- 
bered Mr.  Smith.  "Because 
there  was  a  war  on,  there 
was  nothing  else  to  do.  You 
know,  you  can  only  sit  and 
watch  radio  so  long  .... 
Can  you  imagine  every  boy 
and  girl  wearing  a  tee  shirt 
with  'Lake  Forest  High 
School  Boys'  (or  Girls') 
Club  on  it?  My  father's 
store  sold  belt  buckles  that  said  'Lake  Forest  High  School'  on  them,  and  he  could 
never  keep  them  in  stock.  Everybody  wanted  one,  they  were  so  proud  to  belong  to 
that  school." 

Outside  of  school,  jobs  were  easier  to  find  during  the  war  years,  even  for  stu- 
dents, because  of  the  shortage  of  men.  In  the  1940's,  after  school  jobs  usually  paid 
about  600  an  hour.  Students  were  employed  as  bus-boys  at  the  Deerpath  Inn,  pin- 
setters  at  the  Bowling  Lanes  and  "disc-slingers"  at  Helanders,  which  sold  record  al- 
bums then,  for  about  850  each. 

LFHS  suffered  from  its  own  shortage  of  man-power  because  of  the  war.  In 

30 


World  War  II:  Cafeteria  on  the  third  floor. 


1942,  girls  felt  the  lack  of  date-material  so  acutely  that  they  formed  a  Date  Bureau 
for  Senior  Hop. 

Football  and  basketball  games  were  usually  held  on  Fridays  during  this  era, 
after  school  or  in  the  evenings.  School  was  often  dismissed  early  on  Fridays,  so  stu- 
dents could  get  ready  for  the  "big  game."  Because  war  limited  other  entertainment, 
turnout  for  these  games  was  usually  very  good.  "There  were  about  400  kids  in  the 
school  then,"  said  Mr.  Smith.  "And  for  games,  350  would  turnout  in  the  stands.  The 
other  50  would  be  down  there  playing." 

A  favorite  hang-out  for  "slick  chicks"  and  "smooth  joes"  after  games  and 
dances  at  school  was  the  College  Inn  of  the  Sherman  House  in  Chicago,  provided 
someone  had  a  car  and  enough  gas  to  get  there.  A  real  treat  was  to  have  the  an- 
nouncer mention  that  a  group  from  LFHS  was  in  the  "studio  audience." 

"The  music  we  had  was  the  best  in  the  world,"  says  Joe  Emma.  "Harry  James, 
Cab  Calloway,  Frank  Sinatra  and  all  the  big  band  sounds."  "Long  Ago  and  Far 
Away,"  "Jersey  Bounce"  and  "Someone  Has  Taken  My  Place"  were  favorite  songs 
during  this  era. 

When  the  war  ended,  in  the  spring  of  1945,  LFHS  was  swept  up  in  the  national 
upsurge  of  new  hope  and  vitality.  The  worries,  efforts  and  future  plans  of  students 
shifted  direction.  There  was  time  to  be  happy,  without  the  impending  shadow  of 
World  War  II,  time  for  more  fun  now  that  the  impression  of  national  danger,  how- 
ever exaggerated  it  may  have  been,  was  gone. 

Students  in  the  late  1940's  continued  to  work  in  after  school  jobs,  but  found 
more  time  for  entertainment.  The  Peacock  Supper  Club  was  a  favorite  gathering 
place  for  students  after  class  dances  and  other  special  occasions.  It  was  a  cocktail 
lounge  and  restaurant  on  Highway  41,  not  far  from  the  school  actually,  but  it 
seemed  a  long  distance  then,  when  the  speed  limit  in  Lake  Forest  was  only  15  m.p.h. 

Students  often  gathered  at  Sally's  for  an  early  breakfast  after  a  late  dance.  The 
Parkside  and  the  Tick-Tock  were  also  popular  among  students  in  the  1940's,  but 
have  since  been  closed  and  forgotten. 

Lake  Forest  residents  were  still  very  conscious  of  those  young  people  in  the 
community  who  had  served  and  died  in  World  War  II,  and  wished  to  build  a  me- 
morial to  them.  Edward  Welles,  who  later  became  mayor  of  Lake  Forest,  headed  a 
committee  to  plan  such  a  memorial  and  decided  that  a  community  youth  center  was 
the  most  needed  project.  "There  could  be  no  more  fitting  tribute  to  the  sacrifices 
made  during  the  war  than  this  memorial  dedicated  to  the  welfare  of  the  youth  of 
Lake  Forest  .  .  ."  (Lake  Forester,  1947). 

LFHS  students  were  highly  pleased  with  this  proposal,  which  would  give  them 
a  place  to  go  and  talk  or  dance  after  basketball  games  and  movies.  The  Cola  Cabana 
Committee,  a  group  of  students  from  the  high  school,  Lake  Forest  Academy  and 
Ferry  Hall  which  planned  recreational  activities,  backed  this  wholeheartedly.  For- 
merly, the  center  of  teenage  activity  had  been  an  old  "Y"  on  Western  Avenue. 

In  January  of  1947,  architect  John  L.  King  submitted  his  blueprint  for  the 
student  memorial  center  to  the  mayor's  committee.  It  was  planned  to  fill  the  needs 
of  the  Cola  Cabana  Committee  specifically,  which  was  now  called  the  Lake  Forest 
Youth  Council.  The  proposed  building,  which  was  to  be  on  the  Summit  Place  side 
of  West  Park,  included  a  gymnasium  and  a  dance  floor,  connected  by  a  corridor  so 
that  the  two  could  run  independently.  The  dance  section  was  to  have  been  specially 
portioned  off  into  smaller  rooms  for  the  Youth  Council. 

Money  was  a  problem  however,  and  the  mayor's  committee  decided  to  buy  an 
old  estate  rather  than  having  a  new  building  constructed.  The  Bevan  estate,  740 
Green  Bay  Road  was  considered,  but  a  city-wide  referendum  defeated  this  pro- 

31 


posal.  Later,  purchase  of  the  Koch  estate,  on  the  corner  of  Deerpath  and  Green  Bay 
was  approved,  and  it  was  named  "Teenage  Canteen."  Several  dances  were  held  there 
in  the  fall  of  1947  and  students  were  pleased  to  have  a  place  to  go  for  a  soda  and  to 
be  with  friends. 

However,  several  citizens  raised  objections  to  the  Teen  Center.  They  felt  it  was 
not  a  fitting  memorial  to  those  young  people  who  had  been  killed  in  the  war.  A  city 
vote  was  called  to  decide  the  future  of  the  center,  and  students  began  to  fight  for 
their  new  privilege.  Many  teenagers  wrote  letters  to  the  Lake  Forester  stating  their 
feelings.  One  wrote  that  after  school  dances  and  activities,  the  kids  liked  to  go 
somewhere,  but  the  nearest  grill  and  soda  fountain  open  past  nine  o'clock  was  in 
Highland  Park.  Other  students  questioned  the  community's  views  on  kids  gathering 
on  street  corners  when  they  had  nothing  to  do.  The  few  recreation  places  in  Lake 
Forest  were  ugly  and  unpleasant,  and  students  wanted  a  place  to  go  and  dance,  with 
a  juke  box  and  snack  bar. 

Students  were  willing  to  fight  for  the  center.  They  held  dances  to  raise  money 
for  a  center  of  their  own  and  sponsored  essay  contests  for  students  to  express  their 
views. 

Despite  the  efforts  of  many  people,  the  community  center  was  voted  down  in 
the  city  election  and  the  Koch  estate  was  put  up  for  sale.  This  was  a  disappointment 
for  the  students,  but,  said  one  resident,  they  had  learned  to  fight  for  what  they  be- 
lieved in. 

The  1940's  produced  a  tough,  compassionate  and  hard-working  student.  Born 
in  the  Depression  and  raised  in  the  war,  he  knew  much  about  life  and  trying  — 
accepting  a  small  defeat,  such  as  the  Teen  Center,  and  sharing  in  a  much  larger 
victory. 


Snake  Dance  Through  the  War 

(Curriculum  and 

Co-Curricular  Activities) 

The  curriculum  at  Lake  Forest  High  School,  as  it  entered  its  seventh  year  in 
1941,  was  constructed  around  a  framework  of  basic  courses  necessary  to  prepara- 
tion for  college. 

Many  departments  offered  general  survey  courses  along  with  their  more  spe- 
cific topics  of  study.  In  the  social  studies,  there  was  a  course  known  simply  as 
'Social  Studies'  as  well  as  a  civics  course  and  the  American,  European  and  English 
histories.  This  was  also  true  in  the  science  department.  There  was  physics,  chemistry, 
biology,  and  a  general  science  course  which  served  as  an  introduction  to  all  of  the 
others.  Math,  English  and  most  of  the  other  courses  were  not  designated  by  the 
specific  topic  of  study  but  by  the  semester;  consequently,  all  students  followed  the 
same  math  and  English  sequence.  The  other  courses  offered  remained  the  same  as 
in  the  30's  with  the  exception  of  one  new  class,  Spanish,  which  was  added  to  the 
foreign  language  program. 

32 


As  World  War  II  became  incipient,  one  more  change  was  made  in  December 
of  1941.  Physical  education  classes  for  junior  and  senior  boys  were  modified  and 
lengthened  by  one  hour  a  week,  the  purpose  being  to  better  prepare  the  boys  for 
service  in  the  Armed  Forces. 

Interscholastic  sports  at  the  high  school  still  consisted  of  football,  basketball, 
baseball  and  track.  The  teams  received  encouragement  from  the  all-male  cheer- 
leading  squad  and  the  newly  formed  "school  spirit"  committee. 

Those  who  did  not  participate  in  interscholastic  sports  had  numerous  intra- 
mural sports  to  compete  in.  For  the  boys,  there  were  baseball,  basketball,  volley- 
ball, and  waterpolo  teams;  for  the  girls,  the  LFGAA  was  active  and  very  popular. 

Other  extra-curricular  activities  included  all  the  various  clubs,  with  the  addi- 
tion during  1941  of  a  Rifle  Club,  Diving  Club  and  Victory  Committee.  The  Boys' 
and  Girls'  Clubs  remained  the  largest  and  most  popular  student  organizations, 
though  both  the  Dramatics  Club  and  the  History  Club  had  growing  memberships. 
The  Dramatics  Club  continued  to  present  at  least  one  production  every  year,  and 
during  the  years  between  1941  and  1948  put  on  such  shows  as  "Seven  Keys  to 
Baldpate,"  "Brother  Goose,"  "The  Three  Musketeers,"  "Best  Foot  Forward," 
"Don't  Take  My  Penny,"  "Jane  Eyre,"  "The  Mockingbird,"  "Kind  Lady,"  and 
"H.M.S.  Pinafore"  in  collaboration  with  the  music  department.  The  music  depart- 
ment got  into  the  act  each  year  itself  with  an  opera  or  other  musical  production, 
and  featured  performances  of  "Trial  Bv  Jury,"  "I  Hear  America  Singing,"  "The 
Chimes  of  Normandy"  and  "Pirates  of  Penzance"  through  these  years.  Admission 
to  the  shows  was  usually  about  350. 

The  History  Club,  originally  called  the  Britannica  Fellowship  because  it  was 
sponsored  by  the  Encyclopedia  Britannica  Co.,  kept  its  monthly  meetings  in  the 
form  of  debates  over  current  issues.  The  Victory  Committee,  formed  in  February 
1942,  was  affiliated  with  the  National  Victory  Corps  and  sponsored  activities  related 
to  the  war  effort. 

The  Forest  Scout  continued  to  appear  regularly  as  did  the  annual  Young  Idea 
and  the  Senior  Supplement. 

Of  course  the  school  dances  thrived,  the  most  important  remaining  the  Senior 
Hop  and  the  Junior  Prom.  The  matinee  dances  held  after  school  by  the  Student 
Council  were  also  well-attended,  and  in  1941  the  Council  began  sponsoring  dances 
after  the  basketball  games  (later  called  sock  hops)  to  which  students  and  players 
from  both  schools  were  invited  to  encourage  good  inter-scholastic  relationships. 

During  the  following  year,  1942-1943,  many  transformations  in  the  curriculum 
and  co-curricular  programs  occurred,  changes  resulting  from  the  war-conscious  so- 
ciety of  which  the  Lake  Forest  Students  were  now  a  part.  This  year,  a  great  effort 
was  made  by  all  the  students  to  acquaint  themselves  with  their  peers,  and  on  the 
day  preceeding  the  opening  of  school,  a  "party"  was  given  for  the  freshmen,  called 
Freshman  Day.  The  purpose  of  Freshman  Day  was  to  give  the  incoming  freshmen 
a  few  pointers  about  survival  in  high  school  and  so  to  prevent  the  "victimizing"  of 
these  innocent  souls  by  the  upperclassmen.  Since  then,  Freshman  Day  (Freshman 
Orientation)  has  become  an  annual  event.  Another  change  during  this  year  was  the 
adoption  of  mixed  sessions.  Since  the  sessions  had  always  previously  been  sexually 
segregated,  this  was  quite  a  radical  change. 

Also  changed  were  the  meeting  times  of  the  Boys'  and  Girls'  Clubs.  They  began 
to  meet  during  the  sessions  period  and  no  faculty  advisor  was  required  to  hold  a 
meeting.  The  club  rooms  were  still  forbidden  to  students  for  use  after  school,  and 
violation  of  this  rule  led  to  the  closing  of  the  Girls'  Club  room  toward  the  end  of  the 
1 942  school  year. 

33 


The  Homecoming  Dance  of  1942,  like  everything  else,  was  affected  by  the 
war.  In  place  of  the  traditional  bonfire  at  West  Park,  the  students  collected  a  scrap 
metal  pile.  They  also  walked  to  the  dance,  spent  no  money  on  decorations  (corn- 
stalks and  pumpkins  were  used),  and  gave  the  proceeds  to  the  Army  and  the  Navy. 

The  traditional  Junior  Prom  was  an  informal  affair  that  year.  Again,  the  war 
was  taken  into  consideration  as  nearly  everyone  walked  to  the  dance  and  the  dec- 
orations were  minimal.  One  thing  of  particular  interest,  however,  was  that  a  king 
and  queen  of  the  Prom  were  elected  for  the  first  time  in  the  school's  history. 

Student  Council  held  the  first  Fun  Fest  at  Lake  Forest  High  School  in  1942. 
This  party  took  place  in  the  gym,  and  included  dancing,  card  playing  and  ping-pong. 
The  response  by  students  to  this  new  innovation  was  highly  favorable  and  it  prom- 
ised to  be  a  yearly  event  in  the  future.  The  Young  Idea  was  published  in  two 
separate  segments  in  1942-43,  one  for  each  semester,  unlike  what  had  been  done  in 
the  past.  The  art  work  in  it  was  done  by  the  various  art  classes. 

The  Victory  Committee,  previously  formed  by  students  after  the  attack  on 
Pearl  Harbor,  expanded  greatly  during  the  school  year  1942-1943.  It  performed  a 
variety  of  services:  1)  selling  defense  stamps  at  the  main  council  post,  2)  collecting 
old  books  from  students  for  the  soldiers,  3)  promoting  school  spirit,  and  4)  sponsor- 
ing current  events  quizzes  on  important  war  figures  and  localities. 

The  athletic  department  during  this  year  was  a  very  strong  one,  due  to  the 
emphasis  on  physical  fitness  in  preparation  for  the  war.  The  same  line-up  of  intra- 
mural and  interscholastic  sports  of  the  previous  years  continued,  with  the  excep- 
tion that  there  was  no  interscholastic  basketball  team  due  to  the  gas  shortages  and 
subsequent  rationing.  The  girls  had  much  to  do  in  the  wav  of  swimming,  basketball, 
tumbling  and  even  football.  The  newly  formed  Guppie  Club,  a  water  ballet  group, 
put  on  a  show  in  the  winter  and  the  Equestrian  dub,  a  water  club  that  year, 
attracted  18  members.  Two  other  new  clubs  that  appeared  that  year  were  the  Quill 
and  Scroll  (a  writers'  club)  and  the  Latin  Club. 

The  rationing  of  food  was  often  on  the  minds  of  the  students  and  classes  in 
nutrition  were  begun  to  instruct  the  students  in  the  correct  and  economical  prepara- 
tion of  foods.  Nineteen  iunior  and  senior  girls  took  a  30  hour  course  in  home  nurs- 
ing in  anticipation  of  future  service  in  that  field.  This  course  was  different  from  the 
nine  week  First  Aid  course  which  met  one  day  a  week  for  the  entire  student  body. 

Other  courses  pertaining  to  the  war  were  a  new  typing  course  (utilizing  more 
typewriters  and  an  advanced  teaching  procedure),  a  new  phvsical  fitness  course  for 
the  boys  planning  on  entering  the  Army  or  Navv,  a  physics  class  taught  in  a  manner 
paralleling  the  Army's  course,  and  a  new  pre-flight  course  that  instructed  boys  and 
girls  alike  in  the  basics  of  aerial  navigation. 

There  were  basic,  regular  and  honors  divisions  for  most  of  the  various  subjects, 
which  were  denoted  by  a  number  after  the  course  listing.  The  grades  were  the  same 
as  now  (alphabetical)  excent  that  pluses  and  minuses  were  used.  However,  "E's" 
denoted  a  flunking  grade;  "F's"  were  non-existent.  Exams  were  given  at  the  end  of 
each  semester,  on  three  separate  days.  Each  subiect  and  each  period  had  a  different 
room  —  there  were  no  mass  exams  with  several  classes  together.  Students  who  did 
not  have  an  exam  were  expected  to  report  to  the  library  and  stay  there  until  the  end 
of  the  day.  Students  were  not  allowed  to  use  their  lockers  during  this  time. 

The  school  year  1943-1944  was  singular  in  respect  to  previous  years  in  that 
the  boys  no  longer  went  to  school  primarily  to  learn  and  prepare  for  college;  rather, 
high  school  was  rust  a  wav  to  pass  the  time  before  they  could  enlist  in  the  Armed 
Forces  and  go  off  to  war.  The  curriculum  changed  very  little  from  the  year  before. 
The  whole  school  was  caught  up  with  the  fever  of  patriotism,  and  all  social  activi- 

34 


ties  revolved  around  this  spirit.  The  students,  unsure  of  their  futures,  wanted  to  have 
a  good  time  in  high  school.  Consequently,  school  spirit  and  participation  in  the 
various  high  school  activities  ran  extremely  strong  through  this  year.  Coach  Lin- 
denmeyer  reportedly  "forced"  each  student  to  go  out  for  at  least  one  extra-curricu- 
lar activity. 

In  1942,  the  LFHS  Victory  Corps  was  born  out  of  the  Victory  (or  War  Stamp) 
Committee.  It  joined  the  nation-wide  effort  to  contribute  money  for  20,000  jeeps 
and  in  just  five  weeks  had  raised  $1,300,  enough  for  the  first  of  its  "fleet."  By  the 
end  of  the  year,  LFHS  students  had  contributed  $7,000  through  the  sale  of  war 
bonds,  which  went  to  financing  one  jeep,  one  'quack'  (amphibious  jeep),  one  'Grass- 
hopper' (an  aerial  jeep),  and  a  Piper  Cub,  with  $700  left  to  begin  paying  for  a  tor- 
pedo. Each  piece  of  equipment  had  a  plaque  saying,  "Contributed  by  the  faculty 
and  students  of  Lake  Forest  High  School." 

The  '313'  Club,  an  auxiliary  to  the  Victory  Crops,  was  introduced  along  with 
the  first  jeep  drive,  by  Stanley  Nelson  who  was  the  acting  principal  for  Raymond 
Moore.  (Dr.  Moore  had  been  called  to  serve  in  the  Armed  Forces.)  Membership 
was  granted  to  anyone  buying  at  least  $3.13  worth  of  stamps  —  as  a  reminder  of 
the  313  former  students  and  faculty  to  date  who  were  members  of  the  armed 
services.  "When  you  have  joined  the  '313'  Club,  don't  stop  buying  war  stamps;  but 
keep  on  buying  as  many  as  you  can.  Do  without  that  extra  candy  bar  or  movie  and 
buy  a  stamp  instead,"  Nelson  told  an  assembly. 

The  Victory  Corps  sponsored  speakers  and  demonstrations  during  the  year  on 
the  war.  A  chapter  of  the  Junior  Red  Cross  was  formed  at  LFHS  to  help  contribute 
to  the  war  effort.  Membership  entailed  making  a  contribution  —  of  any  amount. 
During  the  year,  the  group  sold  Christmas  cards,  and  collected  750  books  to  send 
to  servicemen  all  over  the  world. 

LFHS  students  seemed  very  much  together  in  all  these  projects.  They  were 
working  for  a  common  cause,  and  one  they  all  believed  in.  It  was  driven  home,  in 
the  sacrifices  civilians  had  to  make  and  in  the  support  everyone  had  for  those  who 
were  directly  involved.  Three  Lake  Forest  girls  danced  for  wounded  sailors  at  Great 
Lakes,  and  toured  with  North  Shore  U.S.O.  groups.  Newspaper  gossip  columns  told 
of  all  the  parties  people  had  for  the  servicemen  home  on  leave.  There  seemed  to  be  a 
general  pride  and  feeling  of  accomplishment  and  purpose  for  everyone. 

The  war  was  a  constant  issue  at  Lake  Forest  High  School  during  the  year 
1943-44;  even  the  boy's  intramural  teams  were  named  Army,  Navy,  Marines, 
Artillery,  Coast  Guard  and  Tanks.  Therefore,  it  came  as  quite  a  surprise  to  the 
graduating  seniors  of  1944  when  the  whole  thing  ended  before  they  really  had  a 
chance  to  become  involved  as  adults. 

1944-1945  saw  no  radical  changes  in  curriculum,  except  that  the  emphasis  on 
military  matter,  added  to  several  courses  as  a  result  of  the  war,  was  reduced.  Gen- 
erally though,  the  curriculum  stayed  much  the  same  as  it  had  been:  to  prepare  the 
students  for  acceptance  into  college  —  preferably  in  the  East.  The  courses  were  still 
denoted  by  the  numbers  one  through  eight,  designating  each  semester  of  the  four 
years.  The  school  day  began  at  8:40  a.m.  and  remained  divided  into  56  minute 
periods,  with  30  minutes  for  lunch  and  a  30  minute  session  period  twice  a  week. 

Physical  education  classes  were  held  three  times  weekly  and  the  boys'  activi- 
ties now  included  instruction  in  indoor  baseball,  calesthenics,  and  anatomy.  Girls' 
physical  education  substituted  archery,  tennis,  and  folkdancing  for  the  more  mascu- 
line sports. 

Added  to  the  list  of  clubs  that  year  were  the  new  Stamp  Collecting  Club  and 
the  Camera  Club,  which  aided  student  photographers  with  instruction  in  picture- 

35 


taking  and  film  developing.  Besides  this,  however,  little  changed  in  the  traditional 
line  of  co-curricular  activities  and  options. 

In  the  following  year,  1945-1946,  the  Student  Council  revise  its  set  of  school 
rules  that  all  students  were  expected  to  follow:  "1)  running  in  the  halls,  lunchroom, 
or  on  the  stairs  is  prohibited  at  all  times,  2)  eating  shall  be  confined  to  the  cafe- 
teria, 3)  throwing  candy,  paper,  etc.  in  the  halls  is  prohibited,  4)  smoking  on  the 
school  grounds  is  prohibited  by  State  Law  and  must  be  refrained  from,  5)  cutting 
into  the  lunch  line  is  unfair  to  others  (except  when  the  faculty  does  it),  6)  for  the 
sake  of  the  preservation  of  the  beauty  of  the  school,  cutting  across  the  front  lawn 
is  prohibited."  (Student  Handbook,  1945-46). 

This  year,  and  in  each  year  since,  the  National  Arion  Foundation  granted  an 
award  to  the  boy  and  girl  in  the  chorus  or  orchestra  who  ranked  the  highest  schol- 
astically. 

The  curriculum  didn't  change  much  that  year  with  one  exception:  the  Pre- 
flight  Aeronautics  Course,  which  was  set  up  in  response  to  the  war,  was  dropped. 
However,  as  Lake  Forest  High  School  entered  its  12th  year,  substantial  progress 
and  improvement  could  be  noted  in  the  various  areas  of  math  and  English  instruc- 
tion; these  two  remained  the  strongest  departments  though  the  foreign  languages 
were  also  beginning  to  catch  fire  and  draw  students. 

The  biggest  co-curricular  event  of  1946-47  school  year  was  the  marriage  of 
the  principal  Dr.  Raymond  Moore  to  Miss  Mary  Kennedy.  Though  the  marriage 
ended  unhappily  some  years  later,  it  was  the  number  one  topic  of  conversation  with 
all  students  at  the  time. 

The  sports  teams  of  1946-47  ranged  from  the  undefeated  conference  football 
team  of  Coach  Lindenmeyer  and  the  district  tournament  basketball  champs  of 
Coach  Serfling,  to  the  rather  unsuccessful  track  team  and  the  various  intramural 
volleyball,  tennis,  baseball,  hockey  and  swimming  teams. 

During  this  same  year,  a  new  club  was  started:  the  Music  Club.  This  club,  with 
107  members,  was  created  by  Mr.  Maloney  to  further  student  appreciation  of  music, 
both  classical  and  popular. 

As  usual,  the  school  days  were  enlivened  by  many  activities  throughout  the 
year.  The  school  had  an  all-school  spelling  bee,  a  treasure  hunt,  a  Christmas  pro- 
gram, and  the  infamous  Senior  Day,  in  addition  to  the  annual  big  school  dances.  At 
the  end  of  the  year,  the  Honors  Assembly  was  held,  during  which  students  were 
elected  to  the  National  Honor  Society  and  the  Quill  and  Scroll.  Here,  the  Howard 
Book  Award,  the  D.A.R.  Award,  the  Jack  Swensingson  Trophy  for  the  most  deserv- 
ing boy,  the  citizenship  awards  and  the  honorary  Phi  Beta  Kappa  Memberships  were 
presented  as  was  traditional. 

Dr.  Raymond  Moore  was  the  principal  of  the  high  school  throughout  the  years 
of  the  war  and  after.  He  had  the  job,  among  many  others,  of  ringing  the  bells  that 
started  and  ended  the  school  day.  Sometimes  he  would  ring  them  before  3:30,  for- 
mer students  remember,  but  whenever  they  were  rung  several  times  in  succession, 
the  students  knew  that  school  was  over.  Many  of  the  students  would  place  bets  on 
when  they  thought  Dr.  Moore  would  dismiss  school  on  Fridays.  In  the  year  1946- 
48,  the  school  day  was  modified  to  consist  of  six  periods  of  45  minutes  in  length. 
Gym  and  study  hall  were  an  hour  long,  though  the  lunch  period  lasted  30  minutes. 

There  were  no  Honors  or  Advanced  Placement  courses  during  the  forties.  In 
the  area  of  English,  a  course  called  "English  —  Special  Help"  was  offered  for  stu- 
dents who  needed  more  intensive  training  in  the  fundamental  skills  of  English.  The 
regular  English  program  included  grammar  studies,  informal  speaking  and  writing, 
famous  stories  in  prose  and  verse  and  mythology  and  religion  surveys. 

36 


A  change  took  place  in  the  physical  education  classes  —  they  now  were 
held  four  times  a  week  instead  of  just  three.  There  was  no  boys'  baseball  team  that 
year  because  Coach  Lindenmeyer  thought  that  track  would  keep  his  football  players 
in  better  shape.  All  football  players  were  required  to  go  out  for  track.  Consequently 
both  teams  were  very  good.  New  activities  in  girls'  physical  education  included  field 
hockey,  tumbling,  pyramid  building,  tap  dancing,  tennis,  badminton  and  deck 
tennis.  At  the  beginning  of  the  year  just  as  in  the  past,  the  girls  were  given  physi- 
cal examinations.  Those  not  fit  for  strenuous  sports  were  given  corrective  gym  to 
help  improve  their  physical  condition. 

The  curriculum  for  the  year  1947-48  was  different  from  previous  years  in  sev- 
eral respects.  Oriental  history  was  added  to  the  courses  offered  in  the  social  studies 
department  and  more  courses  in  business  administration  were  offered,  such  as  an 
advanced  office  practice  course  and  stenography. 

In  November  of  1947,  Caspersen  and  Swarthout  Motor  Sales  (C&S  Motors) 
presented  a  new  1948  four  door  Ford  sedan  to  the  high  school.  The  car  made  a 
new  course  in  driver's  education  possible.  The  course  was  open  to  all  students  of  15 
years  or  older.  The  car  was  equipped  with  dual  controls,  and  therefore  permitted  the 
first  behind- the- wheel  training  at  the  high  school.  After  successfully  completing  the 
course,  students  could  receive  their  licenses  without  taking  any  state  examination. 

One  of  the  new  clubs  in  1947  was  the  girls'  cheerleading  group.  Six  lucky  girls 
were  selected  by  a  group  of  faculty  members  to  compose  the  cheerleading  squad; 
they  were  picked  on  the  basis  of  their  rhythm,  voice  action  and  appeal. 

The  first  Turnabout  Dance  was  sponsored  by  the  L.F.G.A.A.  in  1948  on  Val- 
entine's Day.  The  theme  was  Sadie  Hawkins  Day  in  Dawg  Patch. 

Something  different  was  also  started  in  the  Boys'  Club  that  year:  at  lunch  time, 
movies  were  shown  for  everyone's  enjoyment. 

The  Student  Council  sponsored  the  faculty-council  party,  the  dances  fol- 
lowing the  games,  and  College  Day  and  Vocational  Day.  The  latter  was  a  day  when 
businessmen  from  the  local  community  were  invited  to  come  to  the  school  to  discuss 
their  varied  occupations  with  the  students  and  their  parents. 

1947-48  was  the  last  year  that  the  high  school  was  in  the  Northeast  Confer- 
ence. In  1949,  it  entered  the  North  Suburban  League  with  Woodstock,  Libertyville, 
Warren,  Crystal  Lake,  Zion-Benton  and  Grayslake  because  the  schools  in  this 
league  were  closer  together  (thus  cheaper  transportation  was  available)  and  were  all 
of  the  same  relative  size. 

Homecoming  was  celebrated  in  1947  with  a  parade  on  Friday  and  a  Pep  Rally 
in  Market  Square  the  night  before.  There,  the  Snake  Dance  began.  The  kids  got  in  a 
long  line  and  held  hands,  then  ran  through  the  town  making  lots  of  noise  and  play- 
ing crack  the  whip.  The  snake  wound  its  way  over  to  West  Park  for  the  traditional 
bonfire  built  there  by  the  freshman  boys,  after  which  it  was  customary  for  the  upper 
classmen  to  blindfold  the  freshmen  and  take  them  for  a  ride  in  a  car.  The  freshmen 
were  driven  around  and  around  and  then  released  to  find  their  way  home.  This 
practice  did  not  continue  in  future  years  however  because  of  community  complaints. 
Students  usually  ended  up  hitch-hiking  home,  which  was  considered  very  dangerous. 

Friday  was  an  exciting  day  and  began  with  the  big  parade,  which  started  in 
town  and  made  its  way  back  to  the  high  school  in  time  for  the  game.  The  Scouts 
were  victorious  in  1947,  defeating  Crystal  Lake  21-0. 

The  Homecoming  Dance  was  held  Friday  Night  at  9:00  p.m.  The  only  money 
that  was  allowed  to  be  spent  on  a  dance  back  then  (for  decorations,  food  and  the 
band)  was  that  which  was  earned  by  selling  tickets  for  the  dance.  The  tickets  for 
this  Homecoming  Dance  sold  for  $1.20  per  couple. 

37 


The  football  season  was  a  stupendous  one  that  year.  Of  the  eight  teams  that 
Lake  Forest  played,  only  one  was  able  to  score  against  them  (but  lost  anyway). 
After  winning  all  eight  games,  the  Scouts  became  the  Northeast  Conference  Cham- 
pions, and  went  on  to  play  in  the  finals  of  the  district  in  Waukegan;  unfortunately 
they  finally  met  their  match  there  and  were  defeated. 

The  Lake  Forest  High 
School  golf  team  made  its 
debut  in  April  of  1948.  The 
squad  consisted  of  one  play- 
er: Chuck  Van  Etten.  When 
it  was  discovered  that  a  high 
school  coach  must  accom- 
pany a  school  entry,  Mr. 
Conrad  Swan  was  chosen  to 
be  coach;  but,  Mr.  Swan 
admits,  that  after  compar- 
ing pupil  Van  Etten's  best 
scorecard  and  master 
Swan's  best  card,  it  was  dif- 
ficult to  distinguish  who 
was  the  coach  and  who  was 
the  student! 

The  seniors  of  1947 
wrote  this  to  the  school  in 
their  Senior  Supplement: 
"You  have  offered  us  a  bal- 
anced curriculum,  well-suited  to  the  needs  of  all  students.  .  .  .  But  more  than  this, 
we  have  known  your  plays,  your  athletics,  your  musical  productions,  your  clubs, 
your  publications.  .  .  .  We  share  a  well-rounded  education  —  an  education  that  has 
made  us  aware  of  our  abilities  and  has  shown  us  how  to  use  them."  They  speak  for 
all  graduating  classes  of  LFHS  in  the  forties  and  ever  since.  By  looking  at  the  years 
of  1941-48,  one  can  understand  a  little  more  clearly  just  how  Lake  Forest  High 
School  has  evolved  into  the  school  that  we  know  today.  It  underwent  many  changes, 
both  large  and  small,  but  throughout  the  years  of  the  war  and  uncertainty,  the  school 
still  remained  the  focal  point  of  the  students'  lives,  as  well  as  that  of  the  community. 
School  spirit  was  an  unchallenged  emotion  and  remained  with  its  graduates  long 
after  they  were  gone  from  its  halls. 


The  1949  Forest  Scouts  show  their  skills. 


The  Ultraviolet  Light  Debacle 


The  lighting  within  a  school  building  may  seem  to  be  an  unimportant,  dull 
subject.  However  during  a  period  between  the  forties  and  the  sixties,  an  additional 
system  of  lights  was  employed  in  the  classrooms  of  Lake  Forest  High  School  which 
was  very  interesting.  These  were  ultra-violet  lights,  installed  in  the  late  1940's 


38 


They  were  first  put  up  in  the  shower  areas  of  the  locker  rooms  to  prevent  the 
growth  of  mold  and  odor  causing  bacteria;  they  did  this  job  well.  Not  long  afterward 
they  were  installed  in  all  of  the  classrooms  of  the  building  supposedly  to  kill  various 
types  of  germs,  particularly  cold  and  flu  germs.  There  had  been  many  recurring 
absences  in  previous  years  due  to  colds  and  flus  (sometimes  up  to  30%  of  the  small 
student  body  at  one  time)  and  these  germ  killing  lights  were  supposed  to  take  care 
of  this  problem. 

Although  this  is  a  factual  account  of  the  purpose  of  the  ultraviolet  lights,  there 
is  a  humorous  anecdote  surrounding  their  installation.  This  story  concerns  two  good 
friends,  Mr.  Gladding,  who  was  a  speech,  drama,  and  chorus  teacher  in  the  high 
school  at  the  time,  and  Dr.  Raymond  Moore,  the  principal  and  the  man  responsible 
for  the  purchasing  of  the  lights.  Mr.  Gladding  seemed  to  have  a  "chronic  cold."  He 
was  frequently  absent  on  Mondays  and  Fridays  for  personal  reasons.  Thus,  Dr. 
Moore  purchased  the  lights  as  a  favor — or  perhaps  not — to  assure  Mr.  Gladding's 
good  health  and  presence  in  school  (from  an  interview  with  Mr.  Short,  May,  1972.) 

The  ultraviolet  lighting  system  was  very  extensive.  There  were  either  one,  two, 
three  or  four  lights  for  each  classroom,  depending  upon  its  size.  These  lights,  which 
required  complex  rewiring,  were  shaped  like  troughs,  approximately  one  yard  long, 
containing  two  long  thin  light  bulbs  apiece.  They  were  located  on  the  walls,  approxi- 
mately 10  feet  off  floor  level,  near  corners,  or  doors.  They  were  used  everywhere: 
classrooms,  offices,  and  washrooms. 

These  lights  became  a  very  regular  part  of  the  building.  Everytime  a  teacher 
entered  a  room  and  turned  on  the  white  lights,  he  would  also  turn  on  the  ultraviolet 
lights;  thus  they  were  always  on  when  class  was  in  session.  Teachers,  including  the 
chemistry  and  other  science  teachers,  accepted  the  lights  readily.  They  knew,  of 
course,  that  the  heat  and  radiation  of  the  lights  could  be  harmful  if  one  got  too  close 
to  them;  however,  they  felt  no  apprehensions  about  this  because  of  the  distance  be- 
tween the  lights  and  the  students.  Thus  the  ultraviolet  lights  became  very  routine. 

The  school  continued  to  use  these  lights,  in  good  faith  that  they  were  helping 
to  fight  the  common  cold  (and  even  installed  more  lights  in  1958-59,  after  the  addi- 
tion to  the  building  was  constructed)  until  a  member  of  the  community,  a  Mr.  John 
Ott,  intervened.  This  Mr.  Ott,  a  resident  of  Lake  Bluff,  had  a  son  who  normally  went 
to  a  private  school,  but  who  attended  the  summer  session  of  the  high  school.  Some- 
how these  lights  were  brought  to  this  man's  attention  and  he  investigated  them.  Mr. 
Ott  was  an  intelligent  man  and  was  held  in  high  esteem  throughout  the  community 
for  his  work  in  time  lapse  photography.  When  he  began  investigating  ultraviolet 
lighting  systems  similar  to  the  high  school's,  he  found  that  they  were  more  harmful 
than  helpful.  They  were  dangerous  for  their  radioactive,  high  powered  emissions 
which  were  not  only  directly  harmful  to  the  students  themselves  but  also  killed  many 
of  the  necessary  and  beneficial  bacterias  the  air  contained. 

Mr.  Ott  brought  all  this  to  the  attention  of  the  Board  of  Education  in  numerous 
letters  and  discussions  at  their  meetings.  Mr.  Ott's  arguments  were  valid  and  had  to 
be  listened  to.  Thus  during  the  1962-63  school  year,  the  use  of  the  ultraviolet  lights 
was  discontinued. 

The  corresponding  light  switches  were  covered  with  tape  and  orders  were  given 
that  they  were  not  to  be  used.  The  countless  ultraviolet  lights  around  the  school 
were  left  idle.  The  lights  remained  in  this  condition  through  1963-64,  and  were 
finally  taken  down  during  the  summer  of  1964.  Today  one  can  still  see  evidence  of 
the  ultraviolet  lights:  the  plate  marks  on  the  walls  of  classrooms,  and  the  useless,  dis- 
connected light  switches  next  to  the  regular  light  switches. 

39 


One  forgotten  light  was  just  taken  down  a  year  ago  when  it  was  found  by 
painters  repainting  an  office  in  the  girls'  locker  room.  With  the  removal  of  that  last 
ultraviolet  light,  this  curious  story  ends.  These  lights  had  cost  the  school  a  great 
deal  of  money  and  required  a  good  deal  of  work  and  time  in  installation.  Their 
purpose,  whether  for  health  or  other  reasons  is  rather  questionable,  as  it  is  uncertain 
that  ultraviolet  lights  kill  cold  and  flu  germs,  although  they  may  control  mold 
growth.  But  in  any  case,  the  company  which  made  the  sale  and  supplied  them  to  the 
high  school  must  have  laughed  all  the  way  to  the  bank. 


The  Great  Divorce 
(The  Township  Split) 

The  birth  of  district  115  occurred  in  1949  when  the  citizens  of  Lake  Forest 
and  Lake  Bluff  successfully  petitioned  to  separate  from  Deerfield-Shields  Township 
District  113.  This  was  their  third  attempt.  The  separation  was  brought  about  by  a 
desire  of  Lake  Forest  and  Lake  Bluff  citizens  to  have  control  over  their  own  school. 

Lake  Forest  High  School  students  first  attended  Highland  Park  High  School 
after  its  construction  in  1900.  In  1906  Highland  Park  advised  Lake  Forest  of  a 
tuition  increase  and  the  city  fathers  quickly  considered  consolidation.  By  1907, 
Deerfield,  West  Deerfield  and  the  southern  part  of  Shields  Township  united  to  form 
Deerfield-Shields  Township  District  113.  Lake  Forest  students  continued  on  at 
Highland  Park  until  1930.  In  that  year  a  statute  providing  for  separation  of  school 
districts  gave  Lake  Forest  a  chance  to  detach  from  District  113.  A  petition  of  2,000 
signatures  was  filed  on  April  1,  1930  with  T.  A.  Simpson,  Lake  County  Superin- 
tendent of  Schools.  On  April  19,  1930,  Simpson  ordered  the  detachment  of  the  Lake 
Forest  area  from  District  113.  Shortly  before  this  injunction  went  into  effect,  nine 
sections  in  the  northern  part  of  Shields  township  joined  Lake  Forest  in  a  referendum 
to  consider  whether  these  areas  should  be  included  in  the  new  district.  The  refer- 
endum was  defeated  through  subsequent  court  decisions;  the  short-lived  independ- 
ence of  the  Lake  Forest  district  came  to  an  end.  On  October  6,  1930,  Circuit  Judge 
E.  D.  Shurtleff  found  the  statute  providing  for  separation  unconstitutional.  There- 
fore District  127  (the  proposed  Lake  Forest  district)  had  no  legal  basis  for  exist- 
ence. An  appeal  was  taken  to  the  Supreme  Court,  but  to  no  avail.  Lake  Forest  again 
became  part  of  district  113. 

In  1933  another  bid  was  made  to  detach  from  District  113.  At  this  time  High- 
land Park  High  School  was  very  congested.  It  became  necessary  to  enlarge  the 
school  buildings.  However,  Lake  Forest  wanted  its  own  school,  In  an  attempt  to 
keep  the  district  united,  a  meeting  was  held  before  the  Educational  Committee  of 
the  state  legislature  at  which  the  Lake  Foresters  present  promised  to  forsake  any 
further  notions  to  create  a  new  district  providing  a  four  year  high  school  was  built 
in  their  community.  Lake  Forest  financed  its  high  school  on  a  WPA  grant  of 
$1,343,140. 

40 


Work  began  on  Lake  Forest  High  School  and  it  was  first  occupied  in  1935. 
Earlier,  on  November  15,  1934,  another  referendum  was  held  in  which  the  nine 
sections  of  Shields  Township,  previously  denied  union  with  district  127,  were  ac- 
cepted into  district  113.  That  brought  district  1 13  to  the  area  and  it  held  until  1949. 
Lake  Forest  High  School  served  the  northern  part  of  the  district  and  Highland  Park 
High  School  served  the  southern  portion.  However,  in  1949,  Lake  Forest  made  yet 
another  effort  at  detachment,  an  attempt  which  would  not  be  appeased  until  district 
113  was  split  in  half. 

It  was  on  January  24,  1949,  that  Mayor  John  Giles  of  Lake  Forest  issued  a 
public  statement  that  steps  had  been  taken  towards  separating  Lake  Forest  High 
School  from  the  Deerfield-Shields  Township  District.  This  marked  the  beginning  of 
a  series  of  steps  toward  the  dissolution  which  finally  ended  a  long  drawn-out 
court  case.  Of  the  several  reasons  contributing  to  the  decision  to  split,  the  major 
factor  was  the  concern  of  Lake  Foresters  about  their  taxes.  The  facts  indicate  that 
they  had  a  legitimate  gripe.  Of  the  total  number  of  pupils  attending  the  two  high 
schools  in  Deerfield-Shields  Township,  only  25%  actually  attended  the  Lake  Forest 
Branch.  However,  the  Lake  Forest  area  contributed  about  45%  of  the  taxes  used 
to  maintain  both  hieh  schools!  In  the  ten  years  preceding  the  split,  Lake  Forest  tax- 
payers had  paid  $1,000,000  more  in  taxes  then  had  been  used  to  maintain  Lake 
Forest  High  School.  Also,  at  this  time  Highland  Park  was  planning  to  make  an 
addition  to  its  school.  The  end  of  the  war  marked  the  beginning  of  a  period  of  rapid 
growth  in  the  district,  and  new  facilities  were  needed  to  compensate  for  this  in- 
crease. These  additions,  to  be  made  at  the  Highland  Park  branch,  would  have  cost 
the  taxoayers  some  $1 ,400.000  —  45%  of  which  would  be  paid  by  Lake  Foresters; 
but  giving  Lake  Forest  students  no  chance  to  benefit  from  the  new  facilities.  Many 
Lake  Foresters  anxiously  prophesized  that  if  Lake  Forest  grew  very  much,  the  high 
school  here  would  become  crowded,  and  the  situation  would  become  similar  to  what 
it  had  been  before  1935.  They  feared  that  some  students  might  be  forced  into  the 
bothersome  and  expensive  inconvenience  of  busing  to  the  available  facilities  at 
Highland  Park. 

The  first  steo  in  seeking  separation  was  the  signing  of  petitions.  Two  separate 
but  identical  petitions  were  circulated  —  one  to  be  sent  to  the  Shields  Board  of 
Trustees,  and  one  to  be  sent  to  the  Deerfield  Board  of  Trustees.  Both  had  to  be 
signed  by  two-thirds  of  the  eligible  voters  in  the  Lake  Forest-Lake  Bluff  area.  The 
consent  of  both  boards  was  needed  for  the  split,  and  if  one  board  denied  the  peti- 
tions, the  county  superintendent  would  decide  the  case. 

The  circulation  of  petitions  was  part  of  an  effort  by  the  entire  community. 
Knight  Cowles  headed  the  movement,  and  he  had  one  hundred  volunteers  to  help 
him  with  this  imme-se  task-  Petitions  were  carried  to  individual  houses,  but  voters 
could  also  sign  them  at  City  Hall  and  several  local  stores.  Adds  were  run  in  the 
Lake  Forester  urging  voters  to  sign  petitions.  This  operation  took  about  one  month, 
and  after  that  time  over  90%  of  the  voters  in  Lake  Forest  and  Lake  Bluff  had 
signed  the  petitions.  The  petitions  were  then  turned  over  to  City  Hall  for  inspection 
of  the  legality  of  the  signatures.  Roy  Whiteside  acted  as  attorney  for  Lake  Forest  in 
this,  as  well  as  many  other  school  matters.  Miss  Cory  and  Miss  Knox  were  sent  by 
Dr.  Moore  to  write  down  all  the  questionable  signatures  on  the  petition.  They 
typed  all  day  on  these.  After  running  a  check,  none  of  the  questioned  names  were 
found  illegal.  After  thorough  inspection,  the  petitions  were  turned  over  to  the  two 
boards.  Without  hesitation,  the  Shields  board  approved  the  split  on  March  25.  This 
was  to  be  expected  because  Shields  Township  consisted  almost  totally  of  Lake 
Forest  residents.  The  Deerfield  Board  (Highland  Park)  took  much  longer  to  an- 
nounce its  decision.  On  June  6,  it  announced  that  it  denied  the  prayer  of  petition. 

41 


Several  reasons  were  given  for  this  decision.  The  first  reason  was  simply  a  question 
of  legality.  Highland  Park  claimed  that  many  who  had  signed  the  petition  were  in- 
eligible, such  as  maids  and  domestics  whose  permanent  addresses  were  not  in  Lake 
Forest.  The  Board  also  said  that  it  was  American  tradition  that  education  in  public 
schools  should  be  free  and  equal  and  paid  by  taxes  based  on  property  value,  regard- 
less of  whether  or  not  the  taxpayer  himself  benefits  from  the  school.  Other  reasons 
given  included  the  idea  that  it  was  the  policy  of  the  State  Legislature  to  decrease 
the  number  of  school  districts,  and  the  opinion  that  a  split  would  cause  educational 
standards  to  deteriorate  in  the  lesser-privileged  portions  of  the  district. 

The  decision  was  then  thrown  into  the  hands  of  the  county  superintendent, 
W.  C.  Petty.  He  held  a  hearing  on  June  27,  1949,  after  which  he  decided  in  favor 
of  Lake  Forest.  The  following  reasons  were  given  for  his  decision. 

1.  The  law  provided  for  creation  of  school  districts  by  petition  and  the 
petition  filed  was  proper  and  legal. 

2.  The  division  of  the  district  would  not  jeopardize  the  welfare  of  the 
old  district  or  the  new  district.  (Here  Mr.  Petty  sighted  the  per  student 
valuation  of  all  neighboring  schools  which  showed  that  although  the 
new  district  would  have  a  higher  per  student  valuation  than  would 
Highland  Park,  Highland  Park's  valuation  would  still  be  considerably 
higher  than  the  average,  and  far  above  the  line  of  educational  sub- 
sistence.) 

3.  The  schools  were  already  existing  as  two  different  schools,  with  dif- 
ferent administrations. 

4.  Both  schools  had  sufficient  enrollment  and  wealth  to  maintain  a  good 
educational  system.  They  also  covered  sufficient  territory. 

5.  A  community  having  its  own  school  has  more  pride  in  itself,  and 
American  tradition  is  based  on  pride  in  one's  community. 

The  boundaries  of  the  new  district  115  were  set  up  by  Petty  as  shown  on  a 
map.  The  new  district  was  instructed  to  hold  elections  for  a  board  of  education 
within  15  days  of  Petty's  decision.  As  of  June  29,  1949,  the  Shields  Township  ter- 
ritory was  detached  from  district  113.  But  it  was  not  until  1952  that  the  Supreme 
Court  decision  was  rendered  upholding  the  decision. 

On  August  3,  Highland  Park  filed  suit  against  the  new  district  115  (Lake 
Forest)  through  State's  Attorney  Harry  Hall.  The  suit,  which  eventually  went  to  the 
Illinois  Supreme  Court,  was  field  to  interpret  the  law  to  determine  the  correct  dis- 
tribution of  funds.  They  also  filed  a  list  of  signatures  from  the  petition,  and  they 
contested  the  legality  of  these  signatures.  April  21,  1950,  was  set  by  Judge  Ralph 
Dady  of  the  Lake  County  Circuit  Court  as  the  date  for  the  trial  of  the  split.  It  later 
went  to  the  Supreme  Court  because,  after  Judge  Dady  ruled  in  favor  of  Lake  Forest 
on  the  split,  Highland  Park  again  appealed. 

In  the  Circuit  Court,  three  main  issues  were  involved.  The  first,  which  was  the 
legality  of  the  signatures  on  the  petitions,  was  brought  before  the  court  on  April  21 
and  28,  1950.  It  was  decided  that  the  petitions  did  have  the  necessary  number  of 
legal  signatures.  The  second  issue  was  one  of  financial  distribution  between  the 
remaining  District  113  and  the  new  district  115.  The  school  code  provided  that, 
after  a  district  split,  an  appraisal  first  must  be  made  by  each  district  after  which  the 
trustees  charge  and  credit  the  respective  districts  with  their  proportionate  share  of 
the  valuations.  After  that,  settlement  must  be  made  so  that  the  new  district  receives 
a  correct  portion  of  the  taxes  it  has  paid  to  the  old  district.  As  a  result  of  this,  High- 
land Park  paid  Lake  Forest  $236,000,  a  payment  which  they  vigorously  contested. 

42 


This  was  paid  to  Lake  Forest  by  March  31,  1950,  because  Lake  Forest  had  brought 
a  court  mandamus  against  Highland  Park  requesting  immediate  payment.  Lake 
Forest  was  found  to  owe  Highland  Park  $274,000,  which  represented  the  amount 
Highland  Park  had  paid  to  build  Lake  Forest  High  School.  This  was  to  come  from 
the  building  fund.  At  that  time  the  building  fund  and  the  educational  fund  were 
separate  budgets.  This  made  it  necessary  for  debts  in  each  budget  to  be  settled  in- 
dividually, and  both  schools  owed  to  the  other.  The  debts  were  settled  in  court  and 
paid  by  1955.  It  is  easy  to  see  why  Highland  Park  fought  so  hard  against  the  split 
when  one  takes  into  consideration  the  fact  that  Lake  Forest  did  represent  close  to 
one  half  of  the  taxes  used  by  the  district.  The  year  after  the  split,  Highland  Park  tax- 
payers paid  almost  $120,000  more  in  taxes  for  high  school  purposes  than  they 
would  have  if  there  had  been  no  split,  and  Highland  Park  was  still  operating  on  a 
deficit  budget. 

The  third,  and  most  obvious  factor  in  the  circuit  court  case  was  the  legality  of 
the  split  itself.  The  court  enforced  Mr.  Petty' s  decision  and  allowed  the  split.  High- 
land Park  appealed  and  the  case  was  ended  in  the  Illinois  Supreme  Court  on  March 
20,  1952.  The  split  itself  was  not  the  specific  issue  in  this  case.  The  issue  decided  in 
this  case,  People  vs.  Wood  et  al.  (Wood  being  the  president  of  the  new  Lake  Forest 
Board  of  Education),  was  the  right  of  Highland  Park  to  appeal  the  decision  of  the 
Circuit  Court.  The  decision  of  the  court  was  that  Highland  Park  did  not  have 
grounds  for  an  appeal,  and  that  the  decision  of  the  Circuit  Court  upholding  the  split 
stood.  This  marked  the  end  of  the  actual  separation  of  the  district,  and  the  first 
point  at  which  the  new  district  115  was  recognized  by  all  concerned  parties. 

The  split  between  the  districts  had  many  effects  on  both  communities.  The 
relationship  between  the  two  communities  was  not  really  drastically  changed.  Al- 
though some  Highland  Parkers  may  still  harbor  "bittter  feelings,"  on  the  whole  the 
split  was  a  surprisingly  amicable  situation.  This  was  because  the  main  reason  for 
the  split  was  a  concern  over  taxes,  and  there  was  no  personal  or  social  quarrel  in- 
volved. The  effects  on  the  individual  schools  and  students  were  minimal  because 
the  schools  were  already  being  run  separately  and  the  split  provided  no  obstacles  to 
their  continued  efficient  operation. 

The  only  problems  created  for  students  were  for  Lake  Forest  vocational  stu- 
dents. Lake  Forest  High  School  had  no  vocational  program,  and  vocational  students 
had  always  gone  to  Highland  Park  where  the  vocational  program  was  extensive. 
After  the  split,  students  who  wished  to  continue  that  program  could  only  do  so  if 
they  were  accepted  as  tuition  students  at  Highland  Park.  The  main  effect  of  the 
split  was  the  independence  of  Lake  Forest  High  School.  A  new  board  was  elected 
which  consisted  of  seven  members,  five  from  Lake  Forest,  one  from  Lake  Bluff,  and 
one  from  Knollwood.  The  new  district  consisted  of  Lake  Forest,  Lake  Bluff,  Knoll- 
wood,  and  Great  Lakes. 

1949  marked  the  beginning  of  not  only  a  new  district  but  also  a  new  era  for 
Lake  Forest  High  School.  The  main  fear  of  most  Lake  Foresters,  that  of  over  popu- 
lation in  the  high  school,  became  a  reality.  In  1972  Lake  Forest  High  School  stands 
as  a  two  campus  school  united  under  one  district  —  the  district  that  Lake  Foresters 
had  envisioned  since  before  the  birth  of  their  high  school. 


43 


Part  III 

The  Chaperones 

(Faculty) 


Of  all  that  has  been  said  of  the  teachers  and  staff  of  1949-58,  one  thing  can 
be  certain;  they  were  at  least  as  interesting  as  the  students.  Although  the  turnover 
of  teachers  was  and  still  is  large,  the  size  of  the  staff  remained  fairly  stable,  averag- 
ing about  28  persons  each  year.  This  created  a  close-knit  faculty  over  which  Dr. 
Moore  ruled  with  an  iron  hand.  Dr.  Moore  set  high  standards  for  the  faculty  result- 
ing in  a  staff  that  held  at  least  one  doctorate  and  approximately  19  master's  degrees. 
Once  a  teacher  had  successfully  completed  two  years  at  LFHS  and  was  to  be  rehired 
for  a  third,  he  was  eligible  for  the  tenure  plan.  However  if  a  new  teacher  did  not 
establish  himself  favorably  in  the  superintendent's  opinion,  he  was  simply  not  re- 
hired for  the  next  year.  Due  to  the  absence  of  departments,  there  were  no  depart- 
ment heads  to  check  up  on  fledgling  teachers,  so  they  had  no  way  of  knowing  how 
they  were  doing. 

Departments  for  each  subject  were  not  needed  in  the  early  fifties  because  often 
one  teacher  was  the  sole  instructor  of  his  subject  (i.e.  Madame  Doerfler  taught  all 
French  classes  and  another  teacher  taught  all  Spanish  classes).  The  English  depart- 
ment had  four  teachers  and  occasionally  held  informal  evening  gatherings  to  discuss 
and  coordinate  their  programs.  Eventually  the  English  department  expanded  so  that 
it  became  increasingly  more  difficult  to  gather  all  the  teachers  involved  on  one  eve- 
ning —  thus,  more  formal  departmental  meetings  began  after  school. 

Before  these  departments  evolved,  teachers  had  no  one  to  coordinate  and  lay 
out  courses,  or  to  set  specific  policies  to  be  followed.  This  allowed  the  teachers 
much  freedom  as  far  as  their  teaching  methods  were  concerned.  One  student  par- 
ticularly enjoyed  Mr.  Francis  Muffin's  relaxed,  informal  format,  and  felt  that  this 
course  had  the  most  to  offer.  Another  felt  she  had  learned  the  most  from  Dr.  Frank 
Townsend,  who  always  came  to  class  well  prepared  and  taught  an  almost  college 
level  course.  Mr.  M.  Callen  apparently  used  brute  force  to  earn  respect,  while  Mr. 
Edgar  Lindenmeyer  always  was  revered  by  the  students  as  a  deeply  dedicated 
teacher.  It  is  obvious  that  the  methods  used  by  teachers  at  Lake  Forest  High  School 
were  varied  and  usually  successful. 

Because  of  the  absence  of  a  guidance  department  and  a  need  for  a  daily  meet- 
ing place,  sessions  were  imposed.  In  addition  to  the  session  duty,  each  teacher  was 
expected  to  sponsor  an  extra  curricular  activity.  Dr.  Moore  was  very  adamant  on 
this  point  and  expected  each  teacher  to  participate  in  an  activity.  It  has  been  said 
that  those  teachers  who  chose  to  be  coaches  found  their  paychecks  to  be  larger  than 
those  who  weren't  coaches. 

Salaries  ran  from  a  low  of  $2,800  (starting  salary)  to  a  high  of  $7,400.  Salaries 
varied,  depending  on  individual  things  such  as  experience,  the  number  of  classes 
one  taught,  and  the  salary  which  Dr.  Moore  and  the  school  board  decided  to  allot. 
In  contrast,  the  system  used  today  to  determine  salaries  is  based  largely  on  the 
number  of  college  degrees  held  by  the  teacher.  Also  a  teacher's  salary  was  penalized 
if  he  didn't  live  in  this  district. 

45 


Some  teachers  felt  this  method  of  deciding  salaries  was  unfair,  and  held  this 
among  other  grievances  against  Dr.  Moore.  Perhaps  the  issue  that  irritated  them 
the  most  was  Dr.  Moore's  policy  to  always  back  the  students  in  student-teacher 
conflicts. 

The  effects  of  the  Korean  War  were  felt  at  LFHS  in  1951  when  Mr.  Leo  Gil- 
christ, a  math  and  general  science  teacher,  was  called  into  duty  by  the  marines.  He 
left  February  15,  1951.  The  following  month  Mr.  Robert  Haebich,  an  English 
teacher,  and  Miss  Grosshans,  the  librarian,  were  married.  Their  engagement  sparked 
student  interest  and  prompted  the  writing  of  the  following  poem,  which  appeared  in 
the  Oct.  25,  1950,  Forest  Scout: 

"Young  Mr.  Haebich  came  in  from  the  West, 

With  Shakespeare  and  Caesar  and  the  rest, 

Intent  on  his  teaching  of  English  and  "Scout" 

With  many  a  thought  of  young  ladies  about. 

Then  one  fateful  day  at  the  end  of  class, 

Our  young  Mr.  Haebich  chanced  on  a  pert  lass. 

Her  name  was  Miss  Grosshans,  her  face  it  was  fair, 

But  her  overdue  books  were  too  heavy  to  bear. 

The  students  of  Lake  Forest  began  to  get  wary 

Of  the  long  tetes-a-tetes  in  the  library. 

This  started  the  whispers,  the  rumors  and  tension, 

But  our  two  young  teachers  paid  no  attention. 

Then  came  the  day  —  the  glorious  day 

To  the  altar  they're  headed  —  they're  on  their  way! 

'So  daring  in  love,  so  dauntless  in  war, 

Have  ye  e'er  heard  of  a  gallant  like  young  Lochinvar?' 

This  marriage  led  to  their  resignation. 

Some  feel  that  student- teacher  relationships  were  better  in  the  fifties  than 
today.  However,  Dr.  Townsend  feels  that  now  there  are  closer  and  more  casual 
relationships  then  ever  before. 

Teacher-teacher  relationships  have  also  showed  signs  of  change.  The  old  in- 
formal, evening  meetings,  the  30  member  faculty  days,  no  longer  exist.  As  one 
present  teacher  said  "Its  not  so  embarrassing  anymore  not  to  recognize  a  student's 
name  or  face  but  to  meet  a  teacher  in  the  hall  and  not  even  know  him  or  her,  .  .  ." 


Inside  Joe  Student  and 

His  White  Sweatsocks 

(Students) 

The  student  who  attended  Lake  Forest  High  School  in  the  era  1949-1958  had 
changed  and  evolved  in  subtle  ways.  This  is  not  to  say  that  the  basic  mind  and  soul 
were  different,  but  that  certain  conditions  in  society  had  changed  the  school  and 
thus,  to  a  certain  extent  created  a  different  type  of  student. 

46 


The  great  national  psychological  feeling  of  relief  and  jubilance  following  the 
end  of  World  War  II  brought  a  new  view  of  life  for  everyone  and  a  chance  for 
"smoother  sailing;"  there  was  time  for  a  student  to  be  a  little  younger  and  have  a 
little  more  fun.  The  word  gay  is  a  good  description  of  a  typical  student  then. 

The  enrollment  at  the  high  school,  which  had  been  gradually  expanding,  under- 
went a  boom  in  the  later  fifties.  Partly  as  a  result  of  the  war,  and  partly  as  a  result 
of  the  exodus  to  the  suburbs,  the  socio-economic  status  of  the  students  in  Lake 
Forest  changed.  Most  students  were  no  longer  children  of  servants  or  merchants, 
but  of  upper  middle  class  families.  Also,  because  of  the  great  rush  for  the  suburbs 
and  the  masses  of  servicemen  returning  home  after  the  war,  a  good  deal  of  the 
students  were  transfers.  Lake  Forest  High  accepted  students  from  Lake  Forest, 
Lake  Bluff,  Knollwood  and  Great  Lakes  Naval  Base. 

To  say  that  Lake  Forest  High  School  was  a  very  important  part  of  the  stu- 
dents' lives  is  not  quite  sufficient.  It  was  his  life.  Both  work  and  play  were  centered 
around  the  school.  Clubs  were  the  heartbeats  of  the  institution,  as  most  students 
were  involved  in  some  way.  The  most  popular  clubs  at  this  time  were  Intramural 
Sports,  GAA,  Drama  Club  and  Forest  Scout,  which  estimated  student  participation 
in  the  various  clubs  to  be  at  least  40%. 

At  school,  students  listened  to  teachers  respectfully  and  took  their  word  to  be 
the  last  word.  However,  this  did  not  discourage  close  relationships  between  the  two 
groups;  for  the  most  part  teachers  were  able  to  communicate  with  students  and 
were  an  excellent  scource  for  advice.  Being  counselors  also,  teacher  offered  personal 
guidance  as  well  as  academic  help. 

Students  of  the  1950's  were  kept  under  close  watch.  They  were  always  to  be 
exactly  where  they  were  assigned  to  be,  and  no  one  was  allowed  to  roam  the  halls 
without  a  pass.  For  those  who  wished  to  violate  these  rules,  detentions  were  given 
quite  liberally. 

Detention  halls  were  very  strict:  students  were  required  to  study  in  absolute 
silence.  However,  once  in  a  while  a  penny  would  roll  up  the  aisle  and  hit  the 
baseboard  next  to  the  teacher's  desk.  The  guilty  student,  if  caught,  would  be  severe- 
ly reprimanded.  All  would  be  quiet  for  a  week  or  so  until  another  penny  would  be 
heard  rolling  up  the  aisle. 

In  some  ways,  LFHS  students  were  considered  dependable  and  trustworthy. 
One  Halloween  in  the  early  1950's,  the  Lake  Forest  Police  Department  deputized 
184  LFHS  boys  and  stationed  them  at  various  points  to  patrol  for  holiday 
pranksters. 

There  were  exceptions,  though.  One  day  in  1949,  two  students  strung  a  lAtf 
cable  across  the  street  at  the  northeast  corner  of  the  school  parking  lot,  and  tied  it 
to  two  fence  posts  cemented  into  the  ground.  Two  other  boys  on  a  motorbike  were 
returning  to  school  from  lunch.  As  they  were  late,  they  were  going  at  top  speed 
and  didn't  see  the  thin  cable  in  time  to  turn.  The  student  driving  the  bike  was  hit 
by  the  cable,  which  slit  his  mouth  back  to  his  ears  and  tore  off  some  gum  tissue. 
The  student  riding  behind  him  was  thrown  forward,  flipped  over  the  motorbike  and 
landed  on  the  gravel  road.  Both  were  taken  to  the  hospital,  and  fortunately  the 
cable  wasn't  securely  fastened  to  the  posts  —  it  snapped  on  both  ends  upon  impact. 

Later,  Dr.  Moore  lined  up  all  of  the  boys  in  the  school  and  "was  able  to  pick 
out"  the  two  boys  responsible  for  the  prank.  They  were  expelled. 

In  general,  LFHS  students  during  this  period  were  not  pressured  by  an  out- 
side world  of  conflict  and  were  able  to  enjoy  themselves  consciously  and  uncon- 
sciously. 

47 


Their  social  world  consisted  of  dances  and  many,  many  parties.  The  school 
provided  and  sponsored  an  abundance  of  dances  throughout  the  year  that  were  very 
popular.  Cellar,  a  school-connected  organization,  met  every  Friday  night  and  stu- 
dents jived  to  the  tunes  from  the  jukebox,  one  of  the  treasures  of  the  school.  In- 
dividual parties  were  given  at  the  rate  of  two  or  three  "all-come"  parties  a  weekend 
and  numerous  other  private  ones,  "Slumber  parties"  swept  the  school  in  epidemic 
proportions  in  the  middle  fifties,  monopolizing  the  girls  at  least  one  night  a  week- 
end. As  the  months  of  school  dragged  on  the  students  used  more  and  more  original 
ideas  for  parties,  such  as  the  "come-as-you-are"  party  where  everyone  came  just  as 
they  were  dressed  when  they  received  the  invitation  to  the  party. 

Junior  Prom  was  the 
most  exciting  dance  of  the 
year.  As  at  all  other  impor- 
tant dances,  the  decorations 
committee  racked  their 
brains  for  months  before- 
hand to  come  up  with  origi- 
nal ideas.  The  1957  Prom 
Decorations  Committee 
seemed  to  have  a  group  of 
extremely  ambitious  and 
perhaps  unscrupulous  mem- 
bers. The  theme  being 
"Southern  Plantation,"  they 
could  consider  of  nothing 
less  that  having  a  real  mag- 
nolia tree  in  full  bloom.  It 
just  so  happened  that  in  the 
middle  of  the  desserted  Mc- 
Cormick  Estate  stood  a 
beautiful  blossoming  mag- 
nolia tree  that  belonged  to  a  Lake  Forest  society  matron,  whose  dream  for  the  past 
few  years  had  been  to  build  a  house  around  this  lovely  tree.  By  the  light  of  the 
moon,  three  brave  boys  somehow  found  their  way  to  the  tree  and  in  turn  the  tree 
found  its  way  to  the  gym  for  the  dance. 

There  was  never  such  a  beautiful  prom  as  this  one,  with  an  18  foot  high,  18 
inch  diameter  magnolia  tree  in  the  center  of  the  dance  floor.  Unfortunately,  the 
indigant  lady  who  owned  the  tree  complained  loudly  to  Conrad  Swan,  the  junior 
class  advisor,  and  demanded  her  estimated  value  of  the  tree,  $1,000.  Mr.  Swan 
then  tried  to  collect  this  amount  by  demanding  $3.00  of  each  junior,  but  some  re- 
fused to  contribute  and  others  somehow  always  seemed  to  forget  to  bring  the  money. 
With  humble  apologies,  Mr.  Swan  approach  the  woman  with  only  $300,  which 
she  accepted  graciously.  Imagine  the  astonishment  of  the  junior  class  when  they 
received  a  notice  at  graduation  from  Lake  Forest  Hospital  thanking  them  sincerely 
for  their  $300  donation. 

The  party  spirit  was  not  only  reserved  for  after  school  hours.  Jokes,  pranks 
and  gags  were  a  great  part  of  the  school  life.  The  students'  natural  liveliness  and 
gaiety,  which  was  more  prevalent  than  before,  provided  great  opportunity  for  fun 
and  comedy. 

Styles  in  fashion  in  the  fifties  still  included  bobby  socks  and  strings  of  pearls 
for  girls.  Everyone  wore  the  same  thing  —  there  was  really  no  question  of  dressing 
differently.  Boys  donned  white  or  plaid  shirts,  bulky  sweaters,  bulky  cordoroy  pants, 

48 


"Students  jived  to  the  tunes  of  the  juke 
box/' 


chinos  and  loafers.  Their  hair,  being  close-cropped,  was  combed  back  from  the  front 
into  a  sort  of  pomp.  Girls  flaunted  their  white  socks,  skirts  to  the  knees  and  bobbed 
hair.  For  special  occasions,  they  wore  cashmere  sweaters,  the  color  gray  being 
especially  "keen"  (nice  looking).  Stockings  were  worn  only  for  the  best  nights. 

In  this  era,  hangin'  around  the  malt  shop  or  smoking  out  at  the  "weed  patch" 
(an  area  behind  the  school  that  was  technically  off  school  grounds)  occupied  spare 
time.  Wearing  your  "steady's"  sweater  with  blue  and  gold  letters  was  a  dream  real- 
ized by  few  girls,  but  envied  by  all.  Students  gave  chocolates  on  Valentine's  Day  and 
smooched  on  Parent's  Night. 

Many  problems  arose 
for  students  during  this  era 
that  were  typical  of  prob- 
lems of  students  in  all  eras. 
One  was  boredom.  A  favo- 
rite past-time  in  Miss  Doer- 
fler's  class  was  to  catch 
bees  that  flew  in  the  win- 
dow. Miss  Doerfler  was  not 
a  boring  teacher  —  this  was 
common  in  all  classes,  but 
hers  had  the  record  for 
catching  unusually  large 
bees. 

One  problem  these  stu- 
dents did  not  seem  to  have 
was  apathy.  Lake  Forest 
High  School  was  their 
school  and  they  kept  it  clean 
in  reputation  and  condition. 
Competition  between  class- 
es existed,  however. 

Joe    and   Mary    Student    having  The  Forest  Scout  ex- 

"Fun  in  the  Fifties/'  plained  it  like  this  in  1953: 

Freshmen  — 

"We  are  excited,  happy  and  gay; 

We  romp  and  frolic  every  day. 

We  love  high  school  — 

We're  faithful  and  true 

We  are  sophisticates  —  freshmen  too  " 

Sophomores  — 

"What  wonderful  students  are  we  all 

We  now  have  grown  big  and  tall. 

The  frosh  should  get  on  their  knees  and  bow, 

After  all  ,we're  sophomores  now." 

Juniors  — 

"Big  wheels  are  we  in  our  junior  year. 
We  have  that  confident,  grown  up  sneer. 
We  humor  teachers  day  after  day. 
About  school  we're  completely  blase'." 

49 


Seniors  — 

"The  lordly  seniors  come  through  the  door, 

'Oh  my,'  they  yawn,  'school  is  such  a  bore!' 

We  simply  must  attend  the  next  class 

Without  us,  the  school' d  collapse." 
^  But  senior  girls  were  still  "big  sisters"  to  the  freshman,  giving  them  advice  and 
aid  in  getting  along  in  high  school.  The  four  levels  did  mix  and  actually  got  along 
quite  well. 

Because  the  student  population  was  small,  there  were  also  certain  students  who 
seemed  to  stand  out  in  everything.  For  instance,  the  same  girl  was  usually  Prom 
Queen,  Homecoming  Queen,  a  G.A.A.  board  member,  a  cheerleader  and  worked  on 
a  number  of  club  staffs.  Nor  was  it  unusual  for  a  boy  to  be  Student  Council  presi- 
dent, active  in  sports  and  a  class  officer.  Outstanding  students  were  awarded  at  the 
end  of  the  year  at  the  annual  Honors  Assembly. 

The  students  in  this  era  liked  to  have  get-togethers  and  assemblies  for  any 
occasion.  Senior  Day,  at  the  end  of  the  year,  was  celebrated  with  a  Queen  and  King 
reigning  and  a  program  at  which  the  Seniors  "willed"  off  items  to  the  underclassmen. 
Mrs.  Elsie  Volpe  (LFHS  '54)  remembered  her  class  being  willed  a  pair  of  red  sweat 
pants  and  then  having  difficulty  deciding  to  whom  she  would  will  them. 

"Teen  Talk"  was  a  column  in  the  Lake  Forester  that  listed  the  grossip  about 
all  parties  and  socialites.  Every  year,  there  were  several  students  from  the  high 
school  who  made  the  column  frequently. 

Dating  was  as  popular  as  ever  in  the  1950's.  "Going  steady"  did  not  mean  a 
life-long  relationship,  but  merely  a  temporary  bond.  Many  students  went  through 
countless  temporary  bonds  throughout  their  four  years  at  LFHS. 

Music  always  highlighted  student  social  events.  Glen  Miller,  Patty  Page,  Pat 
Boone  and  Johnnie  Day  were  the  tops  in  popularity,  as  students  swooned  or  jitter- 
bugged  to  their  melodies. 

Transportation  was  somewhat  of  a  problem,  even  with  war  limitations  lifted. 
Because  of  the  lack  of  parking;  spaces,  few  students  drove  to  school.  Many  students 
relied  on  the  North  Shore  Line,  which  ran  near  where  the  Northwestern  tracks  are 
now.  This  train  served  LFHS  students  as  well  as  students  from  seven  other  north 
suburban  schools.  It  made  three  stops  in  Lake  Forest  and  one  in  Lake  Bluff,  pick- 
m<*  uo  students  and  depositing  them  near  Noble  Ave.  When  the  question  was 
raised  of  possibly  dropping  those  stops  and  perhaps  discontinuing  the  line  alto- 
gether, the  LFHS  student  body  reacted  strongly,  pointing  out  that  81  students  used 
the  line  for  transportation  to  school  in  good  weather,  more  used  it  in  bad  weather, 
and  164  students  used  it  following  after-school  activities.  The  train  schedule  stayed 
as  it  was,  for  at  least  a  few  more  years. 

After  studying  the  students  and  their  activities  in  the  1950's,  one  can  try  to 
decide  if  the  students  who  sat  in  the  desks  of  the  high  school  then  were  any  different 
than  those  who  had  sat  there  before,  or  would  in  years  to  come.  By  studying  mere 
facts,  this  is  difficult  to  determine,  so  one  must  turn  to  former  students  and  teachers. 
Most  alumni  agree  that  in  the  era  1949-1958.  students  had  less  responsibility  and 
less  desire  to  accept  it.  For  the  most  part,  students  were  not  well-informed  about 
politics  or  the  world  outside.  Perhaps  the  students  matured  more  slowly.  The  school 
was  their  world,  and  they  used  it  to  live  fully  before  having  to  take  on  the  responsi- 
bilities of  the  adult  world.  It  was  an  insulated  universe  where  students  could  be 
carefree  and  liberated,  dance  to  their  music  and  follow  their  fads.  Their  high  school 
years,  the  1950's,  were  happy  go-lucky  —  more  so  than  any  other  era  in  Lake 
Forest  High  School  history. 

50 


Bustin'  Bob  and  His  Cowboys 

(Curriculum  and 

Co-curricular  Activities) 

Over  the  ten  year  period  from  the  school  term  of  1948-49  to  1957-58,  the 
curriculum  offered  at  Lake  Forest  High  School  remained  fairly  constant.  A  few 
new  courses  sprang  up  over  the  years,  and  others  were  dropped;  but  such  change 
was  infrequent. 

Each  of  the  school  year's  two  semesters  was  divided  into  shorter  grading 
periods.  At  first,  there  were  six  of  these  shorter  periods  a  year,  three  each  semester, 
and  they  were  six  weeks  long.  By  1957,  however,  this  system  was  changed  to  the 
one  presently  in  use  at  the  high  school,  a  system  in  which  each  semester  consists  of 
two  nine  week  quarters.  The  method  used  to  denote  grades  has  also  been  changed. 
Letter  grades,  such  as  A,  B  and  C,  were  used  from  the  school's  beginning  until 
1953-54,  when  a  system  utilizing  number  grades  was  adopted.  The  numbers  ranged 
from  a  6,  comparable  to  an  A-f-  by  present  grading  standards,  down  to  a  1,  equal 
to  an  F.  This  system  remained  in  use  until  1967,  when  the  school  reverted  to  its 
former  system. 

The  average  work  load  carried  by  the  students  was  four  or  five  solids.  Five 
was  the  maximum  number  anyone  was  allowed  to  take.  Among  the  offered  cours- 
es were  two  which  the  students  were  required  to  take  during  all  four  years  of  high 
school:  English  and  physical  education.  In  English,  two  main  courses  were  open 
to  the  students.  The  first  was  the  normal  course  offered,  according  to  the  class 
that  a  student  was  in.  During  certain  years  of  this  period,  an  accelerated,  or  honors 
type  course  was  developed  and  offered  to  the  more  advanced  students.  The  other 
choice  was  Remedial  Reading,  designed  for  the  student  who  needed  extra  help  with 
basic  reading  skills.  Speech  was  the  only  other  English  course  offered  over  this 
period,  and  it  was  open  just  to  seniors,  who  could  take  it  in  addition  to  their  regular 
English  class.  In  Speech,  they  learned  how  to  write  and  present  speeches  and  debate. 
In  1952,  the  name  of  this  course  was  changed  to  Public  Speaking. 

Physical  education,  the  other  required  course,  was  changed  to  a  five-day 
course  during  the  fifties,  and  has  remained  so  to  the  present.  Boys  who  went  out 
for  a  competitive  sport  were  exempt  from  gym  during  that  time.  The  girls  though 
had  no  such  option.  Square  dancing  was  one  of  the  programs  featured  in  gym  classes 
during  this  time. 

History  was  always  an  extensive  department  at  Lake  Forest  High  School.  In- 
cluded in  the  curriculum  were  a  variety  of  courses  such  as  Community  Life,  English 
History,  Modern  European  History.  Latin  American  History,  United  States  History 
and  Far  East  History.  Far  East  History,  a  half  year  course  started  in  1947-48, 
changed  its  name  to  Oriental  History  in  1950.  Community  Life  was  a  course  offered 
to  the  freshmen.  It  was  dropped  as  a  course  in  1954-55.  and  reinstated  the  follow- 
ing year,  only  to  be  dropped  once  again  two  years  later.  English,  Modem  European, 
Latin  American,  and  U.S.  History  all  remained  on  the  curriculum  over  this  ten 
year  period.  Latin  American  History  was  only  a  half-year  course.  United  States 
History  was  required  of  all  students  by  state  law  and  was  offered  to  juniors  and 
seniors.  In  1949-50,  a  new  course,  Ancient  History,  was  offered.  Unfortunately, 

51 


this  course  lasted  no  longer  than  the  year  of  its  initiation.  Economics  was  added  to 
the  curriculum  in  1951-52,  but  lasted  only  two  years.  Two  other  courses  offered 
in  history  during  these  ten  years  were  Citizenship  and  Civics.  The  first  was  offered 
in  1956-57,  and  the  second  in  1957-58. 

The  field  of  mathematics  remained  the  same  throughout  all  the  years,  except 
with  respect  to  algebra.  General  Math,  a  freshmen  course,  Plane  Geometry,  Solid 
Geometry,  and  Trigonometry  were  all  part  of  the  curriculum.  In  algebra,  three 
courses  were  offered  over  this  time  period;  Alegbra,  College  Algebra,  and  Advanced 
Algebra.  Occasionally  only  two  of  these  three  courses  were  offered,  but  the  two 
varied  with  the  years.  A  fixed  pattern  of  math  courses  was  set  up  for  the  college- 
bound  student  consisting  of  Algebra  in  freshman  year,  Plane  Geometry  sophomore 
year.  Advanced  Algebra  in  the  junior  year,  and  Trigonometry  and  Solid  Geometry 
in  the  first  and  second  semester  of  the  senior  year. 

Four  science  courses  were  still  offered:  General  Science,  Biology,  Chemistry 
and  Physics.  In  1952-53,  Health  Science  was  added,  but  it  lasted  only  two  years. 

Latin,  French  and  Spanish  were  the  three  options  open  to  students  of  foreign 
language,  the  most  popular  of  these  still  being  Latin,  which  was  offered  to  the 
students  at  four  levels.  Spanish  and  French,  which  did  not  have  such  large  folio  w- 
ings,  were  frequently  not  offered  for  a  fourth  year  because  of  a  lack  of  students. 

The  scheduled  courses  in  music,  art  and  business  education  never  changed. 
Band,  Chorus,  and  Orchestra  made  up  the  music  classes.  The  chorus  was  always 
quite  large,  meeting  two  or  more  times  a  day,  and  the  band  was  of  an  average  size. 
The  orchestra,  however,  was  very  small.  The  director,  Mr.  Joseph  Wagner,  was 
known  to  lament  this  fact,  to  the  extent  of  putting  out  an  ad  in  the  school  paper 
pleading  for  live  string  players!  The  art  department  consisted  of  Art,  Crafts,  Home 
Economics  (both  cooking  and  sewing)  and  the  Industrial  Arts  courses  of  Shop  and 
Industrial  Arts  Drawing.  Business  education  was  programmed  around  the  same 
courses  as  those  offered  in  previous  years. 

Two  other  classes  rounded  out  the  students'  days:  the  sessions  and  lunch.  Be- 
tween 1948  and  1957,  all  students  spent  their  lunch  hours  together  in  the  old  cafe- 
teria. However,  in  1957-58,  due  to  the  completion  of  the  new  cafeteria  in  the 
school's  basement,  the  lunch  hour  was  split  into  two  sections.  During  the  first  sec- 
tion, the  freshmen  and  sophomores  ate,  and  during  the  second  half  hour,  the  juniors 
and  seniors.  The  creation  of  one  eighty  minute  class  came  as  a  result  of  this  new 
lunch  system,  and  it  displeased  the  students  because  it  was  such  a  great  deal  longer 
than  their  regular  fifty-five  minute  classes. 

Upon  graduation  during  these  10  years,  usually  about  80%  of  the  seniors 
went  on  to  institutions  of  higher  learning,  compared  with  less  than  20%  in  1935 
and  over  90%  in  1970. 

Each  school  year  starts  off  much  like  the  one  before  it.  Social  events  are 
planned  routinely  and  are  fitted  into  a  schedule  that  allows  them  to  occur  at  a 
fairly  consistent  pace,  without  interfering  with  each  other.  This  was  very  much  the 
case  in  the  school  years  between  1948  and  1958. 

One  of  the  first  events  held  each  year  was  the  Big-Little  Sister  Party,  put  on 
by  the  senior  members  of  the  Girls'  Club  for  the  new  freshman  girls.  Each  of  the 
younger  girls  was  matched  up  with  a  'big  sister.'  The  purpose  of  this  party  was  to 
acquaint  the  young  girls  with  their  new  school.  The  Sophomore  Party  was  another 
party  held  in  the  fall.  This  was  a  stag  party  for  sophomores  only,  at  which  they 
played  games  like  table  tennis  and  mingled  in  a  casual  atmosphere. 

Homecoming  remained  the  first  big  dance  of  the  year.  It  was  sponsored  jointly 

52 


by  the  Boys'  and  Girls'  Clubs,  with  the  boys  in  charge  of  selling  tickets  and  the 
girls  making  the  decorations  and  the  refreshments.  The  traditional  festivities  includ- 
ed the  parade,  the  football  game  and  finally  the  dance.  The  dance's  themes  for  the 
three  years  1949,  1950  and  1951  were  all  very  similar.  All  were  based  on  football, 
as  is  expected,  and  their  decorations  included  goalposts  and  pictures  of  football 
players.  The  next  six  years,  the  sponsors  came  up  with  more  original  themes.  In 
1953,  the  theme  was  "The  Snake  Dance,"  named  for  that  infamous  ritual  begun  in 
the  forties  and  still  held  the  night  before  Homecoming  in  West  Park.  "The  Cat," 
because  Lake  Forest  was  playing  the  Liberty ville  Wildcats,  was  the  theme  in  1954, 
and  "Indians,"  "The  Big  Day"  and  "The  New  Conference"  were  themes  for  1955, 
1956  and  1957,  respectively.  This  last  theme  choice  came  as  a  result  of  the  school's 
change  in  conferences  for  boy's  sports.  As  was  the  policy  at  all  the  high  school 
dances  until  the  sixties,  students  were  forbidden  to  leave  the  dance  before  its  end 
without  written  permission  from  their  parents.  The  doors  were  heavily  guarded  to 
prevent  any  deviation  from  this  standard  procedure. 

The  Girls'  Club  sponsored  its  first  fashion  shows  during  the  fifties.  At  first  the 
fashion  shows  were  held  only  once  a  year,  and  about  ten  students  were  chosen  to 
model  several  outfits  from  Hein's  in  Waukegan.  When  the  school  increased  in  size, 
several  shows  were  held  each  year  and  clothes  for  both  school  and  informal  wear 
were  modeled  from  a  variety  of  stores.  The  Girls'  Club  also  held  an  annual  banquet. 
The  banquets  were,  at  first,  mother-daughter  banquets.  At  these  banquets  the  girls 
and  their  mothers  were  waited  on  by  senior  boys  from  the  Boys'  Club;  attractive 
decorations  were  made  for  these  dinners,  fitting  in  with  such  varied  themes  as 
Travel'  and  'Circus,'  and  music  was  usually  provided  by  various  girls'  singing 
groups.  In  1951-52,  the  tradition  of  holding  a  mother-daughter  banquet  was  broken, 
and  a  father-daughter  banquet  was  held  instead.  The  theme  for  the  first  banquet  of 
this  type  was  'Rocket  to  the  Moon,'  and  each  father  was  his  daughter's  'man  in  the 
moon.'  Plans  made  this  year  to  alternate  between  mother-daughter  and  father- 
daughter  banquets  were  carried  out  in  succeeding  years. 

The  Boys'  Club  also  held  an  annual  banquet.  Until  1951-52,  theirs  had  always 
been  a  father-son  affair.  At  this  time  the  senior  girls  from  the  Girls'  Club  repaid  the 
favors  they  had  received  at  their  banquet  by  serving  the  food  and  cleaning  up  after- 
wards. In  1951-52,  the  boys,  following  the  girls'  example,  broke  tradition  and  held 
a  mother-son  banquet.  After  this,  they  switched  annually  between  mother-son  and 
father-son  banquets. 

One  of  the  most  interesting  of  all  assemblies  ever  to  take  place  at  the  high 
school  was  held  in  1951  when  Edward  Baron,  the  'world's  fastest  hynotist'  hyno- 
tized  13  volunteers  and  made  them  hot,  cold,  cry  and  laugh  at  his  command,  and 
then  made  them  stick  to  their  chairs  so  that  they  couldn't  leave  the  stage. 

People  traveled  less  in  the  fifties  than  today,  especially  students,  and  therefore 
field  trips  were  a  bit  more  special.  Every  year  a  student  could  usually  catch  one, 
whether  down  to  Chicago  with  an  English  class  for  a  play,  with  a  science  class  to 
visit  a  museum  or  with  a  foreign  language  club  to  dine  in  either  native  French  or 
Spanish  style  at  a  Chicago  restaurant.  In  the  spring  of  1955  there  was  the  big  trip 
for  35  students  of  Mr.  Leo  Gilchrist,  a  science  teacher:  they  went  to  Washington, 
D.C.  for  a  week  (a  trip  that  was  taken  several  years)  to  sightsee  and  meet  such 
notables  as  Illinois  Senator  Paul  Douglas.  One  student  who  went,  Marguerite  Otto, 
later  recalled  though  that  the  greatest  part  of  the  trip  was  not  the  imposing  history 
and  awe  of  the  capitol  city  but  the  climbing  of  so  many  steps.  She  recounted  with 
excitement  in  a  newspaper  article  how  they  all  climbed  1121  steps  in  one  day  — 
862  at  the  Washington  Monument,  52  at  the  Jefferson  Memorial,  etc.  —  and  the 
thrilling  moment  was  when  a  boy  named  Scott  Hannah  broke  all  previous  class 

53 


records  as  he  reached  the  last  of  the  862  steps  of  the  Washington  Monument  in  six 
and  a  half  minutes! 

The  annual  play,  put  on  by  the  Dramatics  Club,  was  held  in  the  fall,  and  in  the 
spring,  the  music  department  performed  its  annual  operetta.  l'Years  Ago,"  "Dear 
Ruth,"  "Ladies  in  Retirement,"  "My  Sister  Eileen,"  "Our  Town,"  "Arsenic  and  Old 
Lace/'  "The  Mad  Woman  of  Chaillot"  and  "Angel  Street"  were  some  of  the  plays 
produced  between  the  years  1948  and  1958.  In  1954,  "The  Barretts  of  Wimpole 
Street,"  the  play  which  was  presented,  stands  as  unique  in  that  one  of  the  charac 
ters,  Flush,  was  a  dog.  The  part  of  Flush  was  played  by  Silver,  a  neighborhood 
cocker  spaniel.  Operettas  put  on  in  these  ten  years  included  "lolanthe"  and  "A 
Waltz  Dream." 

Each  year,  juniors,  seniors  and  their  parents  were  invited  to  attend  two  educa- 
tional seminars:  College  Night,  and  the  Vocational  Conference.  Both  meetings  dealt 
with  making  plans  for  the  future.  At  College  Night,  representatives  from  colleges  all 
over  the  country  came  to  speak  in  a  small  group  to  interested  students.  The  voca- 
tional conference  introduced  the  students  to  the  different  fields  of  study  and  work 
open  to  them.  This  conference  was  put  on  with  the  cooperation  of  business  and  pro- 
fessional men  in  the  area. 

Student  Council  continued  to  sponsor  many  dances  and  activities,  and  of  par- 
ticular interest,  organized  a  faculty-council  treasure  hunt  in  which  participants 
raced  through  the  building  to  find  clues  leading  to  a  hidden  treasure.  The  Council 
also  started  a  new  tradition  in  1951  of  sponsoring  a  square  dance  in  January  to 
celebrate  the  end  of  semester  exams. 

Each  winter,  usually  in  December,  the  traditional  Senior  Hop  was  held.  For 
three  years  in  a  row,  1949,  1950  and  1951,  the  themes,  "Silver  Sleigh,"  "Snow 
Flurry"  and  "The  Snow  Swirl,"  centered  around  the  idea  of  winter  and  snow.  The 
themes  gradually  became  more  varied,  including  "An  Enchanted  Forest,"  "Man- 
hatten  Mood,"  "Tabu"  and  "Club  '58"  in  later  years.  The  Senior  Hop  was,  at  this 
time,  more  formal  than  the  Junior  Prom. 

Capers  was  the  next  big  dance  of  the  year,  sponsored  by  Cellar,  which  came 
into  being  in  1953  (see  monograph  on  Cellar).  This  newly-founded  club,  organized 
by  Miss  Helen  Cory,  met  in  the  basement  of  Gorton  School,  where  it  held  dances  to 
records,  a  juke  box  or  live'  music.  Dances  were  held  every  Friday  night  and  they 
attracted  large,  sometimes  overcapacity  crowds.  In  1956,  the  group  was  forced  to 
move  from  Gorton  to  larger  quarters  at  the  Recreation  Center. 

Session  Stunts  followed  on  the  agenda.  Held  every  year  until  1957-58,  the 
'Stunts'  still  consisted  of  acts  made  up  by  each  session  that  tied  in  with  one  prevail- 
ing theme.  It  was  put  on  for  the  community  as  a  sort  of  talent  show  —  often  minus 
the  talent.  It  was  discontinued  finally  as  it  became  increasingly  disorderly  and  diffi- 
cult to  organize  and  produce.  In  the  place  of  stunts,  a  "May  Festival"  was  held  in 
the  spring  of  1958.  This  festival  consisted  of  several  musical  and  dramatic  presenta- 
tions and  was  the  beginning  of  today's  annual  talent  show. 

In  contrast  to  the  formality  required  at  the  other  annual  dances,  for  the  tradi- 
tional Turnabout,  the  students  had  to  dress  in  tune  with  the  theme.  For  example,  in 
1951-52,  "Leap  Year  Roundup"  inspired  a  western  atmosphere  and  the  girls  came 
in  jeans,  whereas,  in  1955,  when  the  theme  was  "Comics,"  the  students  dressed  up 
in  comic  strip  characters.  A  favorite  tradition  for  Turnabout  was  the  presentation 
of  corsages  made  by  the  girls  to  the  boys.  These  corsages,  a  joke,  were  fashioned  out 
of  vegetables  such  as  carrots  and  radishes  Entertainment  always  ran  high  at  Turn- 
about. A  variety  of  contests  were  planned:  prizes  were  given  to  the  couples  dancing 

54 


the  best  waltz  and  the  best  Charleston,  to  the  most  cleverly  costumed  couple,  to 
the  person  guessing  the  number  of  buttons  in  a  Turnabout  jar,  to  the  winner  of  the 
girls'  pie-eating  contest  and  to  the  boy  who  could  drink  a  coke  bottle  full  of  milk 
the  fastest  while  sitting  on  his  date's  lap. 

Turnabout  was  sponsored  by  the  Girls'  Athletic  Association,  which  also  spon- 
sored an  annual  "Playday,"  held  in  the  school  years  1949-50,  1950-51  and  1953- 
54.  On  this  day,  the  members  of  LFGAA  invited  girls  from  neighboring  schools  to 
participate  in  a  morning  of  tournament  games  in  such  sports  as  basketball  and 
volleyball,  after  which  the  girls  were  then  served  refreshments  before  they  departed. 
In  1953-54,  this  club  also  sponsored  a  weekend  cabin  trip  for  the  girls. 

An  intra-school  gym  exhibit  was  held  in  several  years  during  the  fifties,  with 
probably  the  greatest  of  all  being  the  show  in  1955  when  Bustin'  Bob  Behrens 
hurled  over  nine  "salaaming"  students  crouched  on  their  hands  and  knees. 

Guppies,  the  synchronized  swimming  club,  put  on  a  show  in  the  spring  of  each 
year  after  an  embarrassing  initiation  of  their  new  members  in  the  fall.  The  girls 
were  forced  to  wear  plaid  skirts,  unmatching  plaid  blouses,  no  make-up,  hair  bows 
and  spots  of  lipstick  on  their  noses  to  school  and  then  go  through  a  more  rigorous 
initiation  in  the  pool  after  school.  At  first,  the  shows  consisted  of  separate  water 
ballet  acts  with  no  continuity  between  acts.  1952  was  the  first  year  the  girls  put  on 
a  show  in  which  the  acts,  centering  around  the  general  theme,  "Down  Under  the 
Sea,"  flowed  smoothly  together.  This  trend  was  followed  in  the  succeeding  years 
when  such  themes  as  "Aquannas,"  "Heaven  Scent"  (all  the  numbers  for  this  show 
were  based  on  perfume  names),  and  "A  Sea  of  Dreams"  were  used. 

Two  English  contests  were  held  each  spring,  in  which  representatives  chosen 
from  each  session  competed  for  the  titles  of  "Best  Speller"  and  "Best  English  Usage 
Contestant."  Both  the  Spelling  Bee  and  English  Usage  Contest  were  run  and  judged 
by  teachers.  The  students  were  given  words  to  spell  or  sentences  which  they  were 
asked  to  determine  as  being  correct  or  incorrect.  Elimination  was  the  process  used 
to  determine  the  winner;  contestants  were  excluded  when  they  answered  incorrectly. 

The  Band,  Orchestra,  and  Chorus  traditionally  performed  in  two  concerts  year- 
ly. For  several  years,  the  Christmas  concert  consisted  of  various  choruses  of  Han- 
del's "Messiah,"  performed  by  the  Orchestra  and  Chorus.  In  the  spring  they  were 
joined  by  the  Band  in  playing  songs  appropriate  to  the  season. 

Junior  Prom  remained  the  last  big  dance  of  the  year.  It  was  a  formal  affair, 
traditionally  put  on  by  the  juniors  as  a  tribute  to  the  graduating  seniors.  Themes 
generally  had  a  romantic,  spring  tone,  and  were  often  set  in  a  southern  or  exotic 
climate.  "Blossom  Time,"  "Moonlight  and  Magnolias,"  "Coral  Cotillion,"  "Stair- 
way to  the  Stars,"  "Oriental  Gardens,"  "Southern  Plantation"  and  "C'est  Si  Bon" 
were  some  of  the  themes  down  through  these  years. 

Each  school  year  ended  with  an  Honors  Assembly  at  which  awards,  scholar- 
ships and  other  honors  were  bestowed  up  deserving  students.  Soon  after  this,  grad- 
uation was  held  and  the  seniors,  receiving  their  diplomas,  left  the  school  as  students 
for  good. 

In  addition  to  the  yearly  events,  there  were  many  clubs  which  met  throughout 
the  school  years,  providing  activities  for  the  students  and,  often,  services  to  the 
community. 

During  the  years  1948-51,  many  students  participated  in  putting  on  a  monthly 
radio  program  over  station  WKRS-FM  in  Waukegan.  The  show  was  15  minutes 
long  and  presented  various  musical  groups  from  the  high  school.  In  1950-51,  this 
program,  called  "After  School  Stuff,"  also  sponsored  a  disc-jockey  contest. 

The  Junior  Red  Cross  had  modified  its  services  with  the  times  following  the 

55 


war,  aiding  veterans  and  for  poverty-stricken  children  around  the  world.  Selling 
food  at  the  Homecoming  game  had  been  the  primary  method  employed  in  raising 
funds. 

The  three  student  publications  (The  Forest  Scout,  Young  Idea  and  the  Year- 
book which  had  a  different  name  each  year)  were  continued  through  the  fifties:  the 
Forest  Scout  was  published  on  a  monthly  basis,  Young  Idea  once  a  year. 

The  Rifle  Club  and  the  Music  Club  were  both  dropped  in  1955-56.  However, 
before  this  happened,  they  had  been  fairly  active  clubs.  The  members  of  the  Rifle 
Club  strove  to  improve  their  marksmanship  as  they  shot  for  different  National  Rifle 
Club  ranks.  The  Music  Club,  formed  in  1946,  had  met  monthly,  and  at  these  meet 
ings  the  members  were  entertained  either  by  guest  speakers  and  performers,  or  by 
some  of  their  fellow  members.  In  the  last  year  of  its  existence,  the  club  held  a 
Christmas  Carol  Program  in  Market  Square  and  a  Spanish  Music  Festival. 

The  language  club  consisted  of  three  separate  units,  one  for  the  students  of  each 
language.  The  French  club  was  called  "Le  Cercle  Francais,"  the  Spanish  club,  "Los 
Picaros"  and  the  Latin  club,  "SPQR."  These  clubs  functioned  independently,  hold- 
ings meetings  at  which  they  put  on  skits  and  puppet  shows  and  planned  parties. 

The  Jerry  Werhane  Club  was  formed  in  1954-55  in  memory  of  Jerry  Werhane, 
who  would  have  been  a  sophomore  at  LFHS  had  he  not  lost  his  life  in  August  while 
attending  Camp  Makajawan  in  Wisconsin.  This  club's  main  objective  was  to  raise 
funds  to  send  deserving  boys  to  the  camp.  The  club's  annual  spring  project  begin- 
ning in  1958  was  cleaning  up  Camp  Rineburg,  which  had  formerly  been  the  duty 
of  the  senior  class  on  the  traditional  Senior  Day  each  year.  But  Senior  Day  had 
been  discontinued  in  1956  when  some  members  of  that  year's  class  had  supplied  all 
the  workers  with  a  great  amount  of  beer,  and  not  too  much  work  was  done  ex- 
plained a  member  of  the  class  of  1948.  (Since  that  time  Senior  Day  has  continued 
in  an  unsanctioned  form  however,  usually  noted  on  a  beautiful  spring  day  by  the 
wearing  of  an  official  senior  T-shirt  by  most  members  of  the  class,  a  great  picnic 
some  place,  and  a  huge  number  of  senior  absences  from  classes.) 

The  Letterman's  Club  was  first  formed  by  a  group  of  seven  boys  in  1957-58. 
The  requirement  for  membership  in  this  club  was  the  possession  of  a  major  letter 
in  sports.  It  functioned  as  a  service  club,  selling  tickets  and  candy  at  games  and 
ushering  at  the  various  school  productions.  Unfortunately,  the  club  did  not  live  up 
to  its  expectations  in  its  first  few  years;  but  it  remained,  and  became  more  success- 
ful in  later  years,  greatly  expanding  and  fulfilling  the  services  initially  planned. 

The  Science  Club  was  organized  in  1957-58  by  a  new  biology  teacher,  Mr. 
James  Benton.  Its  membership  was  closely  supervised  and  restricted  to  those  stu- 
dents who  showed  intense  interest.  There  was  a  board  which  reviewed  the  recom- 
mendations of  students  for  new  members,  and  three  absences  from  meetings  meant 
a  student's  removal  from  the  club.  At  the  meetings,  the  students  worked  on  their 
own  experiments,  utilizing  the  school's  equipment.  In  its  first  year  the  club  made 
school  history  with  the  purchase  of  Lake  Forest's  first  armadillo,  which  one  of  the 
members  had  ordered  from  Texas  as  a  joke.  (The  creature  died  shortly  after  its 
arrival,  unfortunately.)  Two  new  clubs  appeared  at  the  high  school  in  1956.  These 
were  the  Library  Club  and  the  Pep  Club.  The  purpose  of  this  first  club  was  to  en- 
courage reading  and  to  improve  the  library  service.  Pep  Club's  purpose  was  to  pro- 
mote school  spirit.  Pep  rallies  were  held  frequently  and  were  very  well-attended. 
Gerry  Mahler  (LFHS  '58)  commented,  "When  we  had  a  pep  rally,  we  really  had  a 
pep  rally!"  In  1957  this  club,  still  fairly  unorganized  because  of  its  youth,  devised 
a  system  of  giving  points  and  awards  to  enthusiastic  and  involved  members. 

56 


At  the  pep  rallies,  the  Pep  Club  members  were  led  in  cheers  by  the  Cheer- 
leaders. There  were  two  cheerleading  squads:  the  varsity  and  the  junior  varsity. 
Throughout  the  years,  the  number  of  cheerleaders  varied  between  five  and  six.  A 
group  of  majorettes,  girls  who  twirled  batons,  was  also  picked  to  lead  the  band  at 
Homecoming  and  other  football  games. 

In  1957-58,  LFHS  switched  conferences  for  boys'  sports  again,  this  time 
becoming  part  of  the  Northwest  Suburban  Conference  with  the  other  schools  of  Ela- 
Vernon  (today  Lake  Zurich),  Round  Lake,  Warren,  Grayslake,  Grant,  Antioch 
and  Wauconda.  The  reason  was  that  LFHS  wanted  to  compete  with  smaller  schools, 
and  some  of  the  schools  in  the  old  Northeast  Conference  had  become  very  large. 

Both  the  football  and 
basketball  teams  had  medi- 
ocre records  for  the  majori- 
ty of  these  ten  years.  1957- 
58  was  the  only  year  in 
which  the  football  team 
scored  some  measure  of 
success,  when  it  lost  only 
one  of  its  conference  games. 
In  1950-51,  the  basketball 
team  placed  second  in  its 
conference,  with  a  total  of 
eight  wins,  two  losses.  The 
following  year  the  Scouts 
basketball  team  took  the 
title  of  co-champion  with 
Crystal  Lake,  in  their  con- 
ference. This  team  also  went  into  the  regionals  competition,  where  they  succeeded 
in  winning  their  first  two  games. 

Track,  wrestling,  golf 
and  tennis  were  the  other 
sports  in  which  the  boys 
played  competitively  dur- 
ing these  years.  Wrestling 
was  initiated  as  a  sport  in 
1954,  with  the  purchase  of 
$1,230  worth  of  necessary 
equipment.  Four  years  later 
the  boys  took  a  first  in  the 
conference.  The  completion 
of  five  new  tennis  courts  in 
1953-54  made  the  forma- 
tion of  a  boy's  tennis  team 
possible.  The  coach  of  this 
team  was  Dr.  Frank  Town- 
send,  and  in  its  second  year 
the  team  tied  for  second 
place  in  the  conference. 

Boy's  sports,  girl's  sports,  plays,  clubs  and  dances  —  all  helped  to  round  out 
a  student's  life  by  involving  him  in  activities  with  other  students,  and  in  turn  helped 
him  to  grow  towards  fulfilling  his  future. 

51 


After-school  dedication 


Bustin'  Bob  warms  up. 


Something  to  Be  Proud  of 
(Community) 

During  the  1950's  new  ideas  were  being  produced  that  would  set  the  pace  for 
the  revolutionary  sixties.  Clothes  and  music  were  changing.  Parents  were  turning 
to  the  progressive  Dr.  Spock  for  advice  on  rearing  their  children.  But  most  of  all, 
the  economy  was  changing.  The  formerly  small  upper-middle  class  was  growing 
and  pushing  itself  into  exclusive  areas,  including  Lake  Forest.  This  was  especially 
true  when  the  large  estates  began  to  break  into  subdivisions.  As  a  result  of  the 
search  for  the  best  community  to  live  in,  a  school  system  was  constantly  under 
inspection.  Lake  Forest  High  School  drew  many  to  this  area,  and  often  played  a 
substantial  part  in  decisions  to  move  here.  In  July,  1956,  a  mother  who  had  decided 
to  remain  in  Lake  Forest  because  of  the  school,  praised  it  highly  saying,  "the 
strength  of  the  school  lies  in  its  recognition  of  the  student  as  an  individual  entitled 
to  the  respect  of  all  school  members."  She  hoped  that  it's  aspirations  and  ideals 
would  be  guarded  well.  Parents  were  generally  satisfied  with  the  job  the  school  was 
doing.  The  community  was  pleased  with  its  conservative  youth  as  well.  Lake  Forest 
High  School  students  were  commended  for  their  practical  and  neat  appearances. 
Although  the  school  did  boast  a  few  bona  fide  "greasers,"  one  employee  at  Smith's 
Men  Store  was  quoted  as  saying,  "You  saw  very  few  blue  jeans  and  'Elvis  Presleys' 
in  Lake  Forest."  Obviously  this  pleased  the  community. 

Two  organizations  which  brought  together  the  school  and  the  community 
were  the  School  Board  and  the  Service  League.  The  Service  League  was  open  to 
all  parents  of  high  school  children.  Prior  to  1951,  the  Service  League's  president 
had  always  been  a  lady.  However,  in  1951,  Mr.  Stevas  was  elected,  breaking  the 
tradition.  The  major  role  of  the  League  was  to  provide  scholarships  for  "worthy" 
LFHS  seniors.  These  scholarships  were  given  on  the  basis  of  financial  need  and  the 
individual's  character  and  high  school  record.  Applicants  had  to  write  letters  to  the 
scholarship  committee  of  the  League  explaining  their  reasons  for  applying,  and 
have  two  faculty  recommendations.  Parents  also  had  to  fill  out  a  form.  In  the  seven- 
teen years  before  1954,  the  League  had  donated  more  than  $7,000  in  scholarships, 
helping  75  seniors  begin  their  careers. 

The  funds  were  raised  almost  entirely  by  the  Service  League's  Annual  Benefit 
Program,  for  which  a  relevant  and  interesting  speaker  came  to  the  school  to  speak. 
Examples  of  some  of  the  more  successful  programs  were  those  featuring  an  ex- 
prisoner  of  war  from  behind  the  iron  curtain,  in  1953-4,  the  poet  Ogden  Nash,  in 
1956-7,  and  an  adventure-movie  producer  in  1957-8. 

The  Service  League  became  increasingly  popular,  as  can  be  seen  in  the  mem- 
bership statistics.  In  1951,  parent  members  numbered  248.  The  very  next  year, 
they  had  increased  to  342.  Many  other  activities  were  sponsored  by  the  League, 
which  probably  drew  new  members.  Discussions  between  faculty  and  parents  were 
held  at  meetings  and  lectures  were  given.  One  such  lecture  was  "Know  Your  Child," 
given  by  a  child  psychologist.  Students  and  parents  were  annually  invited  to  attend 
the  Vocational  Conference  and  College  Night.  And  sometimes  the  League  provided 
just  plain  entertainment.  One  favorite  fun  group  was  the  Medicine  Men  from 
Abbott  Laboratories. 

The  Service  League  also  funded  Cellar,  very  popular  with  the  students  in  these 
years.  In  fact,  all  were  so  enthusiastic  about  Cellar,  that  one  whole  issue  of  the 

58 


Lake  Forester  (Thursday,  December  1,  1955)  was  dedicated  to  it.  Parents,  teachers 
and  students  wrote  articles  commending  its  organization.  The  main  thrust  of  the 
articles  was  their  belief  that  Cellar  gave  the  kids  something  to  do,  got  them  off  the 
streets,  and  kept  them  out  of  trouble. 

The  School  Board,  whose  purpose  as  recorded  in  the  1957  Forest  Trails  was  to 
"establish  all  school  policies  which  reflected  the  desires  of  the  community,"  was 
composed  of  four  representatives  from  Lake  Forest,  two  representatives  from  Lake 
Bluff,  and  one  from  the  unincorporated  area  (Knoll wood).  It  met  once  a  month, 
and  had  four  main  committees:  Finance,  Education,  Publicity  and  Public  Rela- 
tions, and  the  Grounds  Committee.  During  this  ten  year  span,  however,  several 
special  committees  were  set  up.  The  Board  was  concentrating  on  finalizing  the  split 
from  the  Deerfield-Shields  Township  High  School  District  113,  and  facing  the 
problems  of  the  quickly  increasing  student  population.  In  1952,  after  several  years 
of  battling  to  get  a  practical-sized  district  for  Lake  Forest,  the  Illinois  Supreme 
Court  finally  decided  that  Lake  Forest  High  School  District  115  could  separate 
from  Highland  Park  High  School  District  113. 

In  the  meantime,  the  newly  formed  District  115  proposed  an  even  further 
reduction.  Lake  Forest  and  Lake  Bluff  wanted  to  become  a  single  district,  exclud- 
ing the  then  present  North  Chicago.  Farnsworth,  and  Great  Lakes  areas.  Highland 
Park  contested  this  separation  and  took  it  to  court.  On  March  29,  1951,  Judge 
Ralph  Dady  handed  down  the  decision  in  favor  of  Lake  Forest.  Lake  Forest  could 
now  concern  itself  with  educating  the  students  of  it's  own  community.  Concerning 
the  final  split,  LFHS  Superintendent  Dr.  Raymond  Moore  said,  "the  decision  of  the 
Illinois  Supreme  Court  was  logical  as  well  as  justified  in  the  light  of  the  wishes  of 
the  citizens  of  this  high  school  community.  The  decision  permits  our  school  district 
to  determine  it's  own  educational  policies  and  future  plans."  (Lake  Forester,  March 
27,  1952). 

Around  1954,  the  School  Board  turned  its  attention  to  the  "growing  pains" 
that  the  school  was  beginning  to  experience.  After  two  years  investigation,  the  Board 
had  decided  on  the  urgency  of  remedial  action  and  called  for  a  referendum  on 
March  30,  1957.  To  support  the  decision  of  the  Board.  Dr.  Moore  told  Lake  Forest- 
ers it  would  be  impossible  to  conduct  school  in  1958.  His  hypothesis  was  well- 
founded:  enrollment  in  1950  had  been  425;  by  1956  it  had  climbed  to  518;  and  in 
1958,  as  Dr.  Moore  had  anticipated,  it  grew  to  676! 

The  firm  of  Stanley  D.  Anderson  and  Associates,  which  had  originallv  built 
the  high  school  in  1935,  was  hired  to  build  the  additions.  Bv  January  of  1957,  the 
school  board  had  prepared  two  propositions  for  the  community  to  vote  on.  Proposi- 
tion A  was  a  $2,850,000  plan  which  included  a  750  seat  auditorium,  teaching  areas, 
a  1,300  seat  bov's  gym,  and  20  new  classrooms.  Proposition  B  required  an  addi- 
tional $400,000  for  a  new  pool  also. 

The  board  tried  to  get  everyone  as  well  informed  as  possible.  Students  helped 
to  pass  out  pamphlets,  board  members  appeared  at  various  organizations  to  talk 
about  their  proposal,  and  a  public  meeting  was  held.  But  they  did  a  bad  selling  iob, 
as  Mr.  Al  Glover  put  it.  Mr.  Glover,  a  civic-minded  citizen,  took  an  active  part  in 
questioning  the  referendum.  He  pointed  out  that  since  the  public  meeting  was  held 
on  March  25,  that  left  the  voters  only  four  days  to  make  a  decision  on  such  an 
important  issue.  More  than  300  people  showed  up  at  the  public  meetings  —  which 
left  a  considerable  majority  of  voters  still  uninformed.  Everyone  there,  Mr.  Glover 
suggested,  felt  that  additional  facilities  were  definitely  needed  to  meet  the  needs  of 
the  increasing  population,  but  thev  were  appalled  at  the  lack  of  information  available 
from  the  School  Board.  Some  of  the  questions  he  and  others  had  about  the  pro- 
posed additions  and  the  answers  given  are  shown  below: 

59 


1.  (Question)  Most  agreed  that  new  classrooms  were  needed,  but  they 
questioned  the  need  for  an  entire  new  boy's  gym.  Its  upkeep  cost 
would  be  somewhere  around  $700,000,  and  it  would  only  be  used 
once  a  week  or  so  for  assemblies.  They  argued  that  extra  room  for 
drama  and  music  rehearsals  was  needed,  but  they  wondered  about  a 
whole  new  auditorium,  with  seating  for  756  people.  An  all-purpose 
room  without  elaborate  seating  arrangements  was  suggested. 
(Answer)  The  new  auditorium  and  gym  would  be  used  not  only  for 
rehearsals,  gym  classes,  and  teaching  areas,  but  they  would  also  serve 
the  community  in  a  way  which  was  not  possible  at  the  time.  The 
number  of  seats  had  been  arrived  at  scientifically  to  meet  the  needs 
of  the  school.  Mr.  P.  Speidel,  the  president  of  the  Board,  also  said 
that  it  would  be  more  expensive  in  the  long  run  to  "tear  out  a  wall  and 
build  piecemeal  than  to  do  the  job  right  and  with  accurate  planning." 
He  pointed  out  that  foresight  always  pays.  (From  a  letter  to  the  editor 
of  the  Lake  Forester  March  1957) 

2.  (Question)  Someone  suggested  building  a  whole  new  school. 
(Answer)  The  school  had  no  property  on  which  to  build  another 
school,  and  they  had  just  acquired  a  substantial  amount  of  property 
on  which  to  build  the  additions,  as  well  as  a  parking  lot.  There  was 
also  the  question  as  to  what  to  do  with  the  old  school,  because  there 
would  be  no  immediate  use  for  it. 

3.  (Question)  Mr.  Glover  asked  for  costs  as  compared  to  other  building 
costs,  specifically  in  square  inches,  square  feet  and  square  yards. 
(Answer)  The  answers  were  provided  mostly  by  members  of  the  audi- 
ence, showing  the  proposed  Lake  Forest  costs  to  be  much  higher  than 
those  sighted  from  Chicago  firms,  an  architectural  magazine,  and  the 
Deerpath  School  costs. 

4.  (Question)  Why  were  the  proposed  costs  so  exorbitant? 

(Answer)  It  was  said  that  in  order  to  utilize  and  compliment  the  pres- 
ent building,  prices  had  to  be  high,  and  also  that  the  labor  costs  in 
Lake  Forest  were  higher  than  anywhere  else  in  the  United  States. 
They  were  reminded  of  the  promise  of  the  board  that  Lake  Forest's 
tax  rates  would  remain  among  the  lowest  in  the  country  despite  the 
burdensome  construction  costs. 

A  March  Lake  Forester,  1957,  pointed  out  that  the  several  women  who  spoke 
up  at  the  public  meeting  on  March  25  were  in  favor  of  the  proposed  additions,  say- 
ing, "You  get  what  you  pay  for  and  if  we  want  a  good,  durable  school  structure 
we'll  have  to  pay  for  it." 

Mr.  Glover  summed  up  the  situation  though,  when  he  wrote  in  the  Waukegan 
News  Sun  on  March  29,  1957,  that  at  such  a  late  date,  the  voters  had  no  choice 
other  than  to  vote  'no'  on  the  referendum  and  ask  the  board  to  reconsider  the  pro- 
gram to  see  if  costs  could  be  reduced,  and  to  re-submit  a  new  program  in  60  days. 
Apparently,  this  was  the  general  opinion  of  all  the  voters. 

723  for  bond  issue  ,,    ,x  1,774  for  the  expansion 

1,687  against  it  U^  737  against  it 

This  must  have  been  a  critical  issue  to  the  community,  for  there  was  a  record 
number  of  votes  cast  —  2,500.  The  deadline  for  votes  was  7:00  p.m.,  but  so  many 
people  remained  outside  the  doors  at  that  time,  that  the  polls  had  to  be  kept  open 
until  8:00  p.m.!  The  Board  went  to  work  to  revise  their  plans.  In  late  October, 
1957,  they  announced  a  plan  to  reduce  the  costs  by  $750,000;  from  $2,850,000  to 

60 


$2,100,000.  This  new  cost  was  $15.15  per  square  foot. 

When  the  second  election  was  finally  held  in  December  of  the  same  year,  the 
proposal  passed  by  almost  the  same  percentage  that  voted  it  down  the  year  before, 
70%.  Groundbreaking  for  the  new  addition  was  set  for  June,  1958. 

Meanwhile,  space  for  approximately  one  hundred  new  students  enrolled  for 
the  1958-1959  school  year  had  to  be  found.  In  January,  1958,  plans  concerning 
the  accommodation  of  the  additional  students  were  revealed.  Those  were:  (1)  the 
division  of  three  large  classrooms  into  six  smaller  ones,  (2)  the  use  of  the  cafeteria 
as  a  study  hall,  and  (3)  the  installation  of  new  lockers  in  the  basement  storeroom. 

In  September  1959,  LFHS  opened  with  the  following  additions:  (1)  the  north 
wing,  consisting  of  a  new  boy's  gym,  industrial  arts  room,  correctional  gym  (now  the 
girl's  locker  room),  snack  bar  and  laundry  rooms,  and  (2)  the  south  wing,  including 
the  auditorium,  dressing  room,  scenery  room,  bandroom,  chorus  room,  and  various 
science  rooms.  The  additions,  of  course,  were  still  under  construction  but  by  Novem- 
ber 1958,  the  annexations  were  moving  rapidly  along.  This  same  year,  the  driveway 
in  front  of  the  school  was  extended  to  its  present  semi-circle. 

In  addition  to  the  new  building,  the  main  office  had  been  remodeled  and  was 
connected  to  the  guidance  department  by  a  hall.  The  sciences  had  moved  from  the 
north  wing  to  the  south  wing,  which  kept  Mr.  St.  John's  "little  noodles"  busy  carry- 
ing equipment  to  the  new  location. 

The  new  auditorium  was  dedicated  to  Dr.  Raymond  Moore  on  December  6, 
1959.  This  event  marked  the  formal  acceptance  of  the  1958  additions  as  a  part  of 
Lake  Forest  High  School. 


LFHS:  Something  to  be  proud  of, 
61 


The  community  began  to  get  slightly  anxious  when  the  hot  rod  culture  began 
to  spring  up  in  the  mid-fifties.  Several  boys,  concerned  about  the  bad  reputation  the 
word  hot-rod  was  acquiring,  formed  the  Lakesters  Rods  and  Customs  Club,  hoping 
to  erase  the  bad  name.  The  Club  was  developed  to  be  a  service  to  the  other  drivers 
of  the  community.  Said  the  president  of  the  club,  "We  are  pledged  to  promote  auto- 
mobile safety  in  our  community."  Because  of  their  knowledge  of  cars,  claimed  the 
Lakesters,  the  hot  rod  driver  is  an  above-average  driver.  The  Lakesters  planned  a 
city  wide  auto  safety  check  with  the  police  department,  and  they  were  also  con- 
nected with  the  National  Hot  Rod  Association. 

Community  members  were  encouraged  to  take  part  in  high  school  activities. 
The  churches  provided  a  variety  of  activities  for  students.  Many  awards,  donations, 
and  special  services  also  showed  a  willingness  to  aid  the  high  school.  The  Wauke- 
gan  News-Sun  gave  Geoffrey  Fox  a  scholarship  for  his  journalistic  abilities  in  1958- 
1959.  The  Jr.  Red  Cross  was  a  school  sponsored  club,  but  was  affiliated  with  the 
area  Red  Cross.  It  sponsored  a  summer  training  course  at  the  Lake  Forest  Academy. 
Also,  at  Christmas  the  club  supported  a  needy  family  in  North  Chicago.  One  Lake 
Forest  family  donated  money  to  the  Forest  Scout  in  memory  of  their  son,  a  former 
editor  who  was  killed  in  the  war.  A  clothing  store  lent  clothes  to  some  Lake  Forest 
High  School  girls  for  a  style  show;  a  driving  school  gave  a  lecture  to  the  students, 
and  free  tuberculosis  tests  were  given  to  all  students  by  the  Lake  County  Tuber- 
culosis Association. 

The  Kiwanis  Club  gave  an  Annual  Football  Banquet  at  Lake  Forest  College  to 
honor  all  LFHS  football  lettermen.  Usually  a  local  sportscaster  or  sportswriter 
would  give  a  speech  at  the  banquet.  The  Police  Association  gave  a  dinner  for  184 
boys  from  Lake  Forest  High  School,  St.  Mary's  and  Gorton.  Members  of  the  City 
Council,  Police  Force  and  school  leaders  attended  the  dinner. 

The  American  Legion  held  frequent  citizenship  assemblies,  and  would  an- 
nually honor  students  who  were  chosen  by  faculty  and  student  election,  as  the  out- 
standing school  citizens  of  the  community.  These  students  would  give  speeches  at 
the  Annual  Citizenship  Day  Program. 

Of  special  interest  during  this  period  was  a  radio  program  which  was  broad- 
cast once  a  month  by  Lake  Forest  High  School  students  over  WKRS-FM.  It  was 
titled  "After  School  Stuff"  and  it  lasted  15  minutes  (7:00  to  7:15).  Another  inter- 
esting program  was  a  work  credit  program  instituted  in  1953.  Under  this  system  a 
student  could  work  half  a  day  for  Abbott  Laboratories,  the  Telephone  Company 
or  other  businesses  for  credit,  and  attend  school  the  rest  of  the  day.  Usually  these 
companies  were  very  cooperative  with  this  school  program. 

By  far  one  of  the  biggest  highlights  of  this  period  was  when  the  Lake  Forest 
High  School  student  body  was  let  out  for  an  hour  to  watch  the  parade  and  meet 
General  MacArthur  as  he  passed  through  Lake  Forest  on  his  way  to  Milwaukee 
from  Ft.  Sherdan.  John  C.  Maloney  represented  Lake  Forest  High  School  in  a 
special  welcoming  committee. 

For  long  periods  of  time  during  the  10-year  span  of  1948-1958,  no  kind  of 
community  reaction  can  be  found  in  newspapers,  scrapbooks,  even  interviews.  Dur- 
ing these  times,  the  community  members  seemed  to  remain  somewhat  indifferent 
to  their  high  school.  Through  their  silence,  though,  they  expressed  approval  of  the 
one  growing  public  high  school  in  the  midst  of  many  more  established  private 
schools. 


62 


Part  IV 

The  Economics  of  Education 

(Community) 

The  community  is  very  important  to  a  school.  The  citizens  of  Lake  Forest 
believed  in  the  high  school  and  supported  it.  As  a  dividend  on  their  invested  inter- 
est, the  school's  excellence  contributed  to  the  community's  growth.  As  one  parent 
stated,  "We  moved  out  here  because  of  the  fine  schools  ...  a  school  system  which 
prepares  students  for  college  is  one  of  the  best  advantages  offered  in  Lake  Forest." 
Lake  Forest  High  School  was  the  most  important  part  of  this  system. 

The  community  offered  much  to  the  student.  In  addition  to  the  high  school's 
own  summer  school  program,  Lake  Forest  College  provided  summer  school  courses 
for  high  school  students  for  the  price  of  twenty  dollars  per  credit  hour.  The  Lake 
Forester  sponsored  a  junior  "adcraft"  contest  for  the  students.  This  contest  gave 
the  students  a  chance  to  express  their  advertising  ability  by  making  up  ads  to  pro- 
mote the  local  community  stores.  A  good  deal  of  work  was  required  of  these  stu- 
dents, including  several  meetings  with  the  store  managers. 

The  community  also  offered  scholarship  aid  and  honors  to  exceptional  students. 
The  state  of  Illinois  awarded  scholarships  to  seven  Lake  Forest  High  School  stu- 
dents in  1959.  In  addition,  the  DAR  recognized  outstanding  students  with  the 
presentation  of  their  annual  citizenship  award.  A  "Helen  Cory"  Scholarship  was 
presented  by  Cellar  and  the  Service  League.  This  was  a  monetary  award  of  $250  a 
year  for  four  years,  given  to  one  girl  and  one  boy.  The  American  Legion  held  essay 
contests  every  year,  and  presented  citizenship  awards  to  two  students  from  each 
high  school  class. 

The  Service  League,  serving  as  a  link  between  the  school  and  the  community, 
was  very  active.  It  featured  public  meetings  with  guest  speakers  talking  about  differ- 
ent points  of  education.  It  sponsored  the  May  talent  show,  proceeds  from  which 
went  toward  student  scholarships.  Money  from  concessions  was  used  to  buy  the 
school  a  new  organ. 

In  May  of  1962  the  Service  League  became  involved  in  the  referendum  for 
tax  increases.  The  school  board  president  called  for  a  21%  increase  ($.86  per  $100 
assessed  income).  With  a  rapid  enrollment  growth,  Dr.  Clyde  Carter,  Assistant 
Superintendent  of  the  high  school,  and  Dr.  Albert  Poole  of  the  elementary  system 
both  felt  that  this  was  a  necessary  increase  and  urged  people  to  support  it.  The 
League  of  Women  Voters  and  the  Service  League  actively  backed  it,  and  the  referen- 
dum passed. 

The  Board  of  Education  of  the  district  was  very  active  and  important  in  the 
sixties.  Three  new  members  were  elected  in  the  1959-60  school  year:  Wayland  B. 
Cedarquist,  Ralph  Rawson,  and  George  Watson.  One  of  the  jobs  of  the  board  was 
to  get  bids  on  the  summer  remodeling  of  the  high  school  in  1960.  This  included  the 
rearrangement  and  rehabilitation  of  several  classroom  areas  to  create  four  new 
classrooms.  The  work  also  entailed  the  installation  of  new  lighting  systems,  acousti- 
cal ceilings,  and  several  new  unit  ventilators. 

The  parents  of  the  students  toured  the  high  school  and  met  teachers  at  the 
annual  open  house.  On  the  night  of  the  open  house,  they  followed  a  shortened  ver- 

63 


sion  of  their  child's  schedule.  In  1959,  this  was  followed  by  a  dedication  of  the  new 
auditorium  to  Dr.  Raymond  Moore.  The  parents  also  chaperoned  all  of  the  Cellar 
parties  and  activities. 

The  new  school  auditorium  was  the  scene  of  many  shows  and  exhibits.  It  was 
open  to  community  use,  so  that  the  people  could  further  benefit  from  and  become 
acquainted  with  the  high  school.  The  A.P.T.  of  the  Lake  Forest  elementary  schools 
staged  a  variety  show  in  the  auditorium  which  ran  from  March  31  to  April  8,  1960. 
The  Northwest  Conference  Music  Festival  was  held  in  the  gymnasium  of  the  high 
school  in  May  of  that  year.  In  October,  1962,  the  Lake  Forest-Lake  Bluff  Commit- 
tee for  Family  Guidance  sponsored  a  talk  by  Ann  Landers,  which  was  presented  in 
the  auditorium. 

In  the  beginning  of  the  sixties  LFHS  was  rated  by  one  hundred  and  twenty 
different  universities  as  one  of  the  fifty  best  secondary  schools  in  the  nation.  Their 
ratings  were  based  on  previous  students'  performances  in  college  and/or  the  busi- 
ness world. 

In  1959-60,  a  vocational  conference  was  held  at  the  high  school.  This  confer- 
ence brought  students  together  with  eighty  local  businessmen  in  order  to  aid  the 
students  in  determining  what  kind  of  occupations  they  would  like  to  enter.  The 
chairman  of  this  conference  was  Mr.  John  Maloney. 

Lake  Forest  High  School's  ''pioneer  efforts  to  move  forward"  were  cited  in 
the  fall  of  1962  by  the  educational  chief  of  the  House  of  Representatives  Commis- 
sion on  Education  and  Labor  in  Washington,  D.C.  (Lake  Forester,  1962).  Lake 
Forest  High  School  also  had  the  distinction  of  being  nominated  to  the  first  Honor 
Roll  of  the  National  Council  of  Teachers  of  English,  for  schools  which  reduced  the 
English  teacher's  load. 

The  Women's  Club  of  Lake  Forest  showed  much  interest  in  the  high  school's 
American  Field  Service  (AFS)  Program,  and  helped  the  Lake  Forest-Lake  Bluff 
chapter  raise  funds.  In  the  1961-62  school  year,  the  AFS  student  at  the  high  school 
was  Mats  Janelid,  a  Swedish  citizen.  Before  Mats  was  accepted  for  his  year  in 
America,  he  was  in  the  Naval  Training  of  the  Sea  Cadets  Corps.  At  LFHS  he 
played  basketball  and  football,  excelled  in  yachting,  and  tried  to  learn  tennis.  He 
lived  with  the  Barth  family  of  Lake  Forest. 

The  high  school  extended  its  contribution  to  the  community  in  the  fall  of  1962 
by  establishing  the  Adult  Evening  School.  The  program  was  created  to  offer  semi- 
nars on  world  affairs,  courses  in  the  arts  and  home  arts,  business  seminars,  and 
language  classes.  The  courses  were  conducted  by  professional  leaders,  university 
professors,  and  some  members  of  the  Lake  Forest  High  School  faculty.  The  World 
Affairs  Seminar  was  one  of  the  most  interesting  programs.  It  consisted  of  four  six- 
week  sessions,  highlighted  by  participation  of  consul  generals,  a  foreign  trade  com- 
missioner, and  other  authorities  from  foreign  consulates. 

In  1963,  Ralph  Rawson  and  Wayland  Cedarquht  (both  endorsed  by  the  Lake 
Forest  Caucus)  sought  re-election  to  the  Lake  Forest  Board  of  Education.  A  new 
precinct  was  designated  for  the  high  school  board  —  precinct  III.  The  high  school 
was  designated  its  polling  place.  This  precinct  included  all  of  Lake  Forest  north  of 
Deerpath  Road.  Rawson  and  Cedarquist  were  re-elected  unopposed  from  this  area. 

In  May  of  '63,  new  staff  appointments  made  by  the  board  were  announced  to 
the  public.  Dr.  Andrew  Tobasco  became  the  Director  of  Guidance;  Richard  O'Dair 
became  the  Dean  of  Students;  and  Thomas  Short  became  Director  of  Extended 
Services,  the  man  in  charge  of  the  evening  school,  among  other  things. 

During  the  school  year,  1962-63,  LFHS  became  a  fallout  shelter.  With  the 
license  the  building  owners  assumed  no  liability.  The  supplies  took  up  only  one  and 

64 


one  half  cubic  feet  per  person.  In  the  case  of  the  need  to  use  the  school  as  shelter, 
the  gymnasium  mats  could  be  used  as  bedding,  drapes  could  be  pulled  to  restrict 
flying  glass,  and  the  pool  could  be  used  as  a  source  of  emergency  water.  This  was 
another  way  in  which  the  community  benefitted  from  its  high  school.  In  November, 
the  Civil  Defense  Organization  of  Lake  County  offered  a  free  course  in  medical 
self-help.  The  course  was  designed  to  give  information  about  two-week  emergency 
care  in  the  event  of  nuclear  warfare,  during  which  time  no  professional  medical  help 
would  be  available. 

In  February,  1963,  the  U.S.  Army  placed  the  Civil  Defense  signs  on  the  build- 
ing. On  Saturday,  March  9,  the  Civil  Defense  sirens  were  sounded  at  10  and  10:15 
a.m.,  to  begin  a  six  month  re-familiarization  of  Civil  Defense  alerts.  When  tested, 
not  everyone  could  hear  the  sirens.  Fortunately,  there  was  time  to  remedy  the 
problem. 

In  1964,  following  a  suit  won  by  State  Attorney  General  William  G.  Clark  in 
behalf  of  Lake  Forest  High  School,  the  school  district  received  $5,394.25.  The 
total  recovery  was  $244,894.21,  but  the  balance  was  tied  up  in  litigation.  The 
damage  suit  was  fought  at  no  cost  to  the  school  by  the  Attorney  General  in  co- 
operation with  the  Attorney  Generals  of  California,  Minnesota,  Michigan  and  Wis- 
consin. The  charge  was  that  six  leading  manufacturers  of  folding  gymnasium 
bleachers  set  a  price  ceiling  by  a  formula  trust.  Restrictions  were  not  put  on  the 
money.  The  high  school  was  allowed  to  use  it  for  anything. 

In  January  1964,  a  public  meeting  was  called  to  discuss  plans  of  a  new  school. 
The  president  of  the  school  board,  Paul  Bartolain,  stated  that  the  new  tax  levy  for 
the  school  would  only  add  $1.10  per  $1,000  house  market  value  of  assessed  evalua- 
tion to  the  taxes  (this  estimate  was  later  increased  to  $2.70  per  $1,000.  assessed 
valuation).  The  community  was  divided  into  those  who  were  in  favor  of  building  a 
new  school,  those  in  favor  of  adding  to  the  school  building  as  it  was,  and  those  few 
unconcerned  or  against  any  kind  of  addition. 

The  Lake  Forest  League  of  Women  Voters  voted  unanimously  to  support  the 
second  high  school.  They  formed  a  special  committee,  led  by  Mrs.  Jean  Ely,  to 
help  investigate  the  situation,  costs  and  needs.  The  executive  committee  of  the  Lake 
County  Civic  League,  though,  did  not  endorse  the  move  to  build  a  second  school. 
Their  argument  was  that  a  single  high  school  of  sixteen  hundred  students  was  sat- 
isfactory. The  League  suggested  instead  that  an  addition  to  the  old  high  school,  li- 
brary facilities  in  particular,  be  considered.  The  new  school  proposal  was  officially 
defeated  on  February  15,  1964,  by  a  ratio  of  5  to  2  (i.e.,  2,500  to  1,000).  In  late 
April,  the  A.  C.  Nielsen  Company  was  employed  to  survey  for  the  reasons  behind 
the  defeat  of  the  referendum.  It  was  found  that  36%  of  the  people  felt  they  knew 
too  little  to  vote  in  favor  of  the  resolution.  Later  referendums  were  preceded  by 
neighborhood  coffees  to  inform  the  people.  The  failure  is  also  attributed  to  the 
opposition  expressed  by  the  Lake  County  Civic  League. 

In  late  May,  the  Board  of  Education  developed  the  "Citizens'  Consulting 
Committee."  The  seven  original  members  were  Mr.  G.  Dangremond,  Mrs.  Joyce 
Ekdahl,  Mr.  A.  Glover,  Mr.  Gilbert  Hamblet,  Robert  Sanders,  Dr.  E.  Reichert, 
vice-president,  and  Robert  Schoulberg,  president.  This  committee  studied  and  re- 
viewed arguments  for  and  against  the  new  high  school.  These  arguments  are  listed 
at  the  end  of  this  chapter. 

On  January  2,  1965,  the  Board  of  Education  held  another  building  program 
meeting.  They  called  for  a  special  district  election  to  authorize  additions  and  im- 
provements to  the  current  school  building.  They  hoped  to  issue  $1,150,000  in  bonds 
for  payment.  As  before,  overcrowding  of  the  school  was  the  main  issue. 

65 


Intensive  campaigning  for  the  building  referendum  was  started  by  the  Citizen's 
Consulting  Committee.  Neighborhood  coffees  proved  very  successful  as  a  means  of 
informing  the  people.  The  Civic  League  encouraged  voting  the  program  into  opera- 
tion. The  tax  increase  would  be  only  $.75  per  $1,000  of  assessed  valuation.  A  new 
library  was  to  be  included  in  this  expansion. 

The  referendum  vote  took  place  on  February  13,  1965.  Two  major  additions 
to  increase  the  capacity  of  the  school  to  1,600  were  considered.  The  first  was  an 
expansion  program  to  build  on  the  current  site  a  library,  classrooms,  a  study  hall- 
cafeteria,  resource  rooms  and  a  gymnastics  gym.  Three  considerations  were  integrity 
of  design,  flexible  room  size,  and  a  minimum  of  interference  during  the  school  day 
when  the  construction  was  carried  out.  It  was  this  first  resolution  that  passed,  in  a 
vote  of  3  to  1.  The  voters  rejected  a  proposal  to  build  a  new  school  for  $12,955,000 
at  the  Waukegan-Westleigh  site.  Construction  of  the  addition  began  in  the  summer 
of  1965,  to  be  finished  by  the  fall  term  of  1966. 

On  April  29,  1965,  the  Board  of  Education  re-established  the  Citizen's  Con- 
sulting Committee  to  aid  the  Board  in  studying  the  problems  caused  by  a  boom  in 
student  enrollment.  The  renewed  committee  was  made  up  of  twenty  citizens  with 
different  backgrounds  from  different  parts  of  Lake  Forest.  Committee  members  were 
required  to  have  an  interest  in  the  building  proposals,  and  to  acknowledge  the  im- 
portance of  education.  The  committee  met  fifteen  times  between  May,  1965,  and 
November,  1966,  for  two  hour  sessions. 

The  Board  chose  Orput  and  Associates,  Inc.,  an  architectural  firm  in  Rockford, 
as  the  professional  consultant  to  prepare  preliminary  estimates  of  the  cost  of  ex- 
panding the  facilities.  This  architectural  firm  had  originally  been  named  to  design 
the  proposed  Waukegan-Westleigh  Rd.  School. 

One  proposal,  made  to  the  Board  of  Education,  was  for  a  four  story  block 
addition  to  the  building  in  the  east  courtyard,  which  was  designed  to  leave  thirty  to 
thirty-five  feet  of  open  space  on  three  sides.  This  proposal,  which  did  not  violate 
any  building  codes,  was  turned  down.  It  was  thought  too  extravagant,  and  the  board 
said  the  seven  thousand  square  feet  would  not  be  adequate  in  future  times. 

Finally,  Halsey  Stuart  &  Co.,  Inc.,  Goldman,  Sachs  &  Co.,  A.  G.  Becker  & 
Co.,  Inc.,  and  William  Blair  &  Co.  were  named  by  the  Board  of  Education  as  suc- 
cessful bidders  for  the  $1,150,000,  bond  issue  at  an  interest  rate  of  3.0025%  over 
twenty  years.  The  money  for  the  building  additions  was  to  be  prorated  as  follows: 
$50,000  per  year  from  1966  to  1982  and  $100,000  from  1983  to  1985.  An  average 
of  $.07  per  $100  assessed  valuation  came  into  effect.  The  charge  was  approximately 
$17.50  per  square  foot  —  with  no  landscaping,  no  black- topping,  and  incomplete 
heating  for  the  additions.  (In  comparison,  Deerpath  School  cost  $14.50  per  square 
foot.)  And  the  additions  were  built. 

Through  all  of  this  —  the  expansion  of  the  school  by  people  interacting  as  well 
as  its  expansion  by  bricks  and  cement  —  the  community  stood  behind  the  school. 
This  was  an  important  part  of  its  success.  As  stated  in  the  Lake  Forester  of  July 
28,  1960,  "To  survive,  man  must  be  better  educated.  The  community  believes  that 
Lake  Forest  High  School  does  a  terrific  job." 

APPENDIX 

Arguments  for  the  addition  to  the  present  site 

(1)  More  centrally  located  for  the  present  population. 

(2)  Many  people  like  the  idea  of  one  school  —  one  campus. 

(3)  The  idea  of  a  larger  school  appeals  to  some. 

(4)  More  economic  use  of  the  present  site  (although  the  committee  realizes 
much  of  the  "unused"  land  is  used  by  the  P.E.  department). 

66 


(5)  More  economic  because  the  present  core  facilities  would  be  used  and  per- 
sonnel would  not  be  duplicated. 

(6)  Improvement  of  present  facilities  —  for  example,  the  library. 

Arguments  for  the  new  site 

(1)  Site  would  be  centrally  located  for  the  future  population  growth. 

(2)  Design  could  be  unique  and  not  as  limited  as  the  present  site  is. 

(3)  More  flexibility  would  result  from  a  larger  site. 

(4)  The  noise  and  confusion  —  resulting  from  the  construction  —  would  not 
affect  those  in  school. 

(5)  Construction  would  reduce  the  possibility  of  over-building  on  the  present 
site. 

(6)  The  "new"  school  could  first  be  used  for  the  ninth  graders  and  then  later 
expanded  to  a  separate  four  year  school. 

Main  cause  for  discussion 

The  present  enrollment  of  the  school  in  1964  was  1,154.  The  present  building 
was  designed  for  1,200.  In  1967,  there  was  an  estimated  increase  to  1,500  and 
in  1973—2,000  students. 

What  the  Citizen's  Consulting  Committee  Decided 

The  cost  of  the  building  was  not  to  exceed  $1,150,000  —  which  would  be 
financed  by  bonds.  When  further  facilities  were  needed,  building  would  be 
done  at  the  second  site.  That  another  referendum  would  be  necessary  in  four 
or  five  years  was  realized.  This  proposal  was  unanimously  recommended  by 
the  full  committee.  The  advantages  of  the  proposal  were: 

(1)  The  present  site  would  be  developed  to  the  full  recommendation  of  the 
professional  architectural  opinion. 

(2)  A  contraction  of  largely  unused  space  would  result  —  while  at  the  same 
time  preserving  the  other  needed  areas  (i.e.,  room  for  outdoor  gym  class- 
es). 

(3)  The  aesthetic  quality  of  the  school  would  be  preserved. 

(4)  The  proposal  would  reduce  the  number  of  "unplanned  small  classes  to  a 
degree." 

(5)  The  number  of  temporary  empty  classrooms  would  be  increased  when  the 
move  to  the  second  school  would  take  place. 

(6)  Expansion  to  the  second  site  would  be  delayed  for  a  period  of  time  to 
provide  for  a  growth  of  population  to  the  area  where  the  second  site 
would  be  central. 

(7)  The  proposal  foresees  a  maximum  enrollment  of  1,600  students  at  the 
present  site,  and  the  Board  recommends  the  second  site  as  the  next  step 
to  provide  for  future  enrollment. 

Also  part  of  Committee  Recommendations: 

(1)  Classrooms  for  400  students. 

(2)  Enlarged  gym  and  cafeteria. 

(3)  A  new  library  addition. 

(4)  Conversion  of  the  old  library  into  classrooms. 

(5)  Cost  not  a  major  factor  —  any  savings  at  present  site  would  only  be  a 
postponement  of  eventual  costs. 

67 


Campus  Changes 
(Plant) 


m 


During  the  school  years  beginning  with  1960-61  and  extending  through  1964- 
65,  the  overall  plant  of  Lake  Forest  High  School  was  not  changed  radically.  Certain 
completions,  alterations,  and  improvements  were  made,  but  for  the  most  part,  the 
high  school  had  entered  into  a  five  year  "resting  period."  Prior  to  this  hiatus,  in 
1958,  additions  began  for  the  north  wing  which  consisted  of  the  boys'  gym  and 
industrial  education  classrooms,  and  the  south  wing  which  included  the  auditorium, 
science  labs,  art,  craft,  music,  and  general  classrooms.  Also  the  girls'  locker  room 
and  the  home  economics  room  underwent  remodeling.  The  end  of  this  five  year 
period  was  marked  by  the  beginning  of  construction  of  the  annex  section  in  1965- 
1966.  Until  recently,  the  students  used  the  front  door  in  the  1960's  —  and  the 
front  door  was  not  used  by  anyone  other  than  the  administration,  faculty,  and 
visitors. 

The  outside  of  the 
Jot  school     (building     and 

grounds),  was  much  the 
same  in  the  early  sixties  as 
it  is  today,  with  of  course, 
the  exception  of  the  addi- 
tion of  the  annex  in  1966 
and  the  gymnastics  gym. 
There  was  faculty  and  visi- 
tor parking  in  front  of  the 
building  and  student  park- 
ing in  the  area  behind  and 
to  the  east  of  the  building. 
The  entrance  and  exit  of 
the  parking  lot  were  by 
roadways  east  of  the  build- 
ing— the  roadway  south  of 
the  auditorium  was  not  to 
be  used.  The  architecture  of 
the  building  included  seven 
chimneys  visible  from  the 
outside,  one  of  which  was, 
and  is  still  usable  (room 
219).  In  1962  it  was  neces- 
sary to  reinforce  the  large 
chimney  with  steel  bands.  Concerning  the  athletic  fields,  several  improvements  were 
made  within  the  five  years  under  consideration.  In  1961-62,  a  service  building  with 
washrooms  was  built  on  the  outskirts  of  the  playing  field  by  the  entrance,  and  the 
rifle  range  was  completed.  In  1962-63  the  bog  around  the  athletic  field  entrance 
gate  was  paved  and  paved  runways,  new  sand  pits,  cement  slab  dicus  and  shot-put 
throwing  areas  were  added.  Until  1963-64  the  bleachers  were  much  smaller  than 
they  are  at  the  present  and  there  were  no  sheds,  concession  stands,  etc.  beneath  the 
bleachers.  Property  north  of  the  high  school,  which  was  originally  set  aside  for 
parking  and  athletic  facilities  and  had  previously  been  used  as  a  nature  study  area 

68 


Laying  the  foundation  for  the  1966  annex. 


4 


P. 


1966:  Revamping  the  Second  Floor  hallway. 


for  biology  students,  was  sold  by  the  board  in  1961.  Mr.  Joseph  Sasso,  the  super- 
visor of  the  building  and  grounds,  along  with  several  other  members  of  the  mainte- 
nance staff,  kept  the  high  school  in  a  highly  functional  condition  by  allowing  for 
working  towards  alterations  and  improvements. 

At    almost    the    same 

time  in  1962  that  the  school 

I  board   decided   to  sell   the 

property  north  of  the  high 

school,    it    was    announced 

that  the  Board  was  seeking 

a  site  for  a  new  high  school. 

The    Board    of    Education 

obtained    an    option    on    a 

piece   of  property  in   west 

Lake  Forest  on  Waukegan 

Road.  And  in  May  of  1962 

the  site  of  over  50  acres 

was   purchased  for   $150,- 

000.  A  rise  in  enrollment 

(an  increase  of  more  than 

100  students  per  year),  was 

the  instigating  factor  in  this. 

In    1963    the    high    school 

Board  announced  Orput 

and  Associates  of  Rockford 

as  the  architects  to  design 

the  proposed  second  high  school.  If  the  bond  passed  (the  first  referendum  being 

February  15,  1964),  the  school  would  be  built  on  a  fifty-three  acre  site  on  the  west 

side  of  Waukegan  Road,  a  quarter  mile  south  of  Route  59 A  (what  is  now  Route 

60).  At  its  opening,  the  $2,955,000  high  school  would  house  100  freshman  and 

sophomore  students  and  eventually  1,200  students.  It  would  have  a  total  square 

footage  of  174,127  sq.  ft.  Opinions  on  whether  a  new  high  school  was  necessary 

were  varied.  Other  alternatives  offered  included  adding  to  the  present  high  school, 

selling  the  old  high  school  and  building  an  entirely  new  one  off  Waukegan  Road. 

The  February  referendum  was  defeated  so  John  Maloney  (administrative  assistant), 

made  plans  to  form  a  citizens'  committee  which  would  work  towards  getting  people 

to  vote  for  the  new  school  in  another  referendum. 

Upon  entering  the  front  door  anytime  during  the  five  years  under  consideration, 
there  was  a  table  for  student  monitors  behind  the  senior  star.  Lighting  was  supplied 
by  a  gold  metal  octagonal  light  fixture,  which  had  the  appearance  of  a  wheel  with 
white  glass  between  the  "spokes"  and  which  hung  very  close  to  the  ceiling.  In  the 
later  sixties,  a  senior  class  presented  the  school  with  a  cubic  clock  which  replaced 
the  octagonal  fixture.  Tn  this  area,  as  in  all  of  the  old  sections  of  the  building,  the 
brown  "battleship"  linoleum  laid  in  1935  was  replaced  in  1962  with  new  tile.  North 
of  the  senior  star,  the  girls'  gym  and  administrative,  guidance,  and  the  dean's  offices 
were  located.  Until  1964  there  were  half-moon  shaped  murals  over  the  inside  doors 
of  the  girl's  gym  foyer.  Also,  as  is  true  now,  there  were  pay  phones  in  the  lobbies 
of  the  boys'  gym,  girls'  gym  and  in  the  auditorium  foyer.  In  regard  to  office  space, 
what  is  now  Mr.  Maloney's  office  was  the  Health  and  Attendance  Office  until  1962- 
63.  At  the  beginning  of  this  school  year  Mrs.  Bill's  Health  Center  and  Attendance 
Office  moved  to  basement  of  the  south  wing  to  provide  space  for  boys'  and  girls' 
recovery  rooms.  In  1962-63  the  old  Health  Center  was  transformed  into  an  office 
for  Mr,  Maloney  and  the  guidance  counselors,  although  the  whirl  pool  bath  used  in 

J 
69 


the  Health  Center  was  not  removed  until  the  middle  of  the  1963-64  school  year. 
Across  the  hall  from  the  dean's  office  in  those  years,  was  one  of  the  school's  two 
elevators  (the  other  being  used  to  transport  towels  from  the  boys'  locker  room).  In 
the  hallway  next  to  the  girls'  gym,  lockers  and  doorways  leading  to  the  balcony  of 
the  girl's  gym  are  located.  On  the  South  side  of  the  hallway,  there  are  doors  leading 
to  the  swimming  pool,  which  despite  the  reports  throughout  the  years  has  not  yield- 
ed documented  evidence  for  stories  of  icebergs  and  dead  horses.  As  a  matter  of 
fact,  the  pool  received  the  highest  rating  given  by  the  state  testing  station  in  Spring- 
field in  1960-61.  The  pool  was  and  still  is  checked  three  times  a  day,  vacuumed 
and  filtered  each  week,  and  a  temperature  of  76-78  degrees  was  maintained.  At  the 
end  of  this  same  hallway,  doors  led  into  the  industrial  arts  area  (wood  shop  and 
drafting  room,  etc.).  The  area  was  divided  into  two  sections,  a  classroom  and  the 
actual  shop  with  equipment,  divided  by  large  glass  picture  window.  On  the  front 
wall  of  the  classroom  there  was,  and  still  exists,  a  mural  done  with  pastels  on  can- 
vas or  burlap  which  depicted  shop  activities.  The  shop  itself  is  composed  of  the 
main  floor  and  its  machinery,  where  the  Forest  Scout  was  printed  on  an  offset  press 
in  1962-63,  and  a  balcony  reached  via  a  metal  stairway. 

South  of  the  senior  star,  the  Civics  room  (113-115)  with  kitchen  and  stage, 
English  classrooms,  and  the  auditorium  were  located.  In  the  hall  running  east  and 
west  next  to  the  auditorium  there  were  English  and  art  classrooms.  Unique  to  all  of 
the  classrooms  and  certainly  uncommon  in  many  high  schools  were  a  two  way  pub- 
lic address  system  and  ultra  violet  lights  (see  monograph). 

Important  to  the  efficient  control  of  the  mechanical  systems  of  the  high  school 
is  the  boiler  room,  composed  of  an  upper  and  lower  room.  The  upper  boiler  room 
backs  to  the  swimming  pool  and  until  1968  or  so  it  housed  three  filters  for  the  pool. 
Presently  the  lower  boiler  room  contains  three  six-foot  metal  tank  filters  for  the 
pool.  These  filters  are  filled  with  sand  and  stones  and  a  one  hour  reverse  flush  filter 
process  is  used.  Also  now  located  in  this  area  is  a  bromine  pot,  checked  four  times 
daily,  which  puts  bromine  into  the  pool.  Presently  there  are  three  oil  boilers  and 
one  gas  boiler.  The  gas  boiler  and  the  back  part  of  the  lower  boiler  room  were  not 
added  until  1966-67. 

Proceeding  to  the  basement,  the  majority  of  the  space  was  filled  by  the  rela- 
tively new  cafeteria  which  was  completed  in  about  1960.  The  annex  section  was  not 
present  during  the  years  1960-61  to  1964-65  so  there  was  only  one  cafeteria,  how- 
ever by  1960-61  new  cafeteria  lines  were  finished  and  put  into  use.  To  the  north 
of  the  main  entrance  of  the  cafeteria  were  cubby  holes  along  the  halls  in  which  stu- 
dents put  their  books  while  they  ate.  To  the  south  of  the  main  entrance  of  the  cafe- 
teria, the  east  west  hall  contained  the  Health  Center  and  Attendance  Office,  a 
mirrored  study  hall,  (room  15),  and  the  band  room  at  the  end  of  a  small  north- 
south  hall  branching  off  the  main  hall.  In  areas  which  were  below  ground  level,  but 
which  were  not  a  part  of  the  main  basement  area  there  were  several  small  rooms 
used  for  various  purposes. 

Until  the  completion  of  the  annex  section,  the  second  floor  housed  the  academic 
departments  as  well  as  the  business  education  department.  The  east-west  hallway 
at  the  north  end  of  the  second  floor  contained  the  home  economics  room,  with  a 
display  case  and  several  other  history  rooms.  Prior  to  the  addition  of  the  science 
wing  in  1958,  these  rooms,  with  the  exception  of  the  home  economics  room,  had 
been  large  science  rooms  with  cubby  holes  in  the  walls  for  biological  models.  In 
1958,  partitions  were  put  in,  forming  rooms  230  and  232  from  one  room,  and 
rooms  226  and  228  from  one  room.  Room  227  which  is  located  at  the  very  end  of 
the  north-south  hall  on  the  second  floor,  used  to  be  the  boys'  club  room.  However, 
in  the  early  sixties  until  1966  it  was  the  business  room,  and  now  it  is  the  typing 

70 


room.  Also  in  the  early  sixties  math  rooms  and  additional  English  rooms  were  lo- 
cated in  the  second  floor  main  corridor.  Rooms  213  and  215,  complete  with  sky- 
lights, were  combined  as  a  large  history  room  when  the  school  first  opened  but  by 
the  sixties  partitions  had  been  put  in  and  the  room  which  retained  the  skylights  was 
used  during  this  time  period  as  a  faculty  workroom  and  cubby  holes  in  the  walls 
contained  busts  of  Shakespeare  and  Longfellow.  Of  course  the  recently  constructed 
science  wing  served  the  same  purpose  in  those  years  as  it  does  today.  On  the  walls 
of  the  hallways,  in  between  classrooms,  there  were  lockers  and  due  to  the  increas- 
ing number  of  students,  178  new  lockers  were  installed  on  the  second  floor  alone  in 
1962.  Also  the  north  end  of  the  second  floor  there  was  a  junior-senior  bulletin 
board  which  was  a  useful  means  of  disseminating  pertinent  vocational  and  educa- 
tional material.  Other  bulletin  boards  were  located  strategically  throughout  the 
building. 

With  the  exception  of  the  annex  section,  the  high  school  plant  in  the  early 
sixties  was  very  similar  to  the  plant  in  1972.  The  annex,  eventually  came  to  be  the 
home  of  the  math  department  on  the  third  floor,  a  collection  of  English  and  perhaps 
a  few  History  classrooms  on  the  second  floor,  a  much  enlarged  library  on  the  first 
floor,  and  a  new  cafeteria  and  tape  lab  in  the  basement.  Up  until  1966  the  facilities 
were  remarkably  up-dated  and  efficient,  however  in  1966  the  badly  needed  annex 
was  inevitably  constructed.  In  all,  the  organization  of  the  LFHS  plant  (though 
wobbly  at  times  between  major  additions),  made  possible  the  comfortable,  well- 
lighted  classrooms,  for  good  learning  facilities  and  a  conducive  atmosphere. 


The  Regis  Toomey  Fan  Club 
(Faculty) 

In  1962-1963  Lake  Forest  High  School  was  extremely  college-oriented.  The 
United  States  apparently  needed  more  trained  people  after  the  Sputnik  provocation, 
so  college  preparation  was  highly  emphasized.  Students  were  expected  to  take  five 
solids  and  any  variations  to  the  school  day  were  unheard  of.  Due  to  its  "specializa- 
tion" in  college  planning,  as  seen  through  the  "academic  push,"  and  extensive  pro- 
grams comparable  to  our  College  Night,  Lake  Forest  High  School  was  described  as 
a  prestige  school.  Several  articles,  extremely  favorable  to  the  system  of  LFHS  and 
also  enticing  to  would-be  teachers,  found  their  way  into  the  Lake  Forester.  Many 
of  these  were  written  by  Mr.  John  Maloney,  and  there  is  a  possibility  of  some  cen- 
sorship of  articles  written  by  other  faculty  members  which  revealed  unfavorable 
aspects  concerning  the  high  school. 

The  total  number  of  students  and  faculty  members  at  the  high  school  was 
about  the  same  as  the  number  of  students  and  faculty  who  opened  the  East  Campus 
in  1971.  The  student- teacher  ratio,  somewhere  near  1  to  20,  is  close  to  today's 
ratio. 

71 


Nowadays,  new  teachers  are  hired  primarily  for  replacements.  However,  in 
the  sixties,  they  were  often  hired  as  needed  additions  to  the  staff.  A  bachelor's  de- 
gree was  required  for  acceptance  as  a  faculty  member  at  the  high  school.  Most 
women  teachers  taught  English;  men  generally  taught  math,  science,  and  history. 

It  was  during  the  sixties  that  the  guidance  department  became  important.  In 
the  early  part  of  this  period,  each  teacher — in  addition  to  regular  classes — was  re- 
quired to  be  the  head  of  a  session.  These  sessions  were  like  small  guidance  groups, 
but  were  disliked  by  both  the  teachers  and  the  students.  The  sessions  (later  called 
homerooms)  became  less  important  and  were  finally  abandoned  in  1971. 

The  teachers  also  were  not  in  favor  of  the  six  week  grading  period.  They  felt 
that  it  was  too  much  of  a  burden  to  complete  grades  and  send  them  home  every  six 
weeks  throughout  the  school  year. 

Although  Dr.  Moore  was  on  the  payroll  until  spring,  Dr.  Clyde  N.  Carter  be- 
came the  acting  superintendent  of  Lake  Forest  High  School  in  1959-1960.  Carter, 
thirty-one  years  old  and  formerly  the  assistant  superintendent,  seemed  to  be  liked, 
but  not  well  known.  He  was  described  as  "very  proper,  very  smart — the  college 
president  type."  However,  he  was  quite  removed  from  the  students. 

Dr.  Carter  was  more  concerned  with  the  faculty,  administration,  and  board, 
reserving  the  actual  running  of  the  school  to  the  principal.  Once  a  month,  Dr.  Carter 
held  meetings  with  the  department  chairmen  which  served  to  provide  a  link  of  com- 
munication between  the  faculty  and  the  administration  and  to  help  coordinate  the 
various  facets  of  the  academic  program. 

Mr.  Simon  became  the  new  assistant  superintendent.  Because  there  was  no 
dean  as  yet,  Mr.  Simon  was  the  disciplinarian  and  thus  naturally  was  not  liked  by 
most  of  the  students.  Mr.  Simon  was  responsible  for  the  organization  and  adminis- 
tration of  summer  school.  During  the  main  school  year,  he  was  the  supervisor  of 
the  general  office  and  the  Student  Personnel  Center  (S.P.C.). 

The  guidance  department  was  called  the  S.P.C.  and  was  much  smaller  than  it 
is  today.  In  1962-63  John  C.  Maloney,  a  former  music  teacher,  was  the  director  of 
guidance.  The  counselors  at  this  time  were  Virginia  Beamer,  Helen  Cory,  and  a 
former  math  teacher,  Richard  O'Dair. 

The  sixties  saw  a  change  in  the  degree  of  specialization  of  teachers.  Several 
teachers  had  previously  taught  more  than  one  subject.  For  example,  some  English 
teachers  also  taught  a  foreign  language.  During  the  sixties,  this  practice  largely  dis- 
appeared, as  the  teachers  become  more  specialized. 

In  the  summer  of  1963  Dr.  Carter  resigned  as  superintendent  of  LFHS  and 
was  succeeded  by  Dr.  Robert  H.  Metcalf.  Dr.  Metcalf  came  to  Lake  Forest  from 
Rich  High  School  and  became  superintendent  in  October  of  1963. 

Several  people  on  the  faculty  have  had  different  jobs  within  the  school.  Rich- 
ard O'Dair  was  a  math  teacher,  later  became  a  counselor,  and  afterwards  became 
dean.  Helen  Cory,  a  former  Latin  teacher,  also  became  an  excellent  counselor. 
Albert  Buckowich  became  a  math  teacher  after  deciding  to  give  up  physical  educa- 
tion. (Although  he  is  still  involved  in  after-school  athletics).  Beau  Grubb  was  a 
business  education  teacher,  before  becoming  the  Audio-Visual  Director  and  At- 
tendance Officer.  Edgar  Lindenmeyer  was  very  much  involved  in  coaching  athletics, 
before  failing  health  required  that  he  be  put  in  charge  of  study  halls.  John  Maloney 
has  held  three  jobs  at  Lake  Forest  High  School.  He  has  been  a  music  teacher  and 
the  director  of  guidance,  before  recently  becoming  an  administrative  assistant. 

Except  for  the  hair  styles,  the  male  teachers'  clothing  has  changed  very  little 

72 


since  i960.  The  coats  all  had  narrow  lapels  and  the  shirts  were  almost  always  white 
with  narrow  ties  and  in  some  cases,  bow  ties.  In  1960  the  women  all  wore  their  hair 
short  with  long  skirts  and  dresses. 

As  in  every  type  of  job,  the  first-year  neophyte  teachers  were  given  the  less 
desirable  jobs.  The  more  experienced  faculty  stayed  out  of  the  new  teachers'  busi- 
ness unless  they  were  asked  to  help.  The  faculty  was  knowledgeable,  but  never 
boastful — an  attitude  which  seemed  to  be  preferable  to  that  of  other  schools. 

The  school  board  was  made  up  of  Ralph  Rawson,  President,  and  his  assistants 
Paul  Bartolain,  James  Cadlia,  Jacqueline  Smith,  Doris  Douglass,  Kenneth  Ward, 
and  Wayland  Cedarquist.  These  1961-62  school  board  members  were  involved  in 
the  determination  of  the  teachers'  salaries. 

The  Board  of  Education  was  jointly  feared  and  respected  by  the  members  of 
the  faculty.  It  was  considered  improper  for  the  teachers  to  question  a  board  decision 
or  negotiation,  or  to  go  to  a  board  meeting.  In  the  fall,  it  was  obligatory  for  teachers 
to  attend  a  Board  dinner  so  they  could  be  introduced  to  the  members  of  the  Board. 
Financed  by  the  taxpayers,  this  activity  consisted  of  a  receiving  line,  a  bar  open  for 
exactly  one  hour  before  the  meal,  dinner,  entertainment,  and  dancing.  The  Board 
obviously  had  the  greatest  control  and  influence  on  our  school  policy  at  the  time. 
The  Board  discouraged  the  use  of  extra  texts  and  emphasized  more  formalized  in- 
struction. Teachers  were  expected  to  only  get  through  the  necessary  curriculum,  so 
they  were  not  to  include  extras  such  as  current-affairs  discussions  in  social  studies 
classes.  Mr.  James  Gram  was  one  of  the  few  teachers  in  the  high  school  who  ven- 
tured to  discuss  current  events,  such  as  the  Cuban  missile  crises,  in  his  classroom. 
Also  as  part  of  the  dress  code,  men  teachers  were  instructed  to  wear  coat  and  ties, 
and  women  to  dress  modestly  and  in  good  taste. 

Formation  of  new  clubs  was  being  pushed  in  1962-63  because  membership 
in  certain  clubs  appeared  very  favorable  on  college  applications.  Usually  the  new 
teachers  were  assigned  the  most  club  duties  and  none  of  the  teachers — in  contrast 
to  the  coaches — were  paid  for  their  services.  Each  teacher  was  assigned  a  home- 
room of  approximately  twenty-five  students  and  was  somewhat  of  a  guidance  coun- 
selor for  these  students.  Each  homeroom  had  to  enter  a  float  in  the  Homecoming 
parade,  so  the  teachers  were  responsible  for  seeing  that  their  homeroom  constructed 
a  float.  Teachers  were  also  required  to  be  at  a  student  dance  at  least  once  a  year. 

There  was  no  defined  scale  for  pay.  There  was,  however,  a  confusing  merit 
system.  Teachers  were  told  whether  they  were  receiving  "merit  pay."  Because  they 
did  not  know  what  other  teachers  with  like  experience  were  getting,  they  could  not 
be  sure  they  actually  received  the  bonus.  Teachers  did  not  discuss  their  salaries, 
even  among  themselves,  so  they  never  knew  what  the  bonus  was  based  upon,  why 
they  got  the  bonus,  or  even  if  the  bonus  would  be  figured  into  the  next  paycheck. 

In  reality  LFHS  teachers  were  being  paid  less  than  teachers  of  surrounding 
schools,  but  due  to  the  lack  of  exchange  information,  they  were  unaware  of  this. 
Salaries  then  were  $4800-$5000  per  year  for  a  starting  teacher. 

Salaries  for  the  faculty  had  been  problematical  for  a  long  time;  from  the  be- 
ginning of  the  school  to  1962.  Up  until  this  time,  teachers'  salaries  were  arbitrary, 
according  to  the  superintendent's  discretion.  As  a  result,  many  inequities  developed. 
In  1962,  though,  all  of  this  ended  when  a  base  salary  schedule  was  drawn  up.  In- 
cluded in  this  schedule  was  salary  by  the  merit  system  whereby  a  teacher  could  re- 
ceive a  bonus  of  1,2,  or  3  percent  of  their  base  salary.  This  system  was  cumulative, 
each  year,  and,  according  to  Mr.  Don  Spooner,  if  a  teacher  worked  at  the  high 
school  long  enough,  it  was  possible  for  him  to  attain  a  60%  raise. 

73 


Members  of  the  faculty  were  more  or  less  in  charge  of  the  school  plays  and 
attended  the  cast  parties  as  participants  rather  than  as  chaperones.  In  1960-61  the 
students  at  one  of  the  cast  parties  were  celebrating  with  cokes  and  punch  in  one 
room,  while  the  faculty  was  in  another  room — where  liquor  was  allowed.  It  is 
rumored  that  this  party  got  a  little  out  of  hand. 

The  school  prom  in  1962-63  was  very  formal,  and  was  the  secene  of  a  sur- 
prising incident.  The  higher  members  of  the  administration  presided  over  a  recep- 
tion line  and  the  boys  were  expected  to  introduce  themselves  and  their  dates.  This 
particular  Prom  featured  Prom  King  Tim  Wiegel  arriving  at  the  formal  affair  in 
formal  shorts  and  long  black  socks. 

The  guidance  staff  in  1963-64  consisted  of  the  Director  of  Guidance,  Dr.  An- 
drew Tabasco,  and  guidance  counselors,  Virginia  Jensen,  Helen  M.  Cory,  Ronald 
J.  Steinke  (Junior  Counselor),  and  Gordon  White  (Senior  Counselor).  Andrew  To- 
basco  was  new  this  year,  replacing  Mr.  Maloney  who  became  administrative  as- 
sistant. Both  Gordon  White  and  Ronald  Steinke  were  also  new,  Mr.  Steinke  replaced 
Richard  O'Dair  who  became  Dean  of  Students.  Mr.  Steinke  also  became  head  of  a 
new  job  replacement  service  within  the  school  . 

Several  individual  faculty  members  contributed  greatly  to  the  LFHS  program. 
Beside  the  athletic  coaches,  and  club  advisors,  were  many  teachers  who  helped  to 
change  the  school  policy  toward  curriculum. 

Mr.  Stanley  Harrison  (in  the  Art  Department)  and  Mr.  Herrmann  in  Industrial 
Arts  were  very  much  involved  in  the  morale  of  their  students  when  the  students 
were  disdained  for  their  "trivial"  studies  during  the  "academic  push"  period.  Mr. 
Harrison  entered  several  of  his  students'  works  in  the  National  Art  Award  Contest. 

Mr.  Bogart  had  hopes  of  creating  a  music  room  where  students  could  listen  to 
recordings  after  school  and  take  them  out  overnight.  Mr.  Lawlor — who  introduced 
the  orally-taught  foreign  language  concept  to  LFHS,  when  he  brought  a  tape  re- 
corder into  the  classroom  in  1952 — started  a  Portuguese  class  in  1962-63. 

One  of  the  most  popular  teachers  was  Mrs.  Thorne-Thomsen,  who  taught 
freshman  and  sophomore  English.  Her  classes  were  equivalent  to  the  present  crea- 
tive writing  classes.  She  left  the  faculty  after  her  son's  death  in  Vietnam.  Perhaps 
the  pupil-overload  in  her  classes  was  another  contributing  factor  in  her  resignation. 


Have  Pass,  Can  Travel 
(Students) 

Lake  Forest  High  School  began  to  change  more  noticeably  in  the  1960's.  Stu- 
dents turned  out-ward  for  information  and  amusement.  Mass-media  made  them 
more  aware  of  politics  and  the  world  outside  the  Chicago  suburbs.  The  age  of  rebel- 
lion was  coming,  and  while  LFHS  teenagers  cannot  be  called  revolutionaries,  the 
studies  of  the  sixties  began  breaking  out  of  the  traditions  and  attitudes  common 
among  their  predecessors. 

74 


As  student-horizons  broadened,  so  did  the  student  population  at  Lake  Forest 
High.  Between  1959  and  1960,  enrollment  jumped  from  736  students  to  1,027. 
With  this  increase,  came  the  necessity  to  enforce  rules  more  strictly.  LFHS  lost  the 
big  family  atmosphere  of  its  early  years  to  a  larger  community  of  students,  held  in 
check  by  regulations  and  the  overriding  principle  (no  pun  intended)  of  trying  to 
teach  responsibility. 

Detentions  were  still  given  liberally,  and  students  were  not  allowed  into  the 
building  if  not  wearing  what  the  dress  code  defined  as  "suitable  school  clothing." 
This  entailed  neat  shirts  tucked  into  pants,  shoes,  socks  and  hair  cut  to  a  specific 
length  for  boys.  Girls  were  to  wear  dresses  or  blouses  and  skirts  that  did  not  reveal 
too  much  and  reached  within  a  certain  range  of  the  knees.  There  was  to  be  no 
smoking  or  drinking  on  campus,  no  walking  on  the  grass  or  running  in  the  halls. 
Students  were  not  allowed  to  share  their  lockers,  which  were  to  be  kept  neat  and 
clean,  as  they  were  inspected  periodically. 

The  pass  system  was  in  full  operation  at  this  time  in  the  school's  history.  It 
had  almost  developed  into  a  science.  Pink  passes,  indicating  the  student's  name, 
the  time,  room  numbers  and  teachers  involved,  were  used  by  teachers  to  admit  a 
student  to  class  or  send  him  to  another  room.  Blue  passes,  with  basically  the  same 
information,  were  used  by  the  administration  to  call  a  student  out  of  class,  or  as 
written  permission  to  leave  the  school  grounds  for  a  doctor's  appointment,  etc. 
Students  who  lived  within  a  certain  distance  of  the  school  were  given  permanent 
passes  allowing  them  to  walk  home  for  lunch.  If  a  student  wanted  to  bring  a  guest 
to  the  school,  he  was  required  to  furnish  a  visitors  pass,  obtainable  at  the  office. 
Large,  usually  wooden  objects  were  used  as  permanent  passes  out  of  study  halls. 
One  of  these  was  given  to  a  student  who  wished  to  go  to  the  bathroom,  and  returned 
to  the  teacher  when  he  came  back.  Needless  to  say,  these  were  not  very  subtle. 

Another  restriction  which  was  strictly  enforced  was  the  proper  use  of  the 
school  staircases.  The  south  staircase  was  to  be  used  by  up  traffic  only,  and  the 
north  staircase  for  traffic  going  down.  Monitors  were  stationed  on  the  stairs  during 
school  hours  to  see  that  this  was  followed. 

In  the  early  1960's,  the  city  curfew  law  was  imposed  on  students  also.  This 
stated  that  all  students  under  18  were  to  stay  out  only  until  10:30  on  week  nights, 
and  until  12:00  on  weekends. 

Homerooms  had  now  officially  replaced  the  "sessions"  of  earlier  years.  Stu- 
dents in  each  class  were  divided  alphabetically  into  groups  of  20  to  25,  regardless 
of  sex.  Once  a  week,  these  homerooms  met  for  administrative  purposes,  class  ac- 
tivities, student  council  reports  and  group  counseling.  The  other  four  days  per  week, 
this  homeroom  period  was  used  as  a  supervised  study  hall,  or  for  those  students 
with  high  grades  and  a  "sense  of  responsibility,"  an  honor  study  hall  by  themselves. 

In  1960,  three  professional  guidance  counselors  took  over  what  had  once 
been  the  homeroom  teacher's  responsibility — advising  students  in  their  problems 
and  future  plans.  Helen  Cory,  Richard  O'Dair  and  John  Maloney  conducted  the 
weekly  group  counseling  sessions  and  offered  individual  advice  as  well.  In  the 
freshman  year,  guidance  was  formally  directed  toward  helping  students  adjust  to 
high  school  life.  For  sophomores,  the  emphasis  was  placed  on  students'  social  de- 
velopment, and  in  the  junior  and  senior  years,  on  vocational  and  college  planning. 
Student  Council  was  still  prestigous  in  the  early  1960's.  Candidates  were  chosen  in 
primaries,  and  then  in  final  elections.  Extensive  campaigning,  complete  with  slo- 
gans, posters,  buttons  and  speeches  preceded  elections  for  Council  officers.  Alter- 
nates were  chosen  also,  but  were  only  allowed  to  speak  in  meetings  after  asking 
permission. 

75 


Council  members  were  required  to  maintain  a  3.0  grade  average,  and  were 
sometimes  asked  to  discuss  discipline  problems  with  the  homerooms  they  repre- 
sented. Mr.  O'Dair  explained  that  if  Joel  Eiserman  and  Sue  Harrington,  Council 
President  and  Vice  President  in  1960-1961,  asked  students  to  quit  smoking  in  the 
washroom  or  to  pick  up  their  garbage,  it  was  done — no  problem.  Council  members 
were  respected  and  often  envied,  then. 

In  1961-1962,  junior  Jeff  Shields,  LFHS  Council  Treasurer,  ran  for  president 
of  the  Student  Council  district.  With  the  help  of  Caroline  Smiley  and  Wayne  Wheel- 
er, who  led  his  campaign,  Jeff  won  the  election  and  presided  over  all  meetings  of 
the  Northeast-Northwest  District,  which  included  more  than  200  high  schools.  He 
also  represented  the  district  at  state  and  national  Student  Council  conventions. 

Instituted  during  these  years  was  an  annual  parking  safety  check  conducted  by 
Student  Council  members.  They  inspected  all  cars  in  the  school  lot  to  see  that  they 
were  safe  and  that  all  mechanical  parts  were  in  working  order.  If  their  cars  passed 
the  inspection,  students  were  issued  LFHS  stickers  to  be  pasted  onto  the  front 
windshield.  Cars  were  required  to  have  stickers  to  park  in  the  school  lot,  and  this 
was  checked  by  an  attendant  daily. 

Despite  these  many  restrictions,  Lake  Forest  students  were  active  and  basically 
happy  during  this  period  of  time.  School  activities  were  more  popular  and  more 
numerous  than  ever  before.  Forest  Scout,  the  literary  magazine  Young  Idea,  and 
the  yearbook,  Forest  Trails  were  still  influential  and  provided  a  place  for  student 
self-expression  and  a  record  for  years  to  come.  G.A.A.,  Guppies,  Orchesis,  History 
Club,  Pep  Club,  Drama  Club  and  other  organizations  carried  over  into  the  sixties 
from  earlier  years  at  LFHS.  Then,  a  new  club  for  film  study,  ComCinArt  offered 
students  a  film  festival  each  week,  bringing  such  favorites  as  "Pillow  Talk,"  "This 
Is  Russia,"  "Tammy  and  the  Bachelor"  and  "Oliver  Twist"  to  the  Lake  Forest 
High  School  screen. 

Dances  were  held  regularly  in  this  era.  Sock  hops  after  football  and  basketball 
games  were  "big,"  and  admission  was  usually  a  quarter.  These  were  held  in  the  girls' 
gym,  and  though  live  music  was  featured,  records  were  played  too. 

Larger,  more  important  dances  included  Christmas  Capers,  sponsored  by 
Cellar  (see  monograph),  Turnabout,  Senior  Hop  and  Junior  Prom.  Proms  were 
generally  larger  and  more  spectacular  year  after  year,  with  themes  ranging  from 
"Idylls  of  the  Sea"  to  "Bali  Hai."  To  these  dances,  girls  wore  sleeveless,  strapless 
gowns  with  flowers  in  their  hair,  or  carried  nosegays.  Boys  wore  traditional  tuxedos, 
adorned  with  carnations  and  buttonneers. 

For  regular  school  days,  students  wore  short  hair  and  madras  shirts  and  skirts. 
Boys  wore  extra  tight  levis,  after  the  fashion  of  Elvis  Presley,  and  white  socks.  Girls 
seldom  wore  nylon  stockings  to  school,  but  usually  knee  socks  with  penny  loafers. 
Kilts  were  the  most  popular  skirts,  and  usually  ended  about  mid-knee. 

Because  of  the  dress  code,  girls  were  not  allowed  to  wear  pants  or  culottes, 
however  for  after  school  wear,  stretch  pants  were  quite  popular.  Boys  donned 
surfer  tee-shirts  when  they  got  home  from  school.  All  types  of  sweaters  were  "in": 
V-necks,  crewneck  and  cardigans,  with  just  three  or  four  buttons  at  the  bottom  but- 
toned. Mohair  sweaters  were  long-time  favorites  with  girls  of  the  early  1960's.  For 
jewelry,  they  wore  simple  circle  pins  at  the  collars  of  their  white  blouses. 

Blonde  hair  was  also  popular  during  this  time,  and  it  was  surprising  how  large 
a  proportion  of  the  LFHS  girls  were  "blondes." 

It  was  very  "in,"  in  the  early  1960's,  to  walk  up-town  after  school.  Students 
often  bought  snacks  on  the  way  at  Cohn's  market,  at  the  corner  of  McKinley  Road 
and  Woodland,  before  going  on  to  Grant  and  Grant's  music  store  to  listen  to  records 

76 


in  the  back  room.  Krafft's  drug  store  and  soda  fountain  was  also  a  popular  "spot"  for 
cokes  and  french  fries  after  school.  Baskin  and  Robbins  ice  cream  store  was  fre- 
quented, too. 

The  rock  and  roll  era  was  in  full  swing  at  this  time.  Students  twisted  and 
jerked  to  Elvis  Presley  and  the  Beach  Boys,  bought  record  albums  like  never  before 
and  made  the  decibels  dance  on  their  elders  eardrums.  And  suddenly,  the  Beatles 
appeared  and  changed  everything  students  thought  they  knew  about  music.  America 
witnessed  a  fan  craze  of  unprecedented  proportions.  Lake  Forest  High  School  stu- 
dents, while  not  as  carried  away  perhaps  as  the  average  high  school  student  body, 
was  caught  up  in  the  new  wave  of  music. 

With  so  much  happen- 
ing in  the  outside  world, 
getting  homework  done  was 
a  serious  dilemma  for  stu- 
dents in  the  1960's.  The 
television  was  perhaps  the 
biggest  deterrent,  and  with 
Fabian  on  the  air  in  the 
early  part  of  this  era,  "it 
was  almost  impossible  to 
study." 

Later,  hospital  shows 
and  soap  operas  took  the 
place  of  "American  Band- 
stand" and  other  music- 
oriented  television  shows  in 
popularity  among  students. 
Ben  Casey  and  Dr.  Kildare 
were  current  "heartthrobs" 
of  LFHS  girls,  while  their  younger  brothers  and  sisters  preferred  "Leave  it  to 
Beaver"  and  "Lassie." 

Lake  Forest  High  School  had  already  established  its  name  as  a  fine  high 
school  by  the  1960's.  Excellence  was  evident  not  only  in  the  course  offerings  and 
academics,  but  also  extra-curricular  activities.  The  LFHS  music  department  had 
won  numerous  "superior"  ratings  in  local  and  state  contests.  Students  received 
"outstanding"  awards  in  the  district  Science  Fair  in  1965,  and  LFHS  dramatists 
earned  the  right  to  compete  in  several  state  contests. 

For  several  years  in  a  row,  students  from  LFHS  participated  in  "It's  Academ- 
ic" and  in  1965,  filmed  a  spot  on  CBS's  "Rebuttal"  television  program  by  suc- 
cessfully debating  "Resolved:  that  social  security  should  be  extended  to  include 
medical  care." 

Lake  Forest  High  School's  horizons  were  further  broadened  by  the  arrival  of 
foreign  exchange  students  in  1962-1963.  Mats  Janelid  came  from  Saffe,  Sweden 
this  first  year  to  stay  with  the  Barth  family.  He  was  welcomed  by  LFHS  students 
and  made  an  ex-officio  member  of  Student  Council,  a  tradition  that  was  to  be  fol- 
lowed for  all  other  exchange  students  to  come.  Mats  was  extremely  popular  and 
students  were  still  refering  to  him  a  year  after  he  went  back  to  Sweden. 

Two  more  exchange  students  came  to  Lake  Forest  High  the  next  year.  Terumi 
Kodama,  a  17-year  old  girl  from  Kyato,  Japan  was  sponsored  by  the  Methodist 
Youth  Fellowship  and  stayed  with  the  Sinclairs  of  Lake  Bluff.  Fausto  Enrique 
Noboa  I,  called  "Rick"  by  his  friends  at  LFHS  came  from  Quito,  Equador  and 
lived  with  the  Pickards  of  Lake  Bluff. 


The  "Cool  Cats":  Prom  1959. 


77 


Vijaya  Gorde  from  India  and  Mandel  Castenada  from  Mexico  joined  the  Lake 
Forest  High  School  student  body  in  1964-1965,  while  senior  John  Love  went  to 
live  with  a  family  in  Copenhagen,  Denmark. 

North  Shore  schools  had  a  reputation  for  excellence,  and  Lake  Forest  High 
contributed  in  large  part  to  this.  By  the  1960's,  between  80%  and  90%  of  its 
graduates  went  on  to  college — quite  a  record  for  a  school  which  had  started  out 
providing  an  education  for  the  children  of  local  servants. 

The  students  who  graduated  in  this  era  had  been  born  in  the  late  1940's  and 
early  1950's,  into  the  jubilance  and  economic  upswing  that  followed  the  war.  Un- 
like their  predecessors,  these  students  had  not  watched  their  parents  suffer  through 
the  Depression  and  had  not  felt  the  threat  of  World  War  II  themselves.  Until  1963, 
there  was  a  Kennedy  in  the  White  House  and  America  seemed  to  be  going  up  con- 
stantly. But  this  was  to  change. 

Perhaps  the  only  objection  that  could  have  been  raised  to  a  Lake  Forest  edu- 
cation was  that  it  painted  too  good  a  picture  of  the  world.  Looking  out  across  its 
wide  front  lawn  from  a  tree-lined,  white  stone  facade,  perhaps  LFHS  saw  things 
too  calmly.  ...  But  then,  a  high  school  is  not  a  separate  entity.  It  depends  on  news 
and  the  changing  political  scene  to  keep  its  education  fresh.  The  later  1960's  were 
tumultuous  and  loud  enough  to  waken  anyone  who  might  have  been  put  to  sleep  by 
Lake  Forest  High  School's  "peace." 

Actually,  the  high  schools'  effect  on  its  graduates  of  the  1960's  is  yet  to  be, 
and  perhaps  never  will  be,  fully  understood. 


Readin',  'Ritin',  'n  'Rithmitik 
(Curriculum  and 

Co-curricular  Activities) 

In  the  1960's,  Lake  Forest  High  School  experienced  extensive  growth  and 
change.  Its  curriculum,  as  well  as  the  co-curricular  activities,  became  more  relevant 
and  reflected  the  times.  The  world  had  achieved  vast  technological  advances  in  the 
fifties,  learning  many  new  ideas.  In  the  sixties  it  was  necessary  to  incorporate  this 
fresh  knowledge  and  teach  the  young  to  use  it.  That  was  the  challenge,  and  Lake 
Forest  High  School  accepted  it. 

Competition  became  an  important  factor  of  life  in  the  sixties.  The  high  school 
student  was  trained  with  this  in  mind,  particular  emphasis  being  placed  on  the  com- 
petition of  college.  The  purpose  of  education  was  to  expand  the  student's  view  of 
life.  The  goal  was  to  help  him  contemplate  and  envision  the  entire  world,  past, 
present,  and  future,  and  to  see  his  place  in  it. 

Schools  had  a  new  and  important  role,  but  change  was  required  before  they 

78 


could  accept  it.  There  was  a  needed  break  from  traditional  teaching.  Ideas,  instead 
of  fact,  were  soon  the  subject  matter.  Courses,  once  specialized,  were  expanded  to 
relate  to  many  subjects,  ultimately  to  current  events.  The  emphasis  changed  from 
teacher  taught  concepts  to  individual  inquiry  and  judgement.  Above  all,  the  student 
was  encouraged  to  explore  and  learn  through  his  own  efforts. 

Besides  updating  the  courses  and  fields  of  study,  new  audio-visual  aides  were 
acquired  to  further  classroom  experience.  These  included  phonographs  and  records, 
tapes  and  recorders,  movies  and  projectors,  filmstrips  and  viewers,  and  the  use  of 
the  opaque  projector  (this  machine  projects  the  image  from  an  ordinary  paper  onto 
an  entire  wall).  Ability  grouping  was  incorporated  to  make  teaching  even  more 
effective.  The  three  levels  were  regular  college-prep,  honors  (for  gifted  students),  and 
basic  (for  those  who  would  benefit  from  slower  courses).  In  the  English  department 
these  became:  remedial  reading,  regular,  honors,  and  advanced  placement.  From 
the  latter,  a  college  level  course,  students  could  earn  college  credit  if  they  passed 
the  Advanced  Placement  Exam. 

The  areas  that  became  most  important  in  the  sixties  were  science  and  mathe- 
matics. The  respective  departments  at  the  high  school  effectively  altered  their  pro- 
grams to  cover  more  extensively  the  advanced  material. 

In  the  Science  Department,  biology,  geology,  chemistry  and  physics  were  the 
principle  fields.  In  all  of  these,  there  was  great  emphasis  placed  on  keeping  the  text 
current  with  new  discoveries.  Biology  was  the  typical  freshman  course,  followed  by 
Botany-Zoology  or  Geology.  Physical  Science,  Biological  Research  (a  course  allow- 
ing the  student  to  pursue  his  own  topic  or  to  work  to  enter  the  state  science  fair), 
and  Chemistry  (with  a  background  in  math  required),  were  offered  to  the  juniors 
and  seniors.  Physics,  the  most  advanced  of  the  science  courses,  was  open  only  to 
seniors  who  had  an  extensive  background  in  math  and  a  knowledge  of  chemistry. 
This  program  of  courses  evolved  from  the  first  attempt  at  revising;  the  sciences  in 
September,  1965.  All  science  at  the  high  school  level  had  begun  with  Practical  and 
General  Science.  But  this  course  was  considered  a  mere  review  of  elementary  sci- 
ence and  was  dropped.  After  the  school  day,  there  was  more  science  available  when 
the  Science  Club  met  and  raised  their  monkeys,  turtles,  fish  and  spiders.  For  those 
interested  in  aeronautics,  there  was  also  the  Flight  Club,  featuring  lectures  and  fly- 
ing experiences. 

The  Math  Department  also  rose  to  the  demands  of  the  time.  The  sudden  im- 
portance of  mathematics  in  new  fields,  such  as  psychology,  computer  science,  weath- 
er control,  nuclear  energy,  space  travel,  etc.,  produced  a  need  for  new  and  revital- 
ized courses.  At  the  dawn  of  the  sixties,  math  became  a  necessary  tool  for  the  future. 
At  Lake  Forest  High  School  it  was  still  a  relic  of  the  past.  The  program  of  courses 
was  extremely  outdated.  High  school  algebra,  for  example,  which  was  also  taught 
at  the  eighth  grade  level,  was  the  only  course  open  to  freshmen. 

In  the  summer  of  1964,  the  Math  Department  spent  two  weeks  revising  the 
curriculum.  The  teachers  first  escalated  the  mathematics,  allowing  the  eighth  grade 
alegbra  student  to  advance  to  a  higher  level  of  math.  For  the  accelerated  student 
new  courses  were  created.  The  result  was  a  new  four  year  honors  curriculum: 
Honors  Geometry,  Alegbra  2,  Selected  Topics,  Math  Analysis.  All  other  courses 
were  renewed  with  revisions. 

Following  the  1964  death  of  Mr.  Kevin  Keenan,  head  of  the  Math  Depart- 
ment, a  math  scholarship  was  created.  Students,  faculty,  community,  and  friends 
donated  money  to  award  to  a  student  who  showed  Mr.  Keenan's  high  ideals  of 
scholarship,  character,  and  leadership.  The  Math  Department  declared  that  the 
student  recipient  of  the  scholarship  must  also  have  a  major  in  math.  This  scholar- 
ship was  given  for  the  first  time  in  the  spring  of  1965. 

79 


The  social  studies  curriculum,  though  not  as  important  as  math  and  science  in 
the  sixties,  was  a  well  rounded  one  at  Lake  Forest  High  School.  The  courses  were 
concerned  with  many  parts  of  the  world.  Two  recent  courses  were  World  Geogra- 
phy and  Humanities.  Humanities,  another  new  course,  covered  many  aspects  of 
Western  life,  including  art  and  music.  Other  courses  ranged  from  Ancient  Studies 
to  Asian  Studies. 

Before  the  sixties,  English  was  the  study  of  grammar  and  other  linguistic  rules. 
In  this  time  the  essence  of  the  English  programs  became  the  idea.  The  student  was 
taught  to  learn  through  his  own  efforts  and  from  his  own  questions.  Individual  writ- 
ing skills  were  stressed,  and  there  was  a  considerable  amount  of  preparation  for 
college.  Analytical  interpretation  was  required  of  upperclassmen.  Creative  writing 
was  more  frequently  found  on  the  freshman  and  sophomore  level.  Language  Arts, 
Speech,  and  English  Composition  and  Literature  are  typical  of  the  courses  offered. 
Seniors  were  offered  Major  American  and  European  Writers,  and  American  Studies 
(American  Studies  was  a  course  that  incorporated  history  into  the  English  pro- 
gram). Time  was  also  spent  on  the  annual  American  Legion  Essay  Contest. 

The  Debate  Club,  with  Ms.  Enid  Alleman  advisor,  was  organized  early  in  the 
sixties  and  became  one  of  the  most  active  clubs  of  the  school.  Members  participated 
in  tournaments  almost  every  weekend  of  the  fall  and  winter  semester.  During  the 
school  year  1965-66,  Debate  Club  was  extremely  large,  and  became  a  part  of  the 
National  Forensics  Society.  The  Gilbert  Rayner  Speech  Award  was  presented  to  the 
student  judged  superior  in  diction,  speech  composition,  and  sophistry. 


One  of  the  many  clubs  throughout  the  years,  the  Rifle  Club  taught  the 
proper  and  safe  use  of  firearms. 

The  Drama  Club  offered  another  form  of  English  expression.  Among  other 
activities,  its  members  still  helped  in  the  production  of  school  plays.  The  National 
Thespian  Society  of  the  high  school,  also  advised  by  Ms.  Alleman,  helped  in  play 
production  to  a  greater  extent.  It  also  participated  in  national  meetings. 

Foreign  languages  became  more  important  as  good  background  material  for 
college.  Four  years  of  language  study  was  now  encouraged,  instead  of  a  mere  in- 
troduction in  one  or  two  years.  Since  World  War  II  languages  were  becoming  a 

80 


vital  part  of  education.  Students  started  to  acquire  a  mastery  of  the  spoken  word, 
along  with  the  knowledge  of  the  written  word  stressed  in  the  past.  In  the  sixties 
visual  aides  were  coming  into  use  in  the  teaching  of  languages.  This  improved  the 
courses  immensely.  In  addition  to  this,  Latin  was  revitalized  and  Brazilian  Portu- 
guese was  added  to  the  curriculum  for  the  advanced  Spanish  student. 

For  the  student  of  French  there  was  Le  Cercle  Francais  (the  French  Club 
under  a  new  name).  This  club,  advised  by  Mr.  Paul  Whiting,  met  monthly  to  see 
movies  and  slides.  The  goal  of  the  year  was  the  production  of  a  French  play.  For 
the  student  of  German  there  was  the  German  Club,  advised  by  Mr.  Edward  Krueger 
and  Mr.  Arthur  Kleck.  At  the  monthly  meetings,  the  members  studied  German 
customs  and  planned  field  trips.  During  the  Christmas  holidays  they  held  German 
style  feasts.  For  the  Spanish  student  there  was  the  Spanish  Club,  or  Los  Picaros. 
But  there  was  also  the  Spanish  National  Honor  Society,  formed  to  honor  the  excel- 
lent Spanish  students  who  had  studied  at  least  two  years  of  Spanish. 

The  Art  Department  suffered  as  technology  advanced.  At  the  high  school,  an 
attempt  was  made  to  relate  artistic  expression  to  other  fields  of  education  and 
knowledge.  Original  art  work  was  placed  in  a  special  school  gallery,  where  it  could 
be  purchased  by  fellow  students  and  teachers;  competition  and  performance  were 
very  important.  Music  Theory  and  The  History  of  Art  were  advanced  courses. 

Industrial  Arts  and  Business  Education  were  very  timely.  The  goal  of  both 
was  to  develop  marketable  skills.  Two  special  courses  were  added  in  1965:  Internal 
Revenue,  a  course  in  which  each  student  was  provided  with  a  special  kit  and  in- 
structions from  the  state  government;  and  Freshman  ''Core,"  a  mandatory  course 
for  all  freshmen.  As  part  of  Core,  freshmen  were  taught  typing  skills  with  the  help 
of  numerous  modern  "speed  machines"  in  one  nine  week  quarter. 

The  home  arts  were  very  important  to  the  girls  because  of  the  trend  toward 
early  marriage.  Courses  were  designed  to  handle  home  financing  and  family  living 
problems.  There  was  also  the  Home  Arts  Club,  where  the  girls  sewed,  cooked,  and 
practiced  other  "practical"  skills.  At  the  end  of  the  year,  as  their  community  service 
project,  they  sent  books  and  home  made  toys  to  Downey  Hospital. 

Music  at  the  high  school  remained  very  popular.  In  1964,  the  Lake  Forest 
High  School  Band,  directed  by  Mr.  George  Borich,  participated  in  its  first  state 
contest  and  received  a  rating  of  superior.  In  1965,  with  new  uniforms,  it  did  the 
same.  At  the  end  of  the  year,  the  John  Phillip  Sousa  Band  award  was  given  to  one 
of  its  members,  the  National  School  Orchestra  Association  Award  was  given  to 
one  of  the  orchestra  members,  and  the  Arion  Chorus  Award  was  given  to  a  student 
from  the  Choir  (In  1965,  the  "A  Capella  Choir"  became  "The  Forester  Singers"). 
1964  featured  the  first  annual  Pops  Concert,  with  the  band,  orchestra  and  all  choral 
groups  performing.  And  in  1965,  the  Forester  Singers  were  featured  on  a  local  radio 
station. 

Physical  Education,  too,  gained  importance  with  the  introduction  of  President 
Kennedy's  Physical  Fitness  Program.  As  stated  in  the  Lake  Forester  of  November 
10,  1965,  the  aim  of  the  high  school  physical  education  department  was  to  "forward 
emotional  well-being  and  constructive  use  of  leisure  time  in  areas  of  stress  and  auto- 
mation." Aside  from  extra-curricular  sports  for  the  boys,  developing  the  talent  of 
the  individual  was  stressed.  At  the  end  of  the  year,  the  Jack  Swensingen  Memorial 
award  was  given  to  a  senior  boy,  who,  in  the  eyes  of  his  classmates,  was  the  most 
congenial  and  the  most  talented  athlete. 

In  the  girls'  physical  education  program  physical  and  emotional  fitness  was 
also  stressed.  A  special  two  year  Leaders  Program  was  developed.  Girls  enrolled 
in  this  course  learned,  as  juniors,  to  teach  Physical  Education.  As  seniors  they  put 
their  skills  into  practice. 

81 


In  the  sixties,  there  was  a  tremendous  extra-curricular  physical  education  pro- 
gram. For  the  participants  in  boys'  sports,  there  was  the  Letterman's  Club,  under 
the  supervision  of  Mr.  Herman  Schillereff.  The  intent  of  this  club  was  to  promote 
good  sportsmanship.  Membership  was  open  only  to  those  who  had  achieved  a  var- 
sity letter. 

For  the  girls,  Guppies,  a  synchronized  swim  club  advised  by  Miss  Gill  Ceasar, 
offered  fun  and  lessons  to  those  who  were  admitted  through  try-outs;  its  event  of 
the  year  was  the  water  ballet  show.  G.A.A.  (the  Girls'  Athletic  Association)  was 
still  open  to  all  girls.  This  club  now  sponsored  another  annual  event,  the  Faculty 
Student  Volleyball  game.  The  newest  club  in  this  department  was  Orchesis,  the 
ballet  dance  club. 

New  Hobby  clubs  included:  F.O.T.O.  Club  (Fellowship  of  Optic  Talent  Or- 
ganization), advised  by  Mr.  James  Benton,  for  camera  buffs;  Chess  Club,  advised 
by  Mr.  Charles  McDermand,  for  intramural  chess  matches;  Ski  Club,  under  the 
supervision  of  Mr.  Lloyd  Atwell,  for  special  ski  trips  during  vacations;  Rifle  Club, 
advised  by  Mr.  Russel  Ruswiek,  for  teaching  students  shooting  skills  and  the  proper 
care  of  firearms  (some  members  were  elected  to  the  National  Rifle  Association); 
and  the  Cinematography  club,  Com-Cin-Art,  for  movie  making  and  viewing.  Future 
Teachers  of  America  was  a  special  career  club  advised  by  Mr.  Donald  Spooner. 
Spectators,  a  general  club  for  every  one,  was  formed  to  stimulate  interest  in  the 
cultural  experiences  available  in  the  vicinity. 

Student  productions  of  plays  and  musical  concerts  highlighted  the  years.  All 
involved,  especially  the  Stage  and  the  Lighting  Crews,  worked  hard  to  make  these 
a  success. 

Cellar,  the  student  social  organization,  came  to  control  most  of  the  social  life 
of  the  school.  It  sponsored  numerous  popular  dances  with  live  bands,  most  notably 
the  Christmas  dinner  dance  called  Capers.  The  Service  League  was  an  organization 
of  parents  and  interested  members  of  the  community;  it  served  the  school  and 
granted  scholarships  to  worthy  students.  In  1966,  Cellar  aided  the  Service  League 
in  raising  funds  for  the  new  school  organ. 

Student  Council,  advised  by  Mr.  Richard  O'Dair,  remained  the  governing 
organization  of  the  student  body.  Its  duties  had  changed  drastically  since  its  early 
years.  Among  many  other  prescribed  activities,  it  now  organized  assemblies,  auth- 
orized club  charters,  and  sponsored  the  television  Brain  Brawl,  an  academic  quiz 
game.  Starting  in  1961,  Student  Council  helped  the  Service  League  coordinate  the 
Student  Variety  Show,  a  talent  show  presented  in  the  spring  taking  the  place  of  the 
Session  Stunts.  This  was  a  major  source  of  money  for  the  Service  League.  Despite 
these  achievements  and  many  more,  Student  Council  was  generally  thought  to  be 
disorganized,  because  of  the  time  lapse  between  a  problem  and  a  resolution. 

Students  also  worked  together  grouped  into  classes.  For  Homecoming,  the 
biggest  sports  event,  sponsored  by  Pep  Club,  each  class  built  a  float  to  ride  in  the 
parade,  and  competed  with  class  cheers  and  slogans.  Senior  Hop,  a  November 
dance,  was  sponsored  by  and  exclusively  for  seniors.  At  this  dance,  the  seniors 
voted  on  the  teachers  to  receive  special  awards  at  the  end  of  the  year  (such  as  the 
Grooviest  Teacher  Award).  The  main  dance  of  the  year  was  Junior  Prom,  with 
attendance  open  to  all,  but  profits  flowing  to  the  junior  class  treasury. 

Special  students  from  each  class  were  given  awards  at  the  end  of  the  year.  The 
freshman  boy,  voted  an  invaluable  asset  by  his  classmates,  was  awarded  the  Robert 
Ellis  William  Memorial  Award.  The  Harvard  Book  Award  was  given  to  the  favorite 
junior.  The  seniors  elected  one  senior  girl  and  one  senior  boy  to  receive  the  D.A.R. 
and  the  S.A.R.  awards  (the  Daughters  and  the  Sons  of  the  American  Revolution). 
And  there  were  many  more. 

82 


The  Jerry  Werhane  Scholarship  was  given  each  year  by  Mr.  Arnold  Werhane, 
to  the  senior  student  who  best  portrayed  the  admirable  qualities  of  his  deceased  son. 
The  Jerry  Werhane  Club  now  served  as  a  reserve  of  students  ready  to  aid  teachers 
who  asked  for  help. 

Membership  in  the  Cum  Laude  Society  was  awarded  to  students  of  high 
academic  standing.  Membership  in  the  National  Honor  Society  was  given  to  those 
juniors  and  seniors  who  best  portrayed  traits  of  strong  character,  leadership,  schol- 
arship, and  service. 

Student  publications  were  another  facet  of  student  life.  The  Forest  Scout,  was 

very  successful  in  these  years.  The  topics  it  covered  ranged  from  faculty  interviews 
to  accounts  of  baseball  games  and  student  editorials.  In  September,  1965,  and  in 
April,  1966,  it  was  awarded  a  "First-Class  Honor"  rating,  the  second  highest  pos- 
sible award  given  by  the  National  Scholastic  Press  Association.  The  editor  of  that 
year  also  received  national  recognition  for  an  editorial  entitled  "Remedy  for  Ano- 
nymity." At  the  end  of  each  year,  an  award  was  given  to  the  outstanding  journalist, 
and  the  editor's  name  was  added  to  the  Northrop  Memorial  Plaque,  which  hangs  in 
the  trophy  case  of  the  school. 

Young  Idea,  the  magazine  containing  student  cerative  writing,  was  published 
now  three  times  a  year.  The  student  year  book,  the  Forest  Trails,  was  the  publica- 
tion that  summed  up  the  entire  year.  Work  on  this  began  during  the  summers  with 
Mrs.  Barbara  Silber  and  Mr.  Conrad  Swan  as  advisors.  The  editor  was  a  student 
chosen  in  the  spring  of  the  previous  year  by  a  publications  committee,  composed  of 
faculty  and  administration.  Membership  in  the  Quill  and  Scroll  Society  was  award- 
ed to  all  hard  working  contributors  on  the  staffs  of  the  three  publications. 

The  sixties  marked  a  very  successful  period  in  the  history  of  Lake  Forest  High 
School.  The  success  is  accredited  to  the  efforts  by  the  administrators  and  the  faculty, 
and  to  the  willingness,  responsibility,  and  spirit  of  the  students,  themselves.  There 
was  also  a  strong  support  from  the  parents  of  students  and  the  community.  High 
school  became  an  important  step  in  education,  and  an  efficient  aid  in  understanding 
the  times. 


83 


PartV 
The  Third  Floor 


Within  the  thirty  year  period  from  1935  to  1965,  the  plan  of  Lake  Forest  High 
School  changed  radically.  Floor  space  was  greatly  increased  and  the  function  of 
each  floor  was  altered,  providing  greater  facilities  for  the  growing  number  of  stu- 
dents. Of  the  school's  three  floors  and  basement,  it  is  perhaps  the  third  floor  which 
has  undergone  the  greatest  number  of  major  changes.  However,  despite  its  trans- 
formation from  an  unfinishd  "attic,"  to  a  cafeteria,  to  a  library,  and  finally  to  class- 
room space,  the  third  floor  has  undergone  little  additional  construction  in  com- 
parison to  other  areas  of  the  high  school. 

When  the  high  school  first  opened  in  1935,  the  third  floor  was  an  unfinished 
area  composed  of  rough  brick  walls.  The  floor  was  of  uncovered  concrete  and  there 
were  open  beams  on  the  ceiling.  According  to  the  blueprints  drawn  up  by  Anderson 
and  Ticknor,  the  third  floor  was  to  have  included  a  kitchen,  serving  room,  dining 
room,  cafeteria,  band  room  with  an  adjoining  practice  room  and  office,  several 
storage  rooms,  supply  and  maintenance  rooms,  and  an  elevator.  The  proposed  third 
floor  never  became  a  reality.  Instead  the  north  end  of  the  floor  was  filled  with  up  to 
twelve  ping-pong  tables  for  student  use  during  lunch,  the  south  end  housed  the  band 
room,  and  after  1937  the  middle  area  was  used  as  a  kitchen  and  cafeteria.  In  the 
high  school's  first  few  years  of  operation,  students  either  went  home  for  lunch  or 
they  were  able  to  get  a  soup  and  sandwich  type  lunch  in  the  home  economics  room. 


m 


Follow  the  little  white  ball  .  .  .  Ping  Pong  on  the  third  floor. 


When  the  cafeteria  was  finally  put  into  use,  food  was  placed  on  cafeteria  tables  for 
sale  and  students  took  the  food  to  scattered  eating  tables.  The  faculty  also  dined  in 
the  cafeteria  at  a  separate  table.  At  first  there  was  only  one  lunch  period,  but 
eventually  two  lunch  periods  were  established.  It  is  estimated  that  eighty  dollars 
worth  of  food  was  sold  daily  by  1950. 


85 


The  third  floor  remained  unfinished  during  all  of  the  years  it  housed  the  stu- 
dent and  faculty  cafeteria.  The  floor  remained  in  its  cement  state  and  steel  reinforc- 
ing rods  were  visible  throughout  the  forties.  Also  because  the  high  school  had  been 
built  to  resemble  a  house,  the  acoustics  were  very  poor.  A  fork  dropped  in  the 
cafeteria  caused  a  thunder-like  noise  heard  on  the  floor  below. 

Despite  its  relatively  unfinished  state,  improvements  and  minor  changes  were 
made  during  the  years  the  lunchroom  remained  on  the  third  floor.  Four  by  eight- 
foot  plywood  panels  not  connected  to  the  ceiling  were  installed  by  1950  to  separate 
the  kitchen  and  the  bandroom.  Due  to  the  fact  that  the  panels  were  not  connected, 
the  dimensions  of  rooms  could  be  easily  altered  to  cater  to  particular  needs.  From 
the  beginning,  there  was  an  elevator  shaft  at  the  north  end  of  the  third  floor,  but  not 
until  1941  was  the  elevator  installed.  The  major  purpose  of  the  elevator  was  to 
supply  the  cafeteria  with  food  and  other  necessary  supplies. 

Although  the  third  floor  was  functional  as  a  cafeteria  during  the  high  school's 
early  years,  the  growing  student  population  soon  made  a  larger  cafeteria  necessary. 
By  the  early  spring  of  1955,  plans  were  formulated  for  changing  the  basement  from 
an  indoor  track  and  rifle  range  to  cafeteria,  and  using  the  third  floor  for  more  class- 
room space  and  a  library.  The  blueprints  were  finished  in  early  May  and  construc- 
tion began  later  in  that  same  month.  During  construction,  floors  were  tiled,  brick 
walls  were  smoothed  or  plastered,  and  new  walls  were  erected.  Bids  for  the  con- 
struction were  taken  from  various  contractors.  The  final  cost  of  the  construction, 
done  by  Stanley  D.  Anderson  and  Association  (the  original  builders  of  the  high 
school),  was  eighty  thousand  dollars.  As  a  result  of  the  construction,  by  the  summer 
of  1956,  the  library,  storage  areas,  classrooms,  and  the  music  department  were  lo- 
cated on  the  third  floor  and  the  cafeteria  had  been  shifted  to  the  basement. 

With  the  addition  of  the  south  wing,  the  construction  of  which  began  in  1958, 
the  music  department  of  the  high  school  was  re-located  in  the  basement.  From  1958 
until  1965  the  library  and  a  few  language  classrooms  were  all  that  composed  the 
third  floor.  High  ceilings  prevailed  and  no  lockers  were  present  until  the  annex 
section  was  added  in  the  school  year  of  1965-66.  The  library  extended  from  room 
306  to  room  302  (what  is  now  the  office  of  the  language  department  complete  with 
the  original  1958-1966  bookshelves).  The  library  was  entered  through  double  doors 
at  both  ends  of  the  floor.  Room  307  was  used  as  the  library  office  and  from  1958 
until  1966  there  was  a  library  storage  room  (mostly  for  periodicals)  under  the 


Students  check  out  the  third  floor  library. 

86 


eaves  behind  room  304.  The  third  floor  library,  which  held  over  five  thousand  books, 
was  also  the  home  of  a  small  language  laboratory  which  could  be  used  by  students 
with  lab  passes.  In  1958  partitions  were  added  outside  of  the  library  to  create  three 
language  classrooms;  those  being  rooms  300,  301,  and  308.  Mr.  Joseph  Lawlor 
used  room  308,  located  at  the  north  end  of  the  third  floor  by  the  elevator,  for  his 
classes  of  Spanish  and  Portuguese.  An  adjoining  storage  area  was  transformed  into 
his  office.  A  fish  net  hung  from  the  ceiling  of  room  308  and  girders  still  jutting  from 
the  ceiling  were  painted  bright  yellow  and  decorated,  with  symbolic  characters, 
postcards,  newspapers,  and  cartoons.  The  other  two  language  classrooms  were  lo- 
cated across  from  each  other  at  the  south  end  of  the  third  floor. 


In  the  summer  of  1944,  the  large  chimney  in  the  back  of  the  school 
was  struck  by  lightning.  It  was  severely  cracked  and  several  bricks 
flew  through  the  windows  of  the  Home  Economics  room  and  were  em- 
bedded in  the  wall  above  one  of  the  stoves. 


With  the  exception  of  the  presence  of  the  annex  section,  the  third  floor  in  the 
early  sixties  was  very  similar  in  appearance  and  purpose  to  the  third  floor  in  1972. 
As  was  true  in  earlier  years,  this  area  continued  to  undergo  change.  With  the  addi- 
tion of  the  annex  in  1965-1966,  the  library  was  situated  in  the  first  floor  annex 
section,  the  old  library  was  divided  up  into  more  language  classrooms,  and  the  third 


87 


floor  annex  section  served  mainly  as  a  mathematics  area.  The  rough  brick  walls  and 
cement  floor  which  composed  the  third  floor  during  the  school's  earlier  years  have 
long  since  disappeared,  as  have  the  popular  ping-pong  tables.  They  have  been  re- 
placed by  up-dated  and  more  efficient  facilities  which  make  learning  possible  in  a 
more  adequate  and  comfortable  setting. 


Cellar 


Cellar  was  the  descendant  of  the  O'Falfhs  group  and  the  "Cola  Cabana,"  and 
Forest  High  School,  although  throughout  its  existence  it  has  had  a  profound  influ- 
ence on  the  students  and  the  entire  community  of  Lake  Forest.  Cellar  is  still  recog- 
nized by  many  to  be  an  outstanding  facet  of  student  life  outside  the  school. 

Cellar  was  the  descendant  of  the  O'Falfhs  group  and  the  "Cola  Cabana,"  and 
its  creation  occurred  after  much  confusion  and  controversy.  In  1953,  it  was  gen- 
erally agreed  that  there  was  a  definite  need  for  some  form  of  organized  week-end 
recreation  for  the  students  of  the  high  school,  and  questionnaires  were  therefore 
issued  to  the  students  to  determine  their  ideas  on  the  subject.  As  a  result  of  the 
questionnaire  response,  a  committee  of  adults  and  teenagers  was  formed  in  order 
to  communicate  to  the  Service  League  possible  guidelines  and  suggestions  for  the 
proposed  formation  of  the  recreational  group.  The  "Corral"  of  La  Grange  High 
School  was  also  used  to  illustrate  the  benefits  of  a  club  like  Cellar,  and  the  dwindling 
popularity  of  the  Cola  Cabana  emphasized  further  the  necessity  for  a  new  organiza- 
tion better  suited  to  the  tastes  of  the  students. 

The  Service  League  President,  Mr.  Stanes,  was  apparently  interested  and  ap- 
pointed a  youth  committee  to  determine  the  willingness  of  local  merchants  to  host 
a  teen  center.  After  numerous  negative  responses  the  Superintendent  of  Schools,  Mr. 
Quinlan,  made  successful  arrangements  for  the  usaie  of  the  Gorton  School  base- 
ment as  the  site  for  the  proposed  teen  center.  Gorton  School  was  chosen  in  prefer- 
ence to  the  high  school,  and  due  to  its  location  in  the  basement  of  the  school,  the 
group  received  the  name  "Cellar." 

Cellar  held  its  grand  opening  after  the  first  home  basketball  game  in  1954,  and 
as  the  students  arrived  thev  honked  their  horns  to  salute  the  new  night  spot.  En- 
thusiasm for  Cellar  ran  high,  and  in  its  first  year  there  was  a  record  attendance  one 
evening  of  282  people  in  an  area  which  had  the  capacity  to  hold  only  100  people. 
The  stores  in  town  donated  door  prizes  for  the  grand  opening,  and  a  record  player 
provided  the  music.  The  record  player  was  later  replaced  with  a  juke  box,  and  this 
possession  assumed  a  special  place  in  the  hearts  of  Cellar  devotees. 

The  constitution  of  Cellar  was  strictly  enforced;  guests  must  always  obtain 
passes,  membership  drives  must  be  held  in  the  autumn,  and  privileges  could  be 
revoked  for  the  slightest  infringement  of  rules.  Alumni  were  occasionally  a  prob- 
lem, although  the  overall  behavior  of  the  teenagers  was  commendable.  Great  con- 
sideration was  exercised  by  everybody,  and  even  smokers  were  careful  to  confine 
themselves  to  the  designated  smoking  area. 

88 


Refreshments  were  served  at  the  Friday  night  get-togethers;  and  such  delicacies 
as  hot  dogs,  egg  salad  sandwiches,  soft  drinks,  candy  bars,  and  ice  cream  were 
available.  The  treasurer  of  Cellar  was  in  charge  of  refreshments  and  this  enterprise 
was  an  important  source  of  revenue. 

Cellar  not  only  hosted  dances  and  recreational  activities,  but  in  addition,  the 
group  sponsored  a  huge  Christmas  dance  each  year  in  which  all  members  of  the 
community  were  encouraged  to  participate.  Parents,  teachers,  and  students  all  cele- 
brated Christmas  together  with  much  joviality  and  the  profits  from  this  one  dance 
ranged  from  $700.00  to  $750.00. 

As  for  Cellar's  affiliation  with  the  school  itself,  it  was  about  as  close  as  it 
could  have  been  while  still  remaining  an  independent  organization.  Membership 
drives,  ticket  sales,  and  Cellar  board  elections  were  always  held  at  the  high  school, 
although  after  Student  Council  Officer  elections  because  of  the  extent  of  the  re- 
sponsibility both  jobs  required.  In  other  words,  it  would  be  almost  impossible  for 
one  individual  to  hold  an  office  on  both  boards  due  to  the  amount  of  work  each 
organization  entailed. 

Chaperones  were  a  necessity  for  Cellar,  because  they  were  responsible  for 
checking  in  the  members.  Parents  often  chaperoned,  although  for  a  number  of  years 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  Burkhalter  and  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Verbeke  were  permanent  chaperones, 
alternating  each  week  and  co-chaperoning  with  two  additional  sets  of  parents.  Mr. 
Burkhalter  and  Mrs.  Verbeke  were  both  affiliated  with  the  high  school,  and  as  paid 
chaperones  they  came  to  associate  very  freely  with  the  students.  Later  on,  an  ex- 
policeman  and  his  wife  became  permanent  chaperones. 

Overcrowding  was  a  recurring  problem  for  Cellar.  The  problem  was  tem- 
porarily resolved,  however,  when  Gorton  School  closed  its  doors  for  remodeling 
in  1955,  and  Cellar's  location  was  switched  to  the  basement  of  Sheridan  School. 
The  principal  of  Sheridan  was  apprehensive  about  Cellar,  but  after  one  year  Cellar 
appealed  to  the  Recreational  Center  with  the  slogan  "Get  Cellar  Out  of  the  Base- 
ment "  The  move  was  approved  and  Cellar  was  happily  relocated  in  the  second  floor 
of  the  Recreational  Center. 

By  1957,  Cellar  had  a  new  look  due  to  its  brightly  painted  barrels  and  crates 
which  served  as  furniture  for  those  attending  Cellar  functions.  Another  significant 
addition  was  a  ten-foot  by  six-foot  portable  wall  made  by  Mr.  Schilleref,  an  Indus- 
trial Arts  teacher  at  the  high  school.  This  division  could  be  positioned  to  suit  the 
activity  which  the  Cellar  members  desired,  and  it  was  removed  for  the  dances  to 
provide  a  larger  dance  floor.  Cellar  was  a  key  word  among  the  students  in  1957; 
only  fifteen  out  of  585  students  didn't  buy  a  Cellar  ticket.  Acting  upon  Dr.  Moore's 
recommendation,  Parent's  Magazine  honored  Cellar  for  its  outstanding  service  to 
the  community  at  that  time. 

As  for  its  source  of  entertainment,  Cellar's  jukebox  had  slowly  but  surely  de- 
teriorated and  was  in  dire  need  of  repair  as  it  was  held  together  with  "bubble  gum 
wads  and  bobby-pins."  The  problem  was,  however,  that  the  juke  box  repair  com- 
pany apparently  was  "syndicate"  owned  and  no  repairman  would  venture  beyond 
the  city  limits  of  Highwood.  Much  disturbed  by  this  the  students  wrote  letter  after 
letter  to  the  company,  emphasizing  that  the  jukebox  was  part  of  a  youth  organiza- 
tion which  was  not  associated  with  the  school.  After  much  evasiveness,  an  agree- 
ment was  made  by  the  company  to  repair  the  jukebox  only  if  it  were  delivered  by 
truck  to  the  warehouse  in  Chicago.  The  resourceful  Cellar  Board  managed  to  ship 
the  instrument  to  Chicago,  and  within  forty-eight  hours  the  beloved  juke  box  was 
returned  completely  repaired.  The  juke  box  remained  in  avid  use  until  1 966  when 
live  music  gradually  captured  the  hearts  of  the  students. 

89 


Today  the  role  of  Cellar  is  drastically  different  from  that  of  the  past.  Student 
apathy  has  tended  to  seep  into  this  organization  as  it  has  others,  and  no  longer  are 
its  membership  lists  pages  long  or  its  Board  members  acknowledged  as  leaders  of 
the  school.  Cellar  now  knows  debt  while  it  never  failed  to  make  money  in  previous 
years.  With  its  future  still  uncertain,  Cellar's  past  remains  as  a  monument  to  those 
individuals  who  desired  to  create  a  pleasant  form  of  social  recreation  for  the  stu- 
dents of  Lake  Forest  High  School. 


The  Student  Council 


The  Student  Council  has  always  been  a  very  important  organization  in  Lake 
Forest  High  School,  but  the  nature  of  its  role  in  the  activities  of  the  high  school  has 
changed  dramatically  throughout  the  years.  During  the  thirties,  forties  and  fifties,  it 
was  a  service  organization  whose  main  objective  was  to  promote  school  spirit  and 
encourage  and  coordinate  all  student  activities.  It  sponsored  many  activities  and  took 
charge  of  many  events.  For  example  the  Student  Council  planned  the  entire  home- 
coming weekend  in  earlier  years.  Because  of  these  many  activities,  the  Student 
Council  played  a  much  bigger  part  in  the  students'  lives.  In  the  sixties,  the  Council 
started  leaning  more  toward  an  administrative  organization  and  gave  up  many  of  its 
responsibilities  to  individual  clubs.  Its  role  completely  changed,  over  the  years, 
from  the  service  organization  that  coordinated  all  student  activities  and  sponsored 
many  events,  to  more  of  an  administrative  organization,  concentrating  on  communi- 
cation with  the  administration. 

The  role  of  the  Student  Council  representative  has  also  changed.  In  the  earlier 
years  he  was  more  respected  and  had  greater  influence  with  the  students.  His  job 
was  to  enforce  the  rules  of  the  school  and  students  really  looked  up  to  him  and 
obeyed  him.  In  later  years  the  function  of  the  representative  became  more  of  a 
channel  for  ideas  between  students  and  administration.  He  no  longer  had  the  job  of 
enforcing  the  rules;  the  students  opinion  of  him  had  changed.  He  was  no  longer  so 
much  of  a  ''big  thing"  and  did  not  command  the  respect  from  the  student  body  that 
earlier  representatives  had. 

The  year  1935-36  was  the  first  year  for  the  Student  Council.  During  that  year 
it  met  once  every  two  weeks.  Representatives  were  elected  in  the  second  week  of 
each  semester  and  to  qualify  a  student  had  to  have  a  scholastic  average  of  "C"  or 
better  with  no  failures  for  the  six  weeks  preceding  the  election.  In  order  to  stay  a 
member  of  council,  he  had  to  maintain  that  average.  At  least  three  members  were 
elected  from  all  the  other  sessions.  There  was  always  an  equal  number  of  boys  and 
girls  in  council  at  that  time,  so  the  number  of  students  elected  from  each  session 
varied  to  make  the  numbers  equal. 

The  purpose  of  the  Student  Council  was  laid  down  in  the  first  constitution  as 
follows: 

I.  To  promote  school  spirit  and  cooperation  among  faculty  and  stu- 
dents. 
II.  To  make  house  rules  governing  the  conduct  of  students,  to  show  stu- 
dents the  need  for  these  rules,  and  to  see  that  they  are  carried  out. 

90 


III.  To  promote,  encourage  and  coordinate  student  activities. 

Each  representative  was  expected  to  present  the  suggestions  of  his  session  to 
the  Council  and  to  carry  back  instructions  and  legislation.  Legislation  required 
two-thirds  vote  to  pass.  The  councilors  were  required  to  wear  the  insignia  of  office 
at  all  times. 

As  mentioned  before,  representatives  were  expected  to  clarify  and  enforce  the 
rules  of  the  school.  They  were  posted  in  the  halls  and  had  the  job  of  stopping  any 
running,  keeping  the  halls  free  of  litter,  and  maintaining  order.  They  reported  stu- 
dents that  marked  up  lockers,  checked  passes,  and  enforced  the  rule  that  students 
should  not  spoil  the  beauty  of  the  grounds  by  walking  across  the  lawn.  During  the 
first  year  of  Student  Council,  they  especially  worked  on  eliminating  gum  chewing 
and,  at  the  request  of  Mr.  Moore  tried  to  break  up  the  puppy  love  affairs  that  had 
seized  the  school. 

During  the  early  years  the  Council  sponsored  quite  a  few  events.  There  were  a 
lot  of  Student  Council  or  Council-faculty  parties.  One  of  the  big  things  in  the  thirties 
and  early  forties  was  the  matinee  dance  which  took  place  after  school.  In  the  min- 
utes of  one  of  the  Student  Council  meetings  in  1936  it  was  reported  that  the  Council 
had  made  a  grand  total  of  $495  on  one  of  these  matinee  dances. 

In  1942,  came  the  ratification  of  a  firm  constitution.  Students  were  elected  for 
the  entire  school  year.  There  was  one  representative  from  each  homeroom  and  to 
give  added  weight  to  the  Senior  vote,  the  President  and  Vice-President  were  allowed 
to  vote.  Meetings  were  held  one-half  hour  before  school  once  a  week.  The  work 
was  mainly  done  through  committees,  which  played  an  important  part  in  Council 
through  all  the  years.  The  types  of  committees  changed  from  year  to  year.  Some  of 
the  more  important  ones  were  the  student  activity  committee,  publicity,  lunchroom, 
disciplinary,  and  consultation  committees. 

The  Council  began  to  sponsor  more  and  more  events  through  the  forties: 
dances  after  basketball  games,  bus  trips,  pep  meetings,  faculty-council  parties,  and 
visiting  night  for  the  parents.  They  also  presented  an  award  to  the  session  with  the 
highest  scholastic  standing  each  year.  During  these  years  the  Council  started  to 
sponsor  the  square  dance,  held  after  exam  week.  This  event  became  very  popular. 

The  faculty-council  parties  were  also  a  big  success.  Miss  Helen  Cory,  a  Latin 
teacher  at  the  time,  can  remember  one  in  particular  in  1954.  It  was  a  treasure 
hunt:  teachers  and  Student  Council  representatives  were  divided  into  teams  and 
sent  out  with  clues  to  find  the  hidden  treasure  which  was  a  large  basket  of  fruit, 
nuts,  and  candy.  In  that  particular  year  it  had  been  buried  in  the  front  lawn  and  the 
lawn  was  filled  with  teachers  and  students  on  their  hands  and  knees  trying  to  find 
the  treasure. 

In  1957,  Mr.  Richard  O'Dair  became  one  of  the  advisors  of  Council.  Previous 
advisors  had  consisted  of  a  group  of  teachers  appointed  by  the  principal,  but  Mr. 
O'Dair  had  been  a  student  council  advisor  and  coordinator  at  his  former  school, 
and  he  had  throughly  studied  the  way  in  which  a  Council  worked.  It  was  in  that 
year  that  the  new  method  for  electing  the  President  and  Vice-President  was  put 
into  the  constitution.  Previously,  the  whole  school  had  voted  for  three  boys  and 
three  girls  that  were  nominated  at  random  from  the  top  third  of  the  Junior  class. 
This  didn't  always  work  because  many  times  people  were  elected  that  had  no  desire 
to  hold  office.  The  new  method  was  based  upon  the  idea  that  students  who  wanted 
to  serve  would  nominate  themselves  for  election  to  office,  thus  eliminating  this 
problem.  Also  the  elections  were  changed  from  the  fall  to  the  spring  so  that  the 
officers  would  have  a  chance  to  plan  and  work  over  the  summer. 

91 


In  1957,  the  Student  Council  helped  out  with  College  Night,  Open  House, 
Vocational  Conference  and  Freshman  Day,  as  well  as  sponsoring  the  square  dance, 
Red  Cross  drive,  clothing  drive,  and  the  March  of  Dimes  Drive.  It  also  sponsored  a 
Freshman  test  which  was  given  to  each  Freshman  and  an  award  given  to  the  home- 
room with  the  highest  score.  The  test  included  questions  about  the  various  clubs, 
rules,  courses  and  credits,  sports  and  awards  of  the  school.  On  the  reverse  side  of 
the  test,  the  freshman  had  to  write  out  the  words  to  the  school  song. 

In  1958,  the  Council  started  studying  the  honors  system  and  decided  to  try  it 
out  in  specially  selected  freshman  classes.  It  also  took  a  step  toward  inter-school 
government  when  it  joined  the  Conference  Student  Council  in  that  year.  At  this 
time,  the  Student  Council  representatives  still  had  real  prestige  and  authority  in 
enforcing  the  rules  prohibiting  throwing  of  snowballs,  rowdy  assemblies,  paper  air 
planes  and  crowding  in  lunch  lines. 

In  the  1958-59  school  year,  Student  Council  changed  its  meeting  time  from 
before  school,  and  it  became  an  actual  fifty-minute  class  put  into  the  schedule.  It 
was  in  this  year  that  the  Council  assumed  the  responsibility  of  the  main  bulletin 
board  so  that  students  would  become  more  aware  of  what  Council  was  doing.  At 
this  time,  Council  started  collecting  information  concerning  a  Student  Activity  Card 
to  lower  the  expenses  of  games,  plays,  and  other  events. 

1960  was  the  first  year  that  the  representatives  were  really  seriously  going  to 
the  district  and  state  conventions.  In  that  year,  it  was  governed  by  a  new  constitu- 
tion which  gave  the  right  to  Student  Council  to  sponsor  any  new  clubs.  The  possi- 
bility of  a  Student  Lounge  was  looked  into. 

In  the  next  couple  of  years,  the  Student  Council  investigated  the  possibility  of 
an  exchange  student  program.  It  sponsored  many  events  to  raise  money.  It  sold 
programs  at  all  the  athletic  events,  ran  the  snack  bar  and  placed  a  penny  jar  in 
the  cafeteria.  The  first  foreign  exchange  student  came  to  this  high  school  in  the 
1962-63  school  year  and  the  program  grew  larger  in  the  following  years.  The  Stu- 
dent Council  also  became  a  member  of  the  Northwest  Suburban  Conference  and 
took  an  active  part  in  the  conference's  radio  program  on  WKRS. 

Council  tried  to  generate  more  student  interest,  in  1965,  when  it  had  open 
Council  meetings  during  the  home  room  period.  In  that  year  it  also  originated  the 
Activity  ticket  which  helped  to  cut  expenses  for  the  student.  More  and  more  repre- 
sentatives were  sent  to  workshops  and  the  Council  even  became  involved  in  the 
national  conference  in  the  sixties. 

Even  though  the  council  has  changed  quite  a  bit  through  the  years,  it  has  al- 
ways been  the  object  of  the  same  complaint:  that  it  isn't  as  active  or  powerful  as  it 
should  be.  However,  when  one  looks  back  through  the  years,  he  can  see  that  Coun- 
cil has  really  done  a  lot  to  ameliorate  the  students'  lives:  from  making  the  showers  in 
the  girl's  gym  warmer  to  setting  up  the  honors  system  and  Forum  which  gives  the 
students  a  chance  to  participate  and  share  their  views.  Through  the  years  Council 
has  developed  much  closer  communication  with  the  administration  and  has  been 
entrusted  with  more  power  because  of  this.  The  Student  Council  that  used  to  be  a 
service  organization  is  now  developing  into  a  participating  government.  The  role  of 
the  Student  Council  representative  is  very  different  today  than  what  it  was  in  1935, 
but  it  is  certainly  equally  important.  Perhaps  the  Council  is  in  a  transitional  stage; 
evolving  and  defining  its  important  place  in  the  future  of  LFHS  . 

92 


Dr.  Raymond  Moore  (1895-1970) 


There  shall  always  remain  the  question  of  whether  history  makes  the  man  or 
man  makes  history.  However,  in  the  case  of  Raymond  Moore,  former  superinten- 
dent and  principal  of  Lake  Forest  High  School,  the  answer  is  obvious.  Raymond 
Moore  definitely  made  his  history;  he  was  a  self-made  man.  It  was  he  who  literally 
established  this  high  school  and  its  traditions.  Dr.  Moore  is  not  only  interesting  for 
the  contributions  he  made  to  this  institution,  but  also  as  an  individual.  In  examining 
his  personal  history,  as  well  as  his  association  with  the  school,  perhaps  we  can 
better  understand  this  man. 

Raymond  Moore  was 
born  July  31,  1895  in  Chi- 
cago. Family  problems  de- 
veloped between  his  mother 
and  father  not  long  after  his 
birth;  at  an  early  age  he 
saw  a  film  on  the  Lake  Bluff 
Orphanage  Home  and  decid- 
ed he  wanted  to  go  there  to 
live.  Not  only  did  he  wish 
to  escape  family  problems, 
but  he  had  always  dreamed 
of  living  where  there  was 
grass.  So,  at  the  age  of  five, 
he  talked  his  way  onto  a 
train,  rode  to  Lake  Bluff, 
presented  himself  to  the 
Orphanage,  and  said  he 
wished  to  stay.  Shortly 
thereafter,  the  family  prob- 
lems were  toned  down  and 
the  Court  ordered  him  back. 
However,  he  so  loved  the 
Home  that  after  one  night 
with  his  family,  he  walked 
from  Chicago  back  to  Lake 
Bluff. 

This  love  for  the  Or- 
phanage may  have  been  in- 
stigated by  the  kindness  and 
warmth  shown  to  him  by 
two  women  who  worked 
there.  His  childhood  was 
. ,    -  .  essentially    an    empty   one, 

devoid  ot  attention,  except  that  shown  by  these  women.  Many  years  later  he  tried 
to  repay  their  kindness  by  "adopting"  one  in  her  old  age.  He  lived  with  this  woman 
until  her  death,  providing  her  with  all  the  necessities  and  comforts. 

As  a  young  boy,  he  attended  public  schools  and  demonstrated  his  brilliance 
and  leadership  at  an  early  age.  When  graduating  from  8  th  grade,  he  gave  the  class 
prophecy.  At  approximately  this  time,  Raymond  became  independent— he  had  a 

93 


Dr.  Raymond  Moore 


newspaper  route.  He  delivered  his  papers  to  some  of  the  hotels  in  Lake  Bluff  which 
soon  came  to  be  his  favorite  stops.  At  the  corner  of  Moffet  and  Sheridan  there  used 
to  be  the  Sheridan  Inn,  run  by  Mrs.  Fawlor.  Raymond  would  stop  there  on  cold 
winter  mornings  and  Mrs.  Fawlor  would  sit  and  talk  with  him  over  a  cup  of  hot 
chocolate. 

High  school  is  where  his  leadership  actually  developed.  He  attended  Waukegan 
High  School  and  was  chosen  as  president  of  the  senior  class,  receiving  various  other 
honors  as  well.  But  Dr.  Moore's  talents  were  not  only  scholastic;  he  was  an  excellent 
Irish  tenor  and  a  good  piano  player.  There  was  a  Boys'  Glee  Club  Minstrel  Show 
at  a  nearby  country  club  when  he  was  a  junior  in  high  school.  The  Lake  Bluff  Chat 
(June  7,  1919)  reported  that  Raymond  Moore  was  astonishingly  good  in  all  his 
parts.  He  also  mastered  some  6  to  8  ethnic  accents,  and  was  particularly  good  with 
Irish.  When  he  told  an  ethnic  joke,  he  used  these  accents,  which  made  him  an  ex- 
tremely entertaining  young  man.  He  was  known  for  his  wildly  hilarious  stories  as 
well  as  his  ability  to  speak  seriously.  It  was  later  said  that  when  Dr.  Moore  spoke 
to  the  students  of  his  high  school,  he  could  literally  have  them  in  tears  (from  shame 
over  a  conflict  between  the  students  and  administration).  Not  all  great  orators  are 
gourmet  cooks,  but  Raymond  Moore  was  one.  So  he  impressed  a  great  many  peo- 
ple with  his  talents  as  well  as  his  scholarly  achievements. 

Raymond  made  good  use  of  his  talents.  He  went  on  the  vaudeville  stage  and 
did  much  touring  of  the  east  before  he  returned  to  his  schooling.  He  also  partici- 
pated a  great  deal  in  the  activities  of  Lake  Bluff.  For  example,  on  January  1,  1915, 
he  participated  in  a  New  Year's  celebration  to  be  held  at  the  Lake  Bluff  Village 
Hall.  During  the  festivities,  he  joined  the  town  chorus  in  an  Indian  song. 

At  this  point  in  his  life,  Raymond  began  college.  He  worked  his  way  through 
Lake  Forest  College  where  he  received  his  Bachelors  Decree.  He  then  went  on  to 
Harvard  to  receive  his  Masters.  His  interest  was  education;  he  earned  tuition  by 
supervising  activities  for  groups  of  children.  He  is  quoted  as  saying,  "I  found  I  was 
able  to  handle  young  people  and  decided  that  was  the  kind  of  life  I  wanted." 

It  is  believed  that  his  first  position  was  in  Mexico,  Missouri  where  he  taught  at 
the  Missouri  Military  Academy.  Because  he  had  his  Masters  in  English,  he  taught 
some  of  the  English  courses  offered.  Desoite  the  fact  he  was  a  young  man  fresh  out 
of  college,  he  was  soon  appointed  principal .  Shortly  after  this,  he  went  to  Kansas 
City  (Missouri")  Day  School  where  he  was  Dean  and  chairman  of  the  English  de- 
partment. So  from  1922-1927,  Raymond  Moore  had  become  the  principal  of  two 
schools.  In  1927,  he  transferred  to  the  Milwaukee  University  School,  a  private 
school.  Mr.  Ted  Cavins,  a  former  teacher  and  friend  of  Dr.  Moore's,  states  that  Dr. 
Moore  was  very  successful  at  Milwaukee.  Apparently,  he  was  very  good  as  an  ad- 
ministrator of  small,  private  schools;  it  was  when  they  got  bigger  that  he  encountered 
problems.  From  Milwaukee  he  then  went  to  Grosse  Point  Country  Day  School  near 
Detroit,  Michigan  where  he  was  accorded  the  position  of  a  headmaster,  a  consider- 
able promotion  over  his  previous  position.  But  he  onlv  stayed  one  year,  (1934),  in 
this  school  for  the  children  of  auto  executives.  In  1935,  he  came  to  Lake  Forest 
High  School. 

Many  wonder  why  he  chose  to  stay  so  long  at  this  school.  Perhaps  the  answer 
is  found  in  the  following  quote  in  the  high  school  scrapbook  of  November  1 1 ,  1957. 
"I  considered  it  a  challenge  and  an  opportunity  to  repay  an  obligation  to  the  resi- 
dents of  the  area.  I've  never  been  sorrv  about  making  the  move  and  am  grateful 
that  I  dedicated  my  life  to  education."  He  felt  that  he  could  attempt  to  repay  the 
community  that  had  shown  him  so  much  kindness  as  a  child. 

94 


Once  established  in  Lake  Forest  High  School,  Raymond  Moore  developed  a 
method  of  teaching  that  reflected  his  philosophies.  By  studying  these  philosophies, 
we  can  also  see  him  as  a  man.  The  duty  of  an  administrator  was  outlined  as  follows: 
"A  high  school  administrator  should  not  limit  his  vision  and  activities  to  that  which 
lies  only  on  this  side  of  commencement  day.  It  is  his  responsibility  to  see  that  provi- 
sions are  made  for  those  of  his  students  who  intend  to  go  on  to  higher  education  and 
at  the  same  time  not  being  unmindful  of  those  whose  formal  education  will  end  with 
graduation  from  high  school."  Thus,  we  can  see  that  Raymond  Moore  believed  that 
the  principal  was  the  guiding  light  of  the  school.  He  felt  it  was  his  job  to  not  only 
attend  to  the  school's  administrative  problems,  but  also  to  see  that  each  student 
was  receiving  a  good  education.  It  is  clear  that  this  certainly  is  an  admirable  goal; 
whether  or  not  he  achieved  it  will  be  discussed  later. 

His  policy  toward  education  can  be  seen  in  the  Lake  Forest  High  School  scrap- 
book  of  November  11,  1957.  "Since  our  people  are  democratic  and  in  the  prepara- 
tion of  young  people  for  successful  living  is  the  accepted  policy  of  American  Educa- 
tion, the  secondary  school  should  set  its  goal  to  teach  the  necessary  information  and 
to  instill  habits  of  intelligent  living  that  will  make  them  useful  citizens  in  the  school 
and  in  the  community  in  which  they  live."  One  can  conclude  that  Dr.  Moore  con- 
sidered more  than  just  the  3  R's  in  getting  a  good  education.  He  evidently  felt  that 
the  school  was  a  means  whereby  a  student  was  taught  the  values  of  our  society.  It 
was  a  beginning  lesson  in  government  and  community  living.  This  made  an  educa- 
tion useful;  for  without  maturity  and  the  ability  to  use  the  knowledge  you  have 
gained,  it  is  useless. 

He  also  felt  that  the  faculty  was  one  of  the  key  factors  in  establishing  a  good 
educational  system.  It  was  they  who  were  going  to  urge  the  students  on  to  higher 
education.  When  asked  what  promoted  an  increase  in  the  number  of  students  at 
LFHS  going  to  college,  Moore  responded,  * 'Although  a  certain  amount  of  credit 
must  be  given  to  the  general  trend  toward  higher  education,  I  feel  that  faculty 
guidance  in  the  school,  showing  the  students  that  the  gates  are  open,  is  responsible 
for  the  increased  figure." 

To  succeed  was  Dr.  Moore's  desire.  He  felt  that  every  student  had  potential 
to  succeed.  Turning  to  the  scrapbook  of  October  29,  1952,  we  see  this  is  true.  "I 
believe  that  a  student  with  average  ability  and  a  strong  determination  to  succeed  is 
more  likely  to  make  a  better  record  than  one  who  fails  to  take  his  or  her  work 
seriously." 

Because  Dr.  Moore  felt  that  every  student  could  become  successful,  he  did  his 
best  to  see  that  they  were  put  in  the  best  of  schools  after  graduation.  He  especially 
favored  the  eastern  schools,  such  as  Harvard,  where  he  got  his  Masters.  By  1957, 
this  college  effort  involved  approximately  80%  of  the  students.  But  he  did  not  neg- 
lect the  other  20% .  He  said  that  not  all  emphasis  in  vocational  guidance  was  placed 
on  those  students  going  to  college.  He  created  more  technical  and  home  economics 
courses.  As  subsequent  events  demonstrated,  however,  Dr.  Moore  was  not  quite 
farsighted  enough.  He  felt  that  this  was  all  that  was  necessary.  Today's  work-study 
programs  were  out  of  the  question  at  the  time.  According  to  Miss  Cory,  he  simply 
would  have  been  shocked  at  the  school's  policy  towards  these  students  today. 

He  would  often  travel  to  various  colleges  and  universities  visiting  old  students 
and  freshmen.  The  purpose  was  twofold.  First,  Moore  wanted  to  see  how  the  student 
was  adjusting  himself  in  and  outside  of  classes  so  that  help  and  advice  could  be 
given  if  it  was  needed.  Second,  he  wished  to  see  if  LFHS  had  failed  or  succeeded  in 
helping  the  student  prepare  for  college.  Likewise,  many  students  returned  to  visit 
Raymond  Moore.  For  many  of  these  students,  Raymond  had  been  the  sole  means 

95 


by  which  they  were  financially  able  to  get  to  college.  It  is  well  known  that  he  had 
numerous  influential  people  as  friends.  If  he  ever  called  upon  them  to  aid  some 
student  with  a  scholarship,  they  were  always  glad  to  help.  In  fact,  some  of  the  chil- 
dren of  teachers  attended  college  only  by  his  generosity  and  concern.  It  is  suspected 
that  he  may  have  also  used  his  personal  funds  several  times  to  help  students.  Some 
students  felt  a  great  deal  of  resentment  over  his  favoritism.  Dr.  Moore  would  choose 
only  certain  students,  it  was  said;  and  those  students  were  also  invariably  wealthy. 
Perhaps  once  in  a  while  he  would  favor  a  student  who  wasn't  well-to-do.  For  those 
he  patronized,  he  did  his  utmost  to  find  precisely  the  right  college  besides  making 
things  easier  at  LFHS.  Another  interesting  note  is  that  many  of  his  "pets"  were 
boys.  It  is  generally  agreed  that  he  did  favor  boys  over  girls  when  giving  attention. 

His  attitude  toward  teachers  is  another  story  entirely.  It  can  best  be  seen  in  a 
paper  he  presented  to  the  National  Association  of  Secondary  School  Principals' 
37th  Annual  Convention.  The  paper  was  titled,  How  Can  Faculty  Meetings  Be 
Used  to  Improve  Professional  Growth?  Not  only  did  he  look  for  teachers  with  sev- 
eral (four)  years  experience  in  teaching,  but  he  felt  that  faculty  meetings  were  an 
integral  factor  in  teaching.  Teachers  now  should  have  greater  knowledge  of  subject 
matters,  increased  information  and  concern  about  teaching  materials,  should  have 
active  participation  in  community  life,  and  be  willing  to  share  and  accept  outside 
ideas.  Young  teachers  were  apt  to  be  lacking  in  experience,  but  had  enthusiasm 
and  ideals  not  known  to  the  older  ones.  The  older  ones,  on  the  other  hand,  were 
more  experienced  but  tended  to  resist  new  ideas  once  they  were  established  in  a 
pattern  that  was  suitable.  Therefore,  Dr.  Moore  looked  for  a  faculty  that  was  rela- 
tively young  (and  they  were)  and  that  was  willing  to  be  flexible  in  creating  a  new 
secondary  school  system. 

Opinions  of  a  man  often  reflect  some  of  his  character.  But  opinions  about 
Raymond  Moore  are  opposites.  He  was  two  people.  He  had  a  violent  temper, 
seemingly  from  insecurity;  things  simply  had  to  go  his  way.  And  yet,  despite  his 
staunchness,  he  was  an  excellent  administrator.  Some  felt  that  he  lacked  sympathy 
or  true  emotion,  or  at  least,  never  showed  any  warmth.  He  always  seemed  to  find 
fault  in  his  staff  and  students.  But  those  who  were  his  close  friends  realized  that  this 
was  a  man  who  had  dedicated  his  life  to  giving  opportunities  to  other  students,  op- 
portunities he  never  had.  He  let  no  one  stop  him,  and  there  were  many,  many  who 
got  hurt  by  his  "callousness."  Naturally  he  had  those  around  him  who  disliked  him 
intensely,  as  with  any  man;  there  were  those  who  were  the  scapegoats  of  all  the 
school's  problems,  and  it  was  they  who  cried  in  the  faculty  washroom  after  some  of 
Dr.  Moore's  biting  comments.  In  retrospect,  though,  most  realize  that  he  had  given 
up  the  identity  he  had  as  a  man  to  take  up  the  identity  of  the  school  and  all  it  stood 
for.  He  was  the  school.  Let  us  turn  to  some  of  the  opinions  of  the  students  about 
Raymond  Moore. 

"He  believed  in  the  aristocracy  of  a  person,  the  quality  of  his  mind  and  not  his 
background  or  how  rich  he  was.  He  thought  everyone  should  live  but  to  his  own 
standards,  his  own  potential." 

"He  was  very  capable  and  I'm  sure  he  got  a  lot  of  kids  into  college  who 
wouldn't  have  gotten  in  otherwise." 

"Dr.  Moore  was  very  strict." 

The  teachers'  opinions  of  him  are  somewhat  more  penetrating. 

"He  was  a  very  generous,  large-hearted  Irishman.  He'd  give  you  anything.  He 
had  a  quick  temper  though  and  got  very  angry  easily,  but  he  had  a  big  sense  of 
humor  and  a  beautiful  Irish  tenor  voice.  He  was  always  very  interested  in  the  stu- 
dents and  in  all  of  Lake  Forest  High  School." 

96 


"He's  dead  now  and  I  don't  want  to  spread  any  stones  about  him  or  go  on 
record  as  saying  anything  bad  about  him,  only  that  he  was  totally  lacking  in  any 
kindness  or  understanding." 

"He  was  a  gentleman." 

"I  hated  him.  He  showed  no  kindness  whatsoever  and  was  cruel." 

One  of  his  eccentricities  was  that  he  was  very  insistent  that  no  one,  absolutely 
no  one,  use  his  parking  place.  He  was  also  just  as  strict  about  the  front  door;  under 
no  circumstances  were  the  students  allowed  to  use  it.  The  school  was  run  strictly. 

By  no  means  did  he  neglect  other  interests.  He  was  an  honorary  member  of 
the  Kiwanis  Club,  a  member  of  the  Harvard  Club,  the  University  and  Lake  Zurich 
Golf  Clubs.  He  once  said,  "I  like  golf  but  my  greatest  hobby  is  working  with  peo- 
ple's children."  He  was  actually  the  one  who  began  the  Winter  Club  in  Lake  Forest. 
The  idea  behind  its  creation  was  to  provide  for  the  children  of  the  wealthy  of  Lake 
Forest. 

Raymond  Moore  also  served  during  World  War  II.  He  left  the  school  for  the 
Navy  V-12  program  in  the  spring  of  1943  as  a  Lieutenant,  Senior  Grade.  Mr.  Stan- 
ley Nelson,  a  math  teacher,  took  over  as  the  Acting  Principal.  He  had  previously 
been  the  Acting  Assistant  Principal,  but  when  he  changed  positions  that  year,  Miss 
Cory  was  the  Acting  Assistant  Principal.  She  said  that  there  were  absolutely  no 
problems  while  he  was  gone.  From  time  to  time,  Dr.  Moore  would  leave  Columbia 
University  where  he  was  staying  to  visit  the  school. 

Then,  in  May  of  1945,  Raymond  Moore  became,  officially,  Dr.  Moore.  He 
received  a  degree  as  a  Doctor  of  Pedagogy  (or  the  art  of  teaching).  From  that  point 
on,  he  insisted  that  everyone  call  him  Dr.  Moore. 

Raymond  Moore  made  many  wise  decisions  during  his  administration.  Of 
course,  there  were  those  that  were  impulsive  and  may  not  have  been  wise  in  the 
least.  Sometimes,  he  was  simply  blind  to  the  situation.  For  example,  at  a  faculty 
meeting  one  afternoon,  there  was  a  discussion  over  problems  brought  about  by 
students  with  hearing  problems.  One  teacher  spoke  up  and  asked  if  the  high  school 
had  an  audiometer.  Moore  was  slightly  surprised  and  snapped,  "We  don't  need 
one  "  Yet,  it  had  been  discovered  that  there  were  several  students  in  the  school  who 
were  hard  of  hearing  and  failing  in  some  courses.  There  may  have  been  more  who 
could  be  greatly  helped  if  someone  had  recognized  the  problem.  But  for  Dr.  Moore, 
the  issue  was  settled. 

Another  decision  that  could  have  been  questioned  concerned  Student  Council. 
A  faculty  member,  involved  with  the  Council  was  ill  and  in  the  hospital.  The  faculty 
advisor,  as  well  as  the  Council,  thought  it  would  be  a  nice  gesture  if  they  sent  him 
an  appropriate  gift — a  book.  The  issue  was  taken  to  Dr.  Moore  for  clearance  and 
he  refused  permission.  Such  action  was  not  to  be  taken  with  Student  Council  funds. 
In  fact,  he  got  so  upset  over  the  matter  that  he  proceeded  to  show  the  teacher  his 
anger.  When  he  demanded  if  she  agreed  with  him  she  quietly  said  no.  This  angered 
him  even  further  for  he  simply  could  not  see  using  activity  funds  for  a  gift.  Instead, 
the  students  donated  their  own  money  and  purchased  the  book. 

Dr.  Moore  was  concerned  with  creating  a  good  public  impression.  For  exam- 
ple, he  was  disturbed  by  the  paint  in  the  art  room  being  left  out.  He  thought  it 
looked  messy.  When  he  asked,  "Well,  what  will  people  think  when  they  see  this?" 
Someone  answered  that  they  would  probably  think  it  was  an  art  room. 

One  interesting  aspect  of  his  personality  is  that  he  could  not  stand  regularity. 
He  always  complained  that  he  was  tired  and  he  had  to  get  away,  but  what  he  really 
meant  was  that  he  was  restless.  He  traveled  extensively,  visiting  colleges  and  stu- 

97 


dents  and  looking  for  new  teachers.  Because  of  this,  he  maintained  a  $9,000  ex- 
pense account  at  school;  quite  an  extraordinary  sum  just  for  travels  in  a  year. 

Raymond  Moore  was  not  a  religious  man  in  the  true  sense  of  the  word.  But 
he  often  quoted  the  Bible  when  asked  for  advice.  Again,  this  shows  the  contradic- 
tions and  dual  character  of  this  man.  He  was  said  to  have  shunned  the  Church  as 
an  institution.  Some  may  surmise  that  he  had  a  personal  religion,  one  that  would 
explain  his  very  good  knowledge  of  the  Bible. 

Another  interest  of  his  was  grammar.  He  was  very  good  at  this  aspect  of  the 
English  language.  One  amusing  example  of  his  interest  is  that  one  day  he  took  a 
poll,  asking  everyone  whether  red  in  the  phrase  "the  red  plaid  skirt"  was  an  adverb 
or  not! 

He  often  displayed  considerations  for  others.  Sometimes  he  would  send  a  gift 
to  one  of  the  teachers  or  save  something  that  he  thought  one  of  them  might  be  in- 
terested in.  At  one  point  in  his  career,  he  helped  a  student  other  than  in  a  monetary 
manner.  The  student  was  somehow  involved  in  an  accident  that  led  to  the  death  of 
the  student's  father.  Raymond  Moore  sent  several  teachers  to  the  court  to  speak  in 
his  behalf  to  the  judge  and  it  was  probably  because  of  this,  and  this  alone,  that  the 
boy  was  saved  from  prosecution. 

Dr.  Moore  was  married  for  a  short  while  between  the  years  1947  and  1949  to 
a  woman  named  Mary  Kennedy.  They  were  both  about  50  years  old  at  the  time. 
There  was  a  small,  quiet  ceremony  at  the  Church  of  the  Holy  Spirit  in  Lake  Forest. 
There  were  some  school  officials  there  along  with  his  friends.  The  two  made  their 
home  on  Rose  Terrace.  Little  is  known  about  the  marriage  as  such,  but  some  be- 
lieve that  it  was  not  a  good  one. 

Dr.  Moore  had  several  very  close  friends.  One  of  them  was  Howard  Wood  of 
the  Chicago  Tribune.  Also,  Philip  Spiedel  was  a  good  friend,  as  was  Ted  Cavins.  As 
Moore  neared  death,  Howard  Wood  and  his  son,  Bob,  took  care  of  him,  besides 
keeping  Lake  Forest  informed  of  his  health  (for  he  was  in  Florida  at  the  time).  The 
many  plane  trips  and  concern  show  their  devotion  to  this  man. 

In  1958,  when  he  broke  up  his  home,  Dr.  Moore  gave  most  of  his  effects  to 
the  old  staff.  But  this  was  not  unique  for  him.  When  entertaining  in  his  home  with 
the  faculty  or  friends,  if  someone  admired  an  artifact  or  antique,  he  would  say, 
"Here,  take  it.  It's  yours." 

When  the  original  Board  went  out  of  office,  he  used  his  knowledge  of  gourmet 
cooking  and  made  them  an  exquisite  dinner. 

About  this  time,  a  phase-out  policy  was  beginning  concerning  Dr.  Moore's 
retirement.  The  school  simply  could  not  dismiss  him  entirely  one  year.  He  was  the 
founder  of  the  school  and  had  made  it  what  it  was — one  of  the  best  college  pre- 
paratory high  schools  in  the  country.  So,  an  "understudy"  was  employed  in  the  late 
1950's.  Slowly,  year  by  year,  he  took  on  more  and  more  duties  as  administrator  of 
the  school.  Therefore,  Dr.  Moore  never  really  retired,  he  was  gently  and  kindly 
eased  out  of  office.  In  the  Board  of  Education  minutes  of  September  14,  1960  and 
September  30,  1960,  he  officially  accepted  a  position  as  principal  of  a  school  in 
Roselle,  Illinois.  He  also  retired  from  his  position  on  the  school  board.  His  letter  of 
resignation  was  effective  September  30,  1960.  However,  he  did  not  stay  very  long 
at  his  new  school.  Perhaps  he  discovered  that  Lake  Forest  was  where  he  always 
belonged.  He  died  in  December  of  1970. 

Raymond  Moore  was  a  man  of  the  times.  His  methods  of  accomplishing  what 
he  did  may  not  have  agreed  with  many,  and  he  may  have  altered  the  lives  of  others 
both  for  the  good  and  the  bad,  but  none  can  deny  his  great  achievements. 


9K 


The  Forest  Scout  Supplement  of  1939  offers  some  insight  into  the  contrasting 
impressions  left  by  this  man.  "He  set  up  a  code  that  has  helped  every  student  to  a 
cleaner  outlook  on  life  and  would  materially  aid  the  graduates  when  their  philosophy 
was  put  to  the  test.  He  has  been  an  understanding  leader  and  an  encouraging  com- 
panion to  every  student." 


Epilogue 


In  the  years  since  1966,  Lake  Forest  High  School  has  undergone  a  series  of 

transformations:  changes  in  size  and  structure,  academics  and  attitudes,  courses  and 
concerns.  It  has  grown,  modernized,  liberalized  and  relaxed  the  tightly-knit  big- 
family  atmosphere  of  its  earlier  days.  It  has  listened,  adapted,  and  expanded  in 
preparation  for  the  years  to  come. 

Most  obvious  are  the  physical  changes  at  Lake  Forest  High  School.  Noting 
the  tremendous  increase  in  student  enrollment  (455  students  attended  in  1955, 
1,480  in  1968)  plans  were  considered  in  the  mid  1960's  for  expanding  the  original 
facilities.  Community-wide  debates  ensued — would  a  large  addition  to  the  present 
school  solve  the  problem?  Could  Lake  Bluff  possibly  build  a  school  of  its  own? 
Would  a  second  LFHS  be  worth  the  problems,  the  confusion  and  the  cost? 

In  1964,  Lake  Forest  and  Lake  Bluff  residents  were  asked  this  last  question 
in  a  bond  referendum.  The  proposal  was  defeated  nearly  5  to  2.  For  the  time  being, 
additions  were  made  to  the  old  building — the  "annex"  providing  more  classroom 
space,  a  lighter,  larger  library  and  a  gymnastics  gym. 

But  Lake  Forest  and  its  student  population  kept  growing,  and  projections  in- 
dicated that  LFHS  would  reach  its  capacity  in  1969.  Concerned  and  running  out 
of  time,  the  Board  of  Education  formed  a  Citizens  Consultation  Committee,  with 
J.  R.  Schoulberg  as  President,  to  investigate  future  alternatives.  The  old  arguments 
came  up,  and  although  many  thought  a  two-school  system  would  split  the  communi- 
ty, architects  estimated  that  buying  the  residential  area  surrounding  the  present 
campus  and  building  another  addition  would  cost  nearly  one  million  dollars  more 
than  constructing  a  new  school  on  the  West  Lake  Forest  property  the  school  al- 
ready owned. 

In  1967,  another  referendum  was  held,  this  time  issuing  $4,350,000  for  the 
building  of  a  new  high  school.  However,  all  construction  bids  were  more  than 
$300,000  above  this  figure,  "Which  leaves  no  money  for  pencil  sharpeners,"  said 
one  Forest  Scout  article  in  February,  1970. 

Construction  began  in  1970,  in  what  had  been  a  corn  field  near  Waukegan  and 
Westleigh  roads.  The  geometrical  superstructure,  designed  by  Metz,  Train,  Olson 
and  Youngren  and  built  by  Jenkins  and  Boiler  Co.  was  ready  for  students,  but  by 
no  means  completed,  in  the  fall  of  1971.  874  freshman  and  sophomores  entered  the 
muddy,  board  and  nail-ridden  construction  confusion  that  was  taking  the  shape  of 
a  modern  high  school.  Designed  "from  the  inside  out,"  West  Campus  is  a  cluster 
of  classrooms — each  a  different  shape  connected  by  maze-type  corridors.  Special 
features  are  lecture  rooms  seating  several  classes  at  a  time,  and  a  conversation 
lounge,  referred  to  as  the  Commons.  All  but  finished,  the  brown  brick  building  with 
the  bright  orange  and  yellow  interior  was  dedicated  in  May,  1972. 

99 


Alone  at  the  old  school,  newly  dubbed  East  Campus,  juniors  and  seniors 
found  classes  and  corridors  less  crowded,  less  noisy  than  in  previous  years. 

Because  many  courses  are  offered  at  one  campus  only,  the  split  brought  about 
the  Shuttle  Bus  era.  Hundreds  of  students  ,laden  with  books,  coats,  sports  equip- 
ment and  musical  instruments  take  the  10  minute  ride  between  schools  for  classes 
during  the  day  and  activities  after  school. 

For  the  first  few  years  at  least,  LFHS  West  Campus  is  to  be  for  freshman  and 
sophomores  only.  Built  with  "a  capacity  to  expand"  the  new  school  has  13  acres 
in  which  to  add  an  auditorium,  specialized  gyms,  more  classrooms  and  a  football 
field.  Perhaps  then,  if  population  growth  rates  follow  predictions,  West  and  East 
campuses  may  both  become  four-year  high  schools. 

Less  apparent,  but  perhaps  more  important  are  the  changes  in  attitude  at 
LFHS.  Gone  are  the  hall-monitors  who  used  to  stop  students  for  a  blue  or  pink 
pass,  the  assigned  no-talking  study  halls,  and  the  half-hour  homeroom  periods  of 
earlier  days. 

Due  largely  to  the  efforts  of  Student  Council  and  Forum,  a  group  of  students 
and  teachers  formed  in  1968  to  discuss  current  problems,  a  series  of  resolutions 
eased  regulations  at  LFHS.  In  the  spring  of  1969,  seniors  were  granted  a  long- 
requested  Senior  Lounge  in  a  converted  basement  storage  room.  (However,  the 
privilege  was  later  revoked  because  of  the  actions  of  an  inconsiderate  minority.) 
Later,  in  1970-71,  a  section  of  the  parking  lot  was  designated  a  "smoking  area"  for 
students  with  parental  permission  to  smoke. 

After  an  extensive  campaign,  including  petitions  and  "peaceful  disobedience," 
the  pants-prohibiting  dress  code  was  abolished  in  January  of  1970.  Thenceforth, 
anything  that  "covered  the  body"  was  acceptable  for  both  sexes,  any  hair  length, 
any  style — provided  that  the  soles  of  the  feet  were  covered. 

Soon  after,  in  "the  spring  of  1970,  study  hall  regulations  were  relaxed.  No 
longer  were  students  required  to  report  for  attendance  in  assigned  classrooms,  and 
request  passes  to  the  library,  the  corridors,  the  washrooms.  Cafeterias  were  con- 
verted into  mass  talk-halls,  with  sections  for  "quiet  study,"  as  well. 

Homeroom  periods,  which  had  once  served  as  small  counseling  groups,  had 
no  real  purpose  in  later  years,  except  to  provide  time  for  occasional  Student  Council 
reports.  The  student  body  had  long  been  criticizing  the  use  of  this  time,  and  in 
January  of  1971,  these  too  were  abolished,  giving  students  the  extra  half -hour  for 
lunch  or  study. 

Student  Council  also  campaigned  for  an  "open  campus"  policy:  the  freedom 
to  leave  school  during  all  free  periods.  Many  school  officials,  Board  members  and 
community  residents  were  opposed  to  this  because  of  the  confusion  and  the  respon- 
sibility it  would  place  on  the  students.  However,  during  1971,  a  compromise  was 
approved  by  the  Board  of  Education,  allowing  students  without  first  or  last  period 
classes  to  come  late  or  leave  school  early. 

The  latest  accomplishment  in  the  evolution  of  LFHS  was  approved  in  May 
of  1972.  Responding  to  criticism  of  the  age-old  "final  evaluation  bit,"  Student 
Council,  with  Administrative  Council  approval,  recommended  that  projects,  papers 
and  various  other  assignments  be  substituted  for  final  exams.  Although  the  decision 
was  left  up  to  each  individual  teacher,  most  agreed  with  the  recommendation. 

Another  Forum  topic  and  cause  for  many  debates  was  scheduling  changes  at 
LFHS.  Beginning  in  the  fall  of  1971,  the  traditional  school  day  of  eight  periods, 
50  minutes  long,  was  abandoned  in  favor  of  a  semi-flexible  system.  Most  classes 
now  run  41  minutes,  with  gym  periods  of  1  hour,  and  science  labs  75  minutes  long 

100 


twice  a  week.  The  system  was  designed  to  give  more  time  to  the  classes  that  needed 
it,  and  more  study  hall  time  to  students  all  around. 

All  of  these  changes,  all  of  these  easing  of  tensions  and  rules  puts  more  re- 
sponsibility onto  LFHS  students.  They  also  imply  that  the  administration  is  con- 
fident in  students'  capability  to  handle  more  freedom.  The  direction  now  is  toward 
even  less  constricting  regulations  and  more  student  self-control. 

Evidence  of  changing  attitudes  is  also  apparent  in  the  course  offerings  at  LFHS 
now.  Trends  in  American  education  have  become  increasingly  small-group  oriented, 
more  interpretive  in  approach.  Lake  Forest  High  School  has  remained  progressive, 
becoming  aware  that  education  is  more  than  regurgitating  facts,  that  there  are  sev- 
eral sides  to  any  issue,  that  perhaps  no  one  is  really  RIGHT. 

Additional  courses  have  been  added  recently  in  the  Social  Studies  department, 
in  the  areas  of  humanities,  sociology,  Asian  studies  and  Russian  history.  In  co- 
operation with  Northwestern  University  and  a  grant  from  the  Ford  Foundation,  a 
Music  Theory  course  was  offered  for  the  first  time  in  1969.  A  connection  with  the 
Illinois  Institute  of  Technology  make  a  computer  science  course  available. 

Other  advancements  in  equipment  brought  a  new  dimension  to  learning  at 
LFHS.  Thru  the  "Telecom,"  formerly  referred  to  as  A-20  and  the  Tape  Center, 
teachers  may  retrieve  television  shows,  videotaped  for  use  in  classes,  and  students 
may  watch  individual  film  "loops"  and  listen    to  language  and  music  tapes. 

There  have  always  been  students  interested  in  areas  outside  course  ranges  or 
working  beyond  organized  class  levels.  In  1971  for  the  first  time,  students  were 
allowed  to  take  courses  on  an  "independent  study"  basis,  working  individually  on 
projects,  readings,  and  papers  rather  than  comins  to  class.  Students  taking  IS  can, 
in  a  sense,  make  up  their  own  course,  provided  it  is  approved  and  supervised  to 
some  extent  by  a  teacher. 

Although  90%  of  LFHS  students  continue  their  education  in  college  after 
graduation,  the  school  does  not  neglect  job  training  areas.  Another  advancement  in 
1971  was  the  beginning  of  the  C.O.E.  program.  Thru  "Co-operative  Occupational 
Education"  students  may  take  a  minimum  of  two  regular  classes,  and  work  the  rest 
of  the  day  for  school  credit.  In  this  wav.  C.O.E.  students  can  receive  on-the-job 
training,  pay  and  a  high  school  diploma  all  at  the  same  time. 

Even  extra-curricular  activities  reflect  the  changing  attitudes  at  LFHS.  Stu- 
dents' interests  are  turning  outward,  into  the  communitv.  into  the  world.  Since  1966, 
Future  Teachers  of  America  (FT A)  has  heloed  build  schools  in  Iran  and  Peru, 
launching  profitable  "Buy  a  Brick"  campaigns.  Human  Relations  Club  was  founded 
in  1968  to  "further  interest  and  understanding  in  human  relations — to  promote 
good  will."  In  the  first  few  years  of  its  existence,  the  club  has  sent  volunteers  to 
Downy  Veterans'  Hospital,  sent  "mice  to  college"  for  cancer  research  (at  270  a 
piece),  and  sent  paperback  books  to  prisoners  in  jail. 

When  concern  for  the  environment  spread  over  America  in  1969,  Project  Sur- 
vival was  formed  at  LFHS.  Later  to  be  called  C.L.A.W. — for  its  goal  of  Clean 
Land,  Air  and  Water,  the  organization  was  tremendously  popular  during  its  first 
year.  Recycling  newspaper  and  glass  bottles  in  Lake  Forest  and  Lake  Bluff,  the 
group  was  able  to  earn  several  thousand  dollars  during  two  consecutive  years  and 
spend  it  on  huge  spring  "Teach-Outs"  bringing  speakers,  movies  and  displays  to 
community  and  school  audiences. 

In  the  past  few  years,  LFHS  students  have  watched  much  of  the  "social  life" 
that  used  to  revolve  around  the  school  dwindle.  Occasional  sock  hops  during  1969 
and  1970  drew  meager  crowds,  and  were  all  but  discontinued  during  the  next  two 
years.  Prom,  the  formal  spring  dance  sponsored  by  the  Junior  class  has  recently 

101 


been  on  the  up-swing  however.  Beginning  in  1970  when  a  "quirk  of  fate"  engaged  a 
popular  rock  group  SHA-NA-NA  for  a  class  concert  and  drew  in  $4,000  profit, 
Prom  began  to  take  on  extravagant  dimensions.  The  class  of  '72  rented  a  huge 
party  tent,  held  the  dance  on  the  school's  front  lawn  and  later  transported  students 
to  the  Ivanhoe  in  Chicago  for  a  late  dinner.  Not  to  be  outdone,  the  class  of  '73  had 
to  campaign  all  year  for  sufficent  funds  to  match  the  festivities  the  next  year.  A 
precedent  had  been  set,  and  Proms  from  then  on  would  be  spectacular. 

In  the  37  years  of  its  existence,  Lake  Forest  High  School  has  developed  from 
basic  courses  in  English  and  math  to  pre-flight  to  computer  science;  from  mohair 
sweaters  to  black  leather  jackets  to  blue  denim  jeans.  The  pass-checking,  sock- 
hopping,  bell-regulated  days  have  given  way  to  a  new  building,  a  new  system,  a 
new  kind  of  student. 

Researching  and  reflecting  on  the  history  of  Lake  Forest  High  School,  students 
were  surprised  at  many  things  ("You  mean  they  actually  scrubbed  the  Senior  Star?") 
But  Student  Council  still  strives  for  more  independence,  editorials  still  appear  in  the 
Forest  Scout  about  lack  of  school  spirit  and  students  still  run  down  the  halls. 

Once  students'  lives,  academic  and  social,  revolved  around  the  high  school 
and  depended  on  it  for  classes  during  the  week  and  entertainment  after  school.  Now 
LFHS  students  are  turned  outward,  looking  beyond  the  school  to  what's  going  on  all 
around. 

The  family  school  of  the  earlier  days  has  grown  up  and  grown  apart  some- 
what, as  families  do.  The  younger  students  have  moved  to  a  different  campus,  and 
yet  are  still  tied  to  the  old  one.  And  in  their  junior  year  they  enter  from  the  west 
through  the  once  forbidden  front  door.  Already  they  are  more  skeptical,  more  ma- 
ture and  more  perceptive  of  what  education  should  do  for  them.  The  role  of  the 
teacher  has  been  redefined;  coercion,  censorship,  and  intimidation  have  been  largely 
discarded.  The  students,  faculty  and  administration  see  a  more  beneficial  ideal  for 
the  pedagogical  institution — that  the  high  school  should  serve  as  a  catalyst,  exciting 
inherent  curiosities  and  introducing  a  panorama  of  ideas  and  the  frontiers  of 
knowledge.  The  high  school  is  the  first  line  of  defense  in  the  fight  to  preserve  the 
precious  individual.  It  must  encourage  creative  independence  and  the  development 
of  a  viable  identity  for  every  adolescent  on  the  threshold  of  adulthood.  In  the  future, 
the  efficacy  of  the  high  school  in  fulfilling  these  responsibilities  may  determine  the 
psychological  survival  of  those  it  serves. 


102 


Appendix 
Varsity  Football  and  Basketball 

1935-1965 


FOOTBALL 

BASKETBALL 

Place  in 

Place  in 

Year 

Record 

Conference 

Record 

Conference 

1935-36 

— 

— 

— 

— 

1936-37 

4-1-3 

— 

10-1 

1st 

1937-38 

7-1 

1st 

8-6 

4th 

1938-39 

6-2 

3rd 

poor  record 

1939-40 

— 

— 

— 

— 

1940-41 

7-1 

1st 

— 

5th 

1941-42 

4-4 

5th 

2-17 

last 

1942-43 

— 

— 

suspended* 

1943-44 

5-2 

— 

suspended* 

1944-45 

7-0 

1st 

5-11 

— 

1945-46 

— 

— 

— 

— 

1946-47 

undefeated 

1st 

conf. 

champs 

1st 

1947-48 

8-0 

1st 

— 

5th 

1948-49 

3-2-1 

4th 

4-8 

5th 

1949-50 

3-3 

3rd 

4-8 

5th 

1950-51 

4-2 

3rd 

8-2 

2nd 

1951-52 

6-3 

1st 

11-1 

1st 

1952-53 

5-3 

— 

— 

last 

1953-54 

— 

3rd 

5-9 

— 

1954-55 

4-4 

3rd 

4-10 

— 

1955-56 

3-5 

— 

9-11 

■ — 

1956-57 

4-3 

5th 

3-11 

— 

1957-58 

6-2 

2nd 

8-6 

4th 

1958-59 

7-1 

2nd 

8-6 

4th 

1959-60 

7-1 

1st 

7-7 

— 

1960-61 

8-0 

1st 

7-12 

7th 

1961-62 

8-0 

1st 

12-10 

4th 

1962-63 

8-0 

1st 

22-2 

1st 

1963-64 

8-0 

1st 

16-7 

2nd 

1964-65 

5-3 

3rd 

10-7 

2nd 

*Because  of  the  gasoline  rationing  due  to  the  War. 

103 


1300 


1200 


1100 


1000 


900 


800 


700 


600 


500 


400 
370 


VJl 


-Lake  Forest  High  School  Student  Population 
1935-1966 


104 


Evolution  of  Curriculum, 
1935-1965 


1935-36 

ENGLISH 

English  I-IV 


1949-50 


English  I-IV 
Remedial  English  I,  II 
English  IV  H 
English  IV  Speech 


1964-65 


Remedial  Reading  I-IV 
Linguistic  Skills  I-IV 
Developmental  Reading,  I-IV 
Literature  Composition,  reg.  and 

H  I-IV 
Remedial  English  I,  II 
Literary  Seminar  III 
Logical  Thinking  III 
Advanced  Writing  III 
Practical  Thinking,  III,  IV 
Rhetoric-Literature,  III,  IV 
American  Studies,  Non-fiction 
American  Studies,  Prose-fiction 
Speech 

Discussion  and  Debate 
Public  Speaking 
Drama 
Journalism 


LANGUAGE 

Latin  I-III 
French  I,  II 


SOCIAL  STUDIES 

World  History 
U.  S.  History 
Community  Life 


Latin  I-IV 
French  I-III 
Spanish  I,  II 


Latin  I-IV,  reg./H 
French  I-IV,  reg./H 
Spanish  I-IV,  reg./H 
Portuguese  III,  IV 
Greek 
German,  I-IV 


World  History 
U.  S.  History 
English  History 
Ancient  History 
Latin  American  History 
Far  East  History 
Modern  European 
Community  Life 


World  History  I,  II 

Ancient  History 

Geography 

Latin  American 

Oriental 

Modern  European 

Problems  of  Democracy 

Economics 

English  History 

Practical  U.  S.  History 

U.  S.  History,  reg./H 

Humanities 


105 


1935-36 


1949-50 


1964-65 


MATHEMATICS 

Math  I-IV 
Commercial  Math 


General  Math 

Algebra 

Plane  Geometry 

Advanced  Algebra 

Solid  Geometry 

Trigonometry 


SCIENCE 

Biology 

Chemistry 

Physics 


General  Science 
Biology 
Chemistry 
Physics 


BUSINESS  EDUCATION 


Typewriting  I,  II 

Stenography 

Bookkeeping 


Typing  I,  II 
Bookkeeping 
Stenography 
Business  Arithmetic 


INDUSTRIAL  ARTS 

Industries,  I,  II 
General  Mechanical 

Drawing 
Textiles 


I.  A.  Shop  I-IV 
T.  A.  Drawing  I-IV 


Pre-Algebra  I 

General  Math  I 

Industrial  Math  I 

Algebra  I,  reg./H 

Intermediate  Algebra  I 

Practical  Geometry  II 

Geometry  II 

Plane  and  Solid  Geometry,  H  II 

Advanced  Algebra  III 

Advanced  Algebra  and 

Trigonometry,  H  III 
College  Algebra  and 

Trigonometry  III 
Consumer  Math  IV 
Trigonometry  and  Solid 

Geometry  IV 
College  Algebra  IV 
Math  Analysis  IV 

Practical  Science 
General  Science 
Biology,  reg./H 
Practical  Biology 
Chemistry,  reg./H 
Physics,  reg./H 
Biological  Research 
Geology 
Zoology 
Botany 


Personal  Typewriting 
Typewriting 
College  Typewriting 
Advanced  Typewriting 
Stenography 
Notehand 
Accounting 

Advanced  Stenography 
Consumer  Economics 
Office  Practice 
Materials  of  Industry 


General  Shop 
Mechanical  Drawing  I-IV 
Machine  Shop  II,  III 
Welding  II,  III 
Auto  Shop  III,  IV 


106 


1935-36 


1949-50 


1964-65 


ART 

None 

Art  I-IV 
Crafts 

Art  I-IV 
Crafts  I-IV 

HOME  ECONOMICS 

None 

Home  Ec  I-III 

Foods 
Clothing 
Nutrition 
Textiles 

Meal  and  Home  Management 
Style  and  Fashion 
Tailoring 

Advanced  Foods  and  Home 
Furnishings 

MUSIC 

Orchestra 

Orchestra 

Band 

Chorus 

Orchestra 

Band 

Chorus 

A  Cappella  Choir 

OTHER 

None 

Driver  Education 

Driver  Education 
Health 

107 


List  of  Teachers  and 
When  They  Taught 

Dates  such  as  1953  stand  for  the  1953-54  school  year. 

Enid  Alleiiian,  English,  Drama 1962- 

Elizabeth  Read  Allen,  English   1935 

Olive  Allen,  History 1959 

Sara  Allison,  English 1958 

Margaret  Anderson  (Swanson),  Home  Economics 1941-44 

Raymond  Anderson,  Math,  Science 1935-39 

Virginia  Anderson,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1962-64 

Charlene  Ash,  Business 1965-66 

Barbara  Atkinson,  English   1959-61 

Jo  Anne  Ator,  English 1948 

J.  Bailey,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1952-53 

Ralph  Bailey,  Science   1935 

Leonard  Baird,  Math 1962 

Karen  Balestrery,  English 1964-66 

George  Barry,  Science 1960- 

Marian  Bartholomew,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1939-41 

Sandra  Barfells  (Ullmann),  French 1963-65&68 

Norma  Barts,  English   1941 

Virginia  Beamer,  History,  Math 1961-62 

Beth  Bell,  Music  1963 

James  Benton,  Biology   1957- 

Letty  Bergstrom,  English    1946-49 

Joel  Berlatsky,  History   1964-65 

Lewis  Bertsos,  Boys'  Physical  Education 1962- 

Shirley  Biel,  Math 1953-54 

Ann  Blackwell,  Business 1963-64 

Harold  Blount,  Commerce    1939-40 

Daniel  Bogart,  Music    1958-62 

David  Boger,  English   1963 

George  Borich,  Music 1963- 

Ruth  Boston,  Typing 1942 

D.  Boylan,  Math   1 956 

William  Braman,  History 1958- 

Herbert  Brigham,  Science 1962-63 

Velma  Bro,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1954 

J.  K.  Brock,  Industrial  Arts 1940 

Albert  Buckowich,  Math 1958- 

Carol-Iou  Burnham,  Art 1963-64 

Cheryl  Byers,  English,  Speech   1960-61 

R.  D.  Byrne,  History,  Band   1953-54 

M.  Callan,  Math 1951-52 

Carolyn  Caulk,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1954-55 

Nina  Cavins,  Social  Studies 1956 

108 


Theodore  Cavins,  English 1937-44 

Gilberta  Ceisar,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1963- 

Dorothea  Chandler,  Business 1943-44 

Carol  Clark,  Girls'  Physical  Education  1948 

Maureen  Clark,  French 1965 

Gayla  Clemons,  Girls'  Physical  Education   1961- 

C.  A.  Coady,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1952 

Norma  Coe,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1936-38 

Dorothea  Cole,  Home  Economics,  Drama 1938-40 

N.  Conant,  English  1954-55 

Labelva  Connelly,  English . 1935-36 

Virginia  Conrad,  Art,  English  . 1947-54,  56 

William  Conway,  Physics    1960- 

La  Verne  Cooke,  English 1935-36 

Helen  Cory,  Latin,  Guidance 1944- 

Norman  Crampton,  English 1963-65 

Jay  Criche,  English,  Drama 1965- 

Shauneen  Cruise,  English 1965-66 

Janet  Dancey,  German,  Librarian    1935-39 

Deborah  Day,  English  1959-62 

Thomas  Day,  English  1957-58 

Madeleine  Doerfler,  History,  French 1944- 

Wallace  Dohman,  English   1953 

Mary  Donahue,  Home  Economics 1958-60 

V.  Dubois,  Spanish   1949 

Gail  Earles,  Math   1963-64 

G.  Edmondson,  Science 1 959 

L.  Edwards,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1955-56 

Curtis  Eiker,  Social  Studies 1935-65 

La  Verne  Erikson,  Home  Economics 1953 

Roy  E.  Etnyre,  Math   1946-55 

Nancy  Evans,  English   1 965-66 

Victoria  Evans,  English 1 940 

Adrienne  Fasberg  (Woods),  French   1961-64 

Elbert  Field,  Industrial  Arts   1935-40 

C.  Donnan  Fiester,  Industrial  Arts 1942-70 

Fredric  Fortney,  Latin    1964-68 

Roland  Fossell,  Math 1962- 

Dorothy  Franks,  English 1 945-47 

Ardith  Frost,  Girls'  Physical  Education   1942-44 

Jean  Gallery,  English   1963-64 

N.  Germaine,  English,  Art   1945-46 

Leonard  Gilchrist,  Math,  Science 1947-56 

Herbert  Gladding,  English,  Public  Speaking 1946-62 

Nancy  Godwin,  Latin   1961-64 

Martha  Goette,  Art,  English 1943 

James  Gram,  History 1957- 

L.  Gray,  Home  Economics  1955 

Gertrude  Greely,  English,  Art 1936-42 

Sonja  Greenberg,  History 1 964 

Karen  Grimsley,  English 1963 

109 


Beau  Grubb,  Math,  Business,  Administration   1956- 

R.  Haebich,  Math 1949-50 

Stanley  Harrington,  Art 1961-62 

Wilhehnine  Heard,  Spanish 1962 

Lois  Hellmund,  English 1965 

Dennis  Herrmann,  Industrial  Arts   1962- 

Helen  Hewett,  Biology   1942-44 

Pam  Hiiler,  Girls'  Physical  Education  1965-66 

Russell  Hogan,  English 1959-68 

S.  Holcombe,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1947 

Dorothy  Holland,  Home  Economics 1945-46 

Lorene  HoIIister,  English 1943-45 

E.  Hoopes,  English  1956 

William  Ingersoll,  History,  French 1959-60 

Lola  Jacobsen,  English 1951-52 

Norman  James,  Boys'  Physical  Education 1958-60 

H.  Jensen,  Science 1940-41 

Virginia  Jensen,  History   1963 

William  Jensen,  Boys'  Physical  Education 1960 

Fern  C.  Johnson,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1945 

Richard  Johnson,  Boys'  Physical  Education,  History 1961-63 

Alvin  Kaltofen,  Boys'  Physical  Education 1963-67 

Kevin  M.  Keenan,  Math 1938-63 

Donn  Kerschbaumer,  Art  1963- 

Kathryn  King,  Business,  Social  Studies 1943-44 

Arthur  Kleck,  German,  Science,  Administration   1961- 

Helen  Knierim,  Girls'  Physical  Education   1953-57 

Joan  Kohaut,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1959-61 

Amy  Kolflat  (Peterson),  French 1960-61 

Raymond  Kracik,  Drivers'  Education,  Boy's  Physical  Education  .  .  1964- 

Edward  Krueger,  German 1963- 

Lester  D.  Lange,  Business 1941 

Howard  Lare,  Science  1944 

J.  La  Rocque,  English 1950 

Joseph  Lawlor,  Spanish,  Portuguese 1952- 

D.  Lawrence,  English 1952 

M.  Lawson,  Spanish,  English   1950 

Roy  A.  Latimer,  Typing  . 1945 

Edgar  Lindenmeyer,  Boys'  Physical  Education   1935-64 

Myra  Long,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1947-49 

Robert  Lovell,  Math   1965-68 

L.  R.  Lundeen,  Industrial  Arts   1941 

Edward  Lundin,  English 1965-67 

L.  H.  MacConkey,  Math 1945 

E.  Majosit,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1946-46 

John  C.  Maloney,  Music,  Administration 1936- 

Gayla  Manuel,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1959-60 

Elizabeth  Marcotte,  Home  Economics   1961-63 

Charles  McDermand,  Math 1957- 

Hazel  McFarland,  Math 1943 

Eleanor  McMurrin  (Bennett),  French 1961- 

110 


Lenard  Meyer,  Science 1963-64 

M.  Miles,  English    1953 

Deborah  Miller,  English   1958 

Margaret  Moberly,  Business,  Social  Studies 1942 

Kay  Monier,  English,  Drama 1961 

Ray  Moore,  English,  Administration   1935-61 

Enrico  Mordini,  Spanish 1963-65 

Ronald  Moreland,  Drivers  Ed.,  Boys'  Physical  Education 1961- 

James  Morgan,  Latin 1961 

M.  Moses,  Home  Economics   1954 

Francis  Mullin,  Social  Studies,  English 1950- 

Elmer  Mumm,  Industrial  Arts  Assistant 1938 

J.  W.  Munro,  Art   1962 

Glen  Naselius,  Math   1946 

S.  Neal,  Math 1955 

R.  Nelson,  History    1953 

Lillian  Nelson,  English   1959-60 

Stanley  Nelson,  Math 1935-42 

Richard  O'Dair,  Math,  Administration 1956- 

Eva  Ohlmeyer,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1953 

Richard  Olufs,  Math   1962- 

Bernice  Palmquist,  Spanish,  English 1942-48 

M.  Palmquist,  English 1 959 

Gertrude  Parcells,  Art 1 944 

J.  Parliament,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1949-51 

Thomas  Parenteau,  Math   1 956 

Lee  Pavla,  English 1 964-66 

Karen  Pender,  English    1961-63 

D.  Jackie  Persinger,  Spanish  . 1961-67 

F.  J.  Peterson,  Social  Studies .  . 1 946 

J.  Phypiak,  History   1952 

L.  E.  Radke,  Spanish,  English 1951 

M.  F.  Ragsdale,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1957-58 

Helen  Rahe,  Art   1962 

David  Ransom,  Math   1957-66 

Gale  Rattner  (Golovan),  English    1962-65 

Willetta  Reber,  French   1941 

J.  Riewer,  Music   1 946 

Gerhard  Robien,  Science,  Math   1956- 

W.  A.  Rupp,  Home  Economics 1956-57 

J.  Rust,  English    1954-56 

Russell  Ruswick,  Science    1964- 

Joseph  Salisbury,  Science 1961-66 

M.  Samelson,  Home  Economics 1950-52 

B.  L.  Sandberg,  History   1955 

J.  Sayro,  Girls'  Physical  Education 1950-51 

Herman  Schillereff,  Industrial  Arts 1956-65 

Robert  Schmalfuss,  English,  Guidance 1961-70 

A.  C.  Serfling,  Business 1 945-54 

Charlene  Sexton,  History    1963 

R.  Shaller,  English,  History 1951 

ill 


Robert  Shamo,  Music 1962-65 

David  Shaub,  Science   1965- 

Clara  Sharer,  French 1935-40,42-43 

Thomas  Short,  Biology,  Commerce,  Boys'  Physical  Education  .  .  .  1936-41,46-72 

Bruce  Siewerth,  English 1964 

Barbara  Silber,  English  . 1964- 

Ruth  Slayton,  Home  Economics 1947-49 

Catherine  Smith,  Art 1965 

Gary  Smith,  History 1965-68 

Joan  Smith,  English,  Speech 1941-42 

Donald  Spooner,  History 1963- 

Clement  Steele,  Math 1963-66 

John  Stella,  Art 1960 

D.  P.  Sregall,  Business 1955 

Lester  St.  John,  Science 1942-72 

Helen  Sutherin,  Latin 1958-59 

Conrad  Swan,  Business 1935- 

Margaret  Swanson,  Home  Economics 1945 

Cora  L.  Tebbetts,  Social  Studies 1935-41 

J.  Thompson,  Art 1955 

Mary  Thome-Thomsen,  English    1957-64,66-67 

L.  Vern  Tinkham,  Commerce 1935-37 

Frank  Townsend,  English 1951- 

Virginia  Travis,  Business 1961 

Virginia  Truslow,  Art  1957-60 

Sandra  Ullmann,   French    1964,  68 

Elsa  Utsch,  English 1960-63 

C.  K.  Vickers,  Science   1957-59 

Ethelyn  Voigt,  English 1957 

Alfred  Voss,  Math   1960-61 

Isabel  Voss,  English   1960-61 

M.  Wagner,  Music   1949-52 

W.  Walton,  Science  1952 

N.  Ward,  English 1957 

June  Waser,  Social  Studies,  English 1937-39 

Kathreen  Weisel,  English   1964-65,  67 

Elizabeth  Wentworth,  Latin   1935-43 

Harriet  West,  Home  Economics,  Biology 1935-38 

Paul  Whiting,  French 1965- 

J.  Wilner,  Music 1955-57 

M.  L.  Zearing,  English   1949 


112 


Faculty  Salaries 


Armbruster    $  750 

Bailey    2,500 

Ballard    3,000 

Connelly    2,870 

Eiker   2,600 

Kerfoot    2,445 

Lindenmeyer    2,750 

Moore    4,000 

Nelson   2,750 

Phipps    2,500 


(1935-36) 


Read    1,900 

Richardson  &  asst.1  2,200 

Rodenbeck    3,028 

Shaver    3,210 

Short2     1,200 

Swan    500 

Tebbetts    1,500 

Tinkham    ........  1,350 

Wentworth 2,000 

Approx.  avrg.  sal.  .  2,270 


Richardson  was  the  psychologist  for  both  the  Lake  Forest  and  Highland  Park 
high  schools. 
2Short  was  paid  for  6  months  work  at  $200/month. 


(1964-65) 


Alleman $  8,750 

Anderson     6,200 

Atwell    7,100 

Balestrery 6,000 

Barry 7,696 

Beihold    10,100 

Benton 7,996 

Berlatsky   5,800 

Bertsos 6,200 

Bills 6,000 

Blackwell 7,000 

Borich    8,200 

Braman   7,400 

Buckowich 8,900 

Burnham    2,500  (1/3  time) 

Ciesar    6,100 

Clemons    7,696 

Conway   8,152 

Cory 10,400 

Crampton    6,350 

Doerfler 10,640 

Earles    6,400 

Eiker    10,200 

Fiester   8,750 

Fortney    6,700 

Fosberg    6,300 

Fossell   6,500 

Gallery 6,000 

Golovan 6,000 

Gram 7,650 

Greenberg    1,000(2  hr./day) 


Grubb    8,000 

Hermann    6,400 

Hogan    7,488 

Huebner 5,500 

Jensen    6,980 

Kaltofen     6,500 

Kerschbaumer    ....  7,800 

Kleck 7,400 

Knox    8,300 

Kracik   5,800 

Krueger    6,283 

Lawlor 8,936 

Maloney     12,400 

McDermand     8,000 

McMurrin    6,800 

Metcalf    . 18,500 

Meyer    5,800 

Mordini .  5,800 

Moreland 6,968 

Moore    3,000  (2/5  time) 

Morgan    9,840 

Mullin    9,640 

O'Dair   10,800 

Olufs    9,070 

Paulak   5,500 

Perrizo 5,800 

Persinger 6,700 

Ransom   7,600 

Robien     9,000 

Ruswick     5,500 

St.  John 10,540 


113 


Salisbury    8,350 

Schillereff    9,740 

Schmalfuss 7,400 

Shamo    6,400 

Short    11,500 

Siewertn     6,100 

Silber 6,100 

Simon    14,700 

Spooner   8,500 

Steele 6,500 


Steinke 9,200 

Swan    10,455 

Thorne-Thomsen  .  .  8.300 

Tobasco 11,500 

Townsend    10,400 

Uliman     5,900 

White 10,100 

Wiesel    3,000  (1/2  time) 

Apprx.   avrg.  sal.    .  7,950 


Approximate  Average  Faculty  Salary,  1935-65 


1935-36 $  2,270 

1936-37 2,320 

1937-38 2,410 

1938-39 2,310 

1939-40 2,340 

1940-41   2,470 

1941-42 2,470 

1942-43 2,540 

1943-44 2,550 

1944-45 2,920 

1945-46 2,900 

1946-47 3,240 

1947-48 3,760 

1948-49 4,100 

1949-50 4,140 

1950-51   4,320 


1951-52 4,630 

1952-53 4,960 

1953-54 5,240 

1954-55 5,450 

1955-56 5,560 

1956-57 5,760 

1957-58 5,660 

1958-59 6,460 

1959-60 6,770 

1960-61   6,760 

1961-62 7,040 

1962-63 7,370 

1963-64 7,510 

1964-65 7,950 

(see  graph) 


114 


Average 

Annual 

Salary 

($) 


1935-      36- 
6         7 

37- 
8 

38- 

9 

39- 

40 

40- 

1 

41- 

2 

42- 
3 

43- 
4 

44- 
5 

45- 

6 

46- 
7 

47- 
8 

48- 
9 

49- 

50 

50- 
1 

51- 
2 

52- 

3 

53- 
4 

54- 
5 

55- 
6 

56- 

7 

57- 
8 

58- 
9 

59- 
60 

60- 
1 

61- 
2 

62- 

3 

63- 
4 

64- 
5 

School 
Year 

— ►- 

Original  Floorplans 


< 

T^us 

< -^ 

13  \nismm  i 

FIRST  FLOOR 


SECOND  FLOOR 


BASEMENT 


Desist 
LpcKefcs 


l^ck^fiS- 


OF 

ROOM 


mreAH 


tnL  honlek 

BOILER 

Bin 

Room  "^^ 

-£  4 

'  '    1 

&0HJ5E. 


fj/AJBfrH 


tH/Z/V£A/ 


1 


List  of  Sources  Consulted 


The  Forest  Scout:  Written  and  printed  by  the  students  of  Lake  Forest  High  School. 
The  following  issues  were  used: 


1937_October  13 

November  10 

1938— January  19 
February  16 
March  16 
April  6 
May  11 
June  8 

1939— January  18 
March  1 
April  5 
June  7 

1940— October  2 
October  30 
November  20 

1941— October  8 
October  30 
November  19 
December  17 

1942— April  1 
May  6 
June  3 

September  10 
October  28 
December  16 

1943— February  10 
March  10 
April  7 
May  5 
May  10 
June  2 
October  13 
November  3 
December  15 

1944 — January  12 
April  5 
May  10 
May  31 
October  4 
October  25 
December  20 

1945— May  23 

1946— January  30 
April  3 

1947— October  22 
November  19 
December  17 


1948— April  28 
May  19 
September  29 

1949— January  26 
February  23 
March  30 
May  18 
September  28 
October  26 
November  23 
December  14 

1950— January  31 
February  28 
May  24 
September  27 
October  25 
November  22 
December  19 

1951— January  31 
February  28 
March  28 
April  25 
September  26 
October  31 

1952— January  30 
February  27 
April  30 
May  27 

1953— September  24 
September  30 
November  25 

1954— February  24 
April  28 
May  28 

October,  1954  -  June, 
issues  were  used. 

1955— October  6 

November  9 
December  14 

1956— January  18 
February  15 
March  21 
April  25 
May  16 
June  6 

1957__October  2 
October  16 


1955  _  All 


119 


December  18 

1964— May  15 

1958- 

—January  29 

1968— March  15 

February  26 

November  1 

September  24 

1969— September  24 

November  26 

1970— February  20 

December  17 

April  21 

1959- 

-April  29 

December  6 

October  14 

1972— May  19 

November  25 

Forest  Trails,  Lake  Forest  High  School's 

December  16 

yearbook,  was  used  for  every  year  from 

1960- 

—January  27 

1935-1965  with  the  exception  of  those 

February  24 

from  the  following  years — 

March  30 

1935-36 

May  4 

1936-37 

June  1 

1940-41 

October  27 

1941-42 

November  17 

1944-45 

December  15 

1952-53 

1961- 

—January  24 

1956-57 

February  16 

Freshman  Test  —  put  out  by  the  student 

March  16 

council, 

April  21 

1961-62 

May  25 

1962-63 

September  14 

Lake  Forest  Student  Council  Constitution 

December  14 

1935,  1942 

1962- 

-May  17 

Lake  Forest  High  School  Scrapbooks  ■ — 

September  7 

October  29,  1952 

September  27 

February  14,  19,  1953 

October  12 

November  11,  1957 

November  9 

Minutes  of  the  Board  of  Educattion  Meet- 

November 30 

ings  during  the  years: 

December  21 

1949-55 

1963- 

—September  6 

1958 

October  24 

1960-62 

THE  LAKE  FORESTER— 

-the  following  issues  were  used: 

1936: 

September  19 

1940:  August  29 

October  22 

September  5 

1937: 

January  28 

October  3 

February  18,  25 

November  7,  28 

March  11 

1941:  January  3 

May  6 

February  13,  27 

September  23 

August  28 

October  7 

September  25 

November  4,  11,  18 

December  4,  11,  28 

1938: 

February  17,  24 

1942:  All  issues  February  -  April 

March  17 

June  4 

September  1 

September  10,  7 

November  17 

All  issues  December 

All  issues  September, 

1938  -           1943:  September  3 

June,  1939 

All  issues  October  and 

1939: 

October  20 

December 

120 


1944:  January  2 

June  5 

May  30 

1953: 

September  3,  17 

October  27 

October  15 

December  1 

November  19 

1945:  February  2,  23 

1954: 

January  28 

May  4 

April  28 

July  27 

May  28 

All  issues  November 

1955: 

December  8 

1946:  May  7 

1956: 

March  15 

August  2 

July  26 

September  20,  27 

October  4 

1947:  January  3,  10,  27 

November  15 

February  7 

December  6 

April  4 

1957: 

March  7,  26 

September  12,  19,  26 

August  19 

October  10 

October  31 

November  21 

December  19 

December  12 

1958: 

January  23 

1948:  January  9 

September  11,  18 

February  13,  20 

October  2 

March  19 

November  13 

April  2 

December  11 

May  3,  21 

1959: 

January  1,  8 

August  20 

February  5,  12 

September  10,  17,  24 

March  19 

October  8,  22,  29 

May  28 

November  12,  19,  26 

September  10,  28 

December  10,  17 

October  22 

1949:  January  7,  14,  21,  28 

November  5,  12 

February  4,  11,  18,  25 

December  9,  17 

March  4,  18,  25 

1960: 

January  21,  28 

April  1,  8,  15 

March  3,  17,  31 

May  6,  20 

April  14,  22 

June  3,  10,  29 

May  5 

July  1,  15,  29 

1960-1961:  Centennial  issues 

August  3,  12,  19,  26 

1962: 

January  11,  18 

September  9 

March  1,  22 

October  14 

September  27 

December  2,  9 

October  11,  25 

1950:  January  5,  12,  26,  28 

November  22 

April  21 

1963: 

:  January  17 

October  12,  19 

February  14 

November  23 

March  21 

December  28 

April  18 

1951:  March  22 

May  23 

April  5 

October  10 

May  10,  31 

1964 

:  January  7,  14,  21 

June  21 

February  18 

September  13,  27 

April  22 

October  4,  18 

May  27 

1952:  January  24 

June  10,  17 

February  9,  17,  28 

1972 

:  June  8 

April  24 

THE  LAKE  BLUFF  CHAT 

May  22,  29 

1910 

:  June  4 

121 


1913:  June  7  1956-57 

1914:  June  18  1957-58 

August  20  1960-61 

December  24  1961-62 

Teacher's  Class  Reports  were  used  for       The  Student  Handbook,  or  The  Freshman 

the  school  years  of:  Guide,  compiled  by  the  Student  Council, 

1935-36  was  used  for  the  following  years: 

1936-37  1936-37 

1938-39  1937-38 

1941-42  1940-41 

1942-43  1942-43 

1945-46  1943-44 

1946-47  1945-46 

1948-49  1948-49 

1949-50  1949-50 

1953-54  1959-60 

1954-55  1961-62 

1955-56  1963-64 

Minutes  of  the  Lake  Forest  Student  Council  meetings  during  the  years: 

1935-40,  1960-61. 
Lake  Forest  High  School  News  Report.  December,  1970,  May,  1972. 
By-Laws  of  "The  Cellar,"  1965. 
Cellar  Constitution  and  Cellar  Guidelines. 
Literature  put  out  by  the  Lake  Bluff  Committee  on  Annexation  in  1930, 

1.  Why  Lake  Bluff  Should  Have  Its  Own  High  School. 

2.  Why  Lake  Forest  Should  Annex  Lake  Bluff. 
Highlights  of  the  Class  of  '48. 

This  Fabulous  Century,  New  York:  Time-Life  Books,  1969. 

The  Shoreline,  (survey  ed.)  XVI  (June,  1936),  pg.  1-4. 

Waukegan  News  Sun  (January  22,  February  22,  April  4,  1957). 

"Lake  Forest  High  School:  Selective,  Small."  The  Chicago  Sun  Times  (January 

14,  1960),  36-37. 
Arpee,  Edward.  Lake  Forest:  History  and  Reminisences.  Lake  Forest:  Rotary  Club 

of  Lake  Forest,  1963. 
Hibbard,  Sally.  Wagon  Wheels:  The  Story  of  the  Forty-niners.  1949. 
Lake  County  Superintendent's  Salary  Records,  1935-1966. 
Lake  Forest  High  School  Superintendent's  Records  on  Enrollment,  1949-1968. 
Norman,  Harold  (ed.),  Detachment  of  Lake  Forest. 
Petty,  W.  C.  Order  Creating  Community  High  School  District  Number  115,  Lake 

County,  111.  June  29,  1949. 
Wolters  and  Pertz.  History  of  District  Number  113.  June  28,  1965. 
"Changes  in  Name  of  School  District  Number  113,  Lake  County,  111."  School 

District  Number  113,  April,  1967. 
"Detachment  of  Lake  Forest,"  School  District  Number  113,  April,  1967. 

WALKING  TOUR  OF  THE  HIGH  SCHOOL 

Muccitelli,  Albert March  18,  1972 

Thorup,  Kai March  18,  1972 

IN-CLASS  INTERVIEWS 

Maloney,  John March  14,  1972 

Swan,  Conrad February  21,  1972 

Townsend,  Frank March  24,  1972 

122 


Vliet,  Elmer April  27,  1972 

PERSONAL  INTERVIEWS 
(All  interviews  took  place  in  1972) 

Anaclerio,  Janice March  15,  April  13 

Andersen,  John March  14 

Benton,  James  March  29 

Buckowich,  Albert March  20 

Cadarian,  Paul April  3 

Cankar,  Mrs.  Elizabeth  Thorup March  14,  16 

Cappozi,  Mike March  16 

Gavins,  Theodore . .  .March  15,  25,  26 

Christensen,  Mrs.  Susan  Kuhlmann March  15 

demons,  Mrs.  Robert March  2,  27,  May  17 

Cory,  Miss  Helen   March  16,  29,  May  12,  17 

Cushman,  Mrs.  Betty  Schroeder March  13,  14 

Davidson,  Mrs.  Joy  Gross March  16 

Doerfler,  Mme.  Madeleine February  24,  March  2,  15,  16, 

20,  23,  30 

Dunn,  Sargent  "Spot"   March  27 

Grant,  Thomas March  12 

Eiker,  Mrs.  Curtis March  29 

Emma,  Joseph  Jr March  16,  26 

Evers,  John  W March  12 

Faulks,  Peggy    

Fiester,  Charles    March  27,  28 

Hansen,  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Jerrold March  15,  May  14,  18 

Hintz,  Mrs.  Donald  S March  14 

Jackson,  Mrs.  Alberta March  14 

Jenkins,  Mrs.  Ethyl May  10 

Jenkins,  Charles    April  5 

Johnson,  Mrs.  L.  (Pat  Olson) March  14,  15 

Just,  Mrs.  William  (Bernice  Palmquist) March  27 

Knox,  Ellen  March  2,  3 

Kuhlmann,  Allen April  10 

Labellart,  Anthony March  26 

Lackie,  Gordon   March  15,  16 

Lawler,  Joseph February  25,  March  21 

Levinson,  Richard March  16 

Lofgrem,  William .  March  26 

McCaffrey,  Mrs.  Donald March  15,  April  26 

Mahler,  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Gerry April  15,  16 

Maloney,  John March  28,  May  8,  June  12 

Matton,  Henry March  1 6 

Merry,  Mrs.  Judy  Klisch April  3 

Miller,  David March  23,  29 

Myers,  Mrs.  Mary  Jane March  3,  8,  13,  16 

Nelson,   Richard    April  10 

Nielson,  Charles March  15 

O'Dair,  Richard March  17,  27,  April  13, 

May  10 
Peters,  Mrs.  Judy  Glader April  5 

123 


Peterson,   Hester    March  6 

Petty,  W.  C May  9 

Revenaugh,  Robert .March  13 

Revenaugh,  William February  2,  21 

Robein,  Gerhard   March  29,  May  19 

Rose,  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Joseph February  23,  March  10 

Short,  Thomas   May  18,  June  12 

Simmens,  Mr.  and  Mrs.  James April  30 

Smith,  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Brook March  15,  16,  May  16,  17 

Sorensen,  Mrs.  John  (Marjorie  Purcell) March  8,  13,  14,  15,  27 

Spiedel,   Phillip    March  28 

Spooner,  Donald March  28,  April  14,  May  17 

Stiles,  Lynn   March  6,  25 

Swan,   Conrad    February  2,  7,  9,  18,  21,  22, 

29,  March  16,  April  14, 

May  8 
St.  John,  Lester March  17,  27,  29,  February 

28,29,  May  12,  16,  June  12 

Tabern,  Mrs.  Kay  Kuhlmann March  13,  16,  April  25 

Toomey,  Peter March  10 

Turpel,   Dennis    May  12 

Van  Eeckhuot,  Marcel April  5 

Van  Vlissingen,  Mrs.  Doris  Smithson March  27 

Vliet,  Elmer May  1 1 

Volpe,  Mrs.  Elise  Vienna March  16,  28 

Volpe,  Richard   March  28 

Volpe,  Samuel  March  26 

Ward,  Mrs.  John April  7 


124